The source of much copied reference material: Paul Vinkenoog
Copyright © 2017-2024 Firebird Project and all contributing authors, under the Public Documentation License Version 1.0.
Please refer to the License Notice in the Appendix
If you notice any discrepancies, errors or anything missing, please report this on https://github.com/FirebirdSQL/firebird-documentation/issues or submit a pull request with the necessary changes. |
1. About the Firebird 4.0 Language Reference
This Language Reference describes the SQL language supported by Firebird 4.0.
This Firebird 4.0 Language Reference is the third comprehensive manual to cover all aspects of the query language used by developers to communicate, through their applications, with the Firebird relational database management system.
1.1. Subject
The subject of this volume is wholly Firebird’s implementation of the SQL relational database language. Firebird conforms closely with international standards for SQL, from data type support, data storage structures, referential integrity mechanisms, to data manipulation capabilities and access privileges. Firebird also implements a robust procedural language — procedural SQL (PSQL) — for stored procedures, stored functions, triggers, and dynamically-executable code blocks. These are the areas addressed in this volume.
This document does not cover configuration of Firebird, Firebird command-line tools, nor its programming APIs.
1.2. Authorship
For the Firebird 4.0 version, the Firebird 3.0 Language Reference was taken as the base, and Firebird 4.0 information was added based on the Firebird 4.0 Release Notes and feature documentation.
1.2.1. Contributors
Direct Content
-
Dmitry Filippov (writer)
-
Alexander Karpeykin (writer)
-
Alexey Kovyazin (writer, editor)
-
Dmitry Kuzmenko (writer, editor)
-
Denis Simonov (writer, editor)
-
Paul Vinkenoog (writer, designer)
-
Dmitry Yemanov (writer)
-
Mark Rotteveel (writer, editor)
Resource Content
-
Adriano dos Santos Fernandes
-
Alexander Peshkov
-
Vladyslav Khorsun
-
Claudio Valderrama
-
Helen Borrie
-
and others
1.3. Reporting Errors or Missing Content
If you find errors, missing content or other problems in this document, please report this in our issue tracker of the firebird-documentation GitHub repository.
Pull requests with changes and fixes are also much appreciated.
1.4. Acknowledgments
Sponsors and Other Donors
See also the Acknowledgements in the Firebird 2.5 Language Reference for the sponsors of the initial Russian version and its translation.
Sponsors of the Russian Language Reference Manual
-
Moscow Exchange (Russia)
Moscow Exchange is the largest exchange holding in Russia and Eastern Europe, founded on December 19, 2011, through the consolidation of the MICEX (founded in 1992) and RTS (founded in 1995) exchange groups. Moscow Exchange ranks among the world’s top 20 exchanges by trading in bonds and by the total capitalization of shares traded, as well as among the 10 largest exchange platforms for trading derivatives.
-
Technical support and developer of administrator tools for the Firebird DBMS.
1.5. Contributing
There are several ways you can contribute to the documentation of Firebird, or Firebird in general:
-
Participate on the mailing lists (see https://www.firebirdsql.org/en/mailing-lists/)
-
Report bugs or submit pull requests on GitHub (https://github.com/FirebirdSQL/)
-
Become a developer (contact us on firebird-devel)
-
Donate to the Firebird Foundation (see https://www.firebirdsql.org/en/donate/)
-
Become a paying member or sponsor of the Firebird Foundation (see https://www.firebirdsql.org/en/firebird-foundation/)
2. SQL Language Structure
This reference describes the SQL language supported by Firebird.
2.1. Background to Firebird’s SQL Language
To begin, a few points about some characteristics that are in the background to Firebird’s language implementation.
2.1.1. SQL Flavours
Distinct subsets of SQL apply to different sectors of activity. The SQL subsets in Firebird’s language implementation are:
-
Dynamic SQL (DSQL)
-
Procedural SQL (PSQL)
-
Embedded SQL (ESQL)
-
Interactive SQL (ISQL)
Dynamic SQL is the major part of the language which corresponds to the Part 2 (SQL/Foundation) part of the SQL specification. DSQL represents statements passed by client applications through the public Firebird API and processed by the database engine.
Procedural SQL augments Dynamic SQL to allow compound statements containing local variables, assignments, conditions, loops and other procedural constructs.
PSQL corresponds to the Part 4 (SQL/PSM) part of the SQL specifications.
Originally, PSQL extensions were available in persistent stored modules (procedures and triggers) only, but in more recent releases they were surfaced in Dynamic SQL as well (see EXECUTE BLOCK
).
Embedded SQL defines the DSQL subset supported by Firebird gpre, the application which allows you to embed SQL constructs into your host programming language (C, C++, Pascal, Cobol, etc.) and preprocess those embedded constructs into the proper Firebird API calls.
Only a portion of the statements and expressions implemented in DSQL are supported in ESQL. |
Interactive ISQL refers to the language that can be executed using Firebird isql, the command-line application for accessing databases interactively. As a regular client application, its native language is DSQL. It also offers a few additional commands that are not available outside its specific environment.
Both DSQL and PSQL subsets are completely presented in this reference. Neither ESQL nor ISQL flavours are described here unless mentioned explicitly.
2.1.2. SQL Dialects
SQL dialect is a term that defines the specific features of the SQL language that are available when accessing a database. SQL dialects can be defined at the database level and specified at the connection level. Three dialects are available:
-
Dialect 1 is intended solely to allow backward comptibility with legacy databases from very old InterBase versions, v.5 and below. Dialect 1 databases retain certain language features that differ from Dialect 3, the default for Firebird databases.
-
Date and time information are stored in a
DATE
data type. ATIMESTAMP
data type is also available, that is identical to thisDATE
implementation. -
Double quotes may be used as an alternative to apostrophes for delimiting string data. This is contrary to the SQL standard — double quotes are reserved for a distinct syntactic purpose both in standard SQL and in Dialect 3. Double-quoting strings is therefore to be avoided strenuously.
-
The precision for
NUMERIC
andDECIMAL
data types is smaller than in Dialect 3 and, if the precision of a fixed decimal number is greater than 9, Firebird stores it internally as a long floating point value. -
The
BIGINT
(64-bit integer) data type is not supported. -
Identifiers are case-insensitive and must always comply with the rules for regular identifiers — see the section Identifiers below.
-
Although generator values are stored as 64-bit integers, a Dialect 1 client request,
SELECT GEN_ID (MyGen, 1)
, for example, will return the generator value truncated to 32 bits.
-
-
Dialect 2 is available only on the Firebird client connection and cannot be set in the database. It is intended to assist debugging of possible problems with legacy data when migrating a database from dialect 1 to 3.
-
In Dialect 3 databases,
-
numbers (
DECIMAL
andNUMERIC
data types) are stored internally as long fixed point values (scaled integers) when the precision is greater than 9. -
The
TIME
data type is available for storing time-of-day data only. -
The
DATE
data type stores only date information. -
The 64-bit integer data type
BIGINT
is available. -
Double quotes are reserved for delimiting non-regular identifiers, enabling object names that are case-sensitive or that do not meet the requirements for regular identifiers in other ways.
-
All strings must be delimited with single quotes (apostrophes).
-
Generator values are stored as 64-bit integers.
-
Use of Dialect 3 is strongly recommended for newly developed databases and applications. Both database and connection dialects should match, except under migration conditions with Dialect 2. This reference describes the semantics of SQL Dialect 3 unless specified otherwise. |
2.2. Basic Elements: Statements, Clauses, Keywords
The primary construct in SQL is the statement. A statement defines what the database management system should do with a particular data or metadata object. More complex statements contain simpler constructs — clauses and options.
- Clauses
-
A clause defines a certain type of directive in a statement. For instance, the
WHERE
clause in aSELECT
statement and in some other data manipulation statements (UPDATE
,DELETE
) specifies criteria for searching one or more tables for the rows that are to be selected, updated or deleted. TheORDER BY
clause specifies how the output data — result set — should be sorted. - Options
-
Options, being the simplest constructs, are specified in association with specific keywords to provide qualification for clause elements. Where alternative options are available, it is usual for one of them to be the default, used if nothing is specified for that option. For instance, the
SELECT
statement will return all of the rows that match the search criteria unless theDISTINCT
option restricts the output to non-duplicated rows. - Keywords
-
All words that are included in the SQL lexicon are keywords. Some keywords are reserved, meaning their usage as identifiers for database objects, parameter names or variables is prohibited in some or all contexts. Non-reserved keywords can be used as identifiers, although it is not recommended. From time to time, non-reserved keywords may become reserved when some new language feature is introduced.
For instance, the following statement will be executed without errors because, although
ABS
is a keyword, it is not a reserved word.CREATE TABLE T (ABS INT NOT NULL);
On the contrary, the following statement will return an error because
ADD
is both a keyword and a reserved word.CREATE TABLE T (ADD INT NOT NULL);
Refer to the list of reserved words and keywords in the chapter Reserved Words and Keywords.
2.3. Identifiers
All database objects have names, often called identifiers. The maximum identifier length is 63 characters character set UTF8 (252 bytes).
It is possible to restrict the actual maximum identifier length through configuration. Consult the Firebird 4.0 Release Notes for details. In this language reference we assume the default configuration of 63 characters (252 bytes). |
Two types of names are valid as identifiers: regular names, similar to variable names in regular programming languages, and delimited names that are specific to SQL. To be valid, each type of identifier must conform to a set of rules, as follows:
2.3.1. Rules for Regular Object Identifiers
-
Length cannot exceed 63 characters
-
The name must start with an unaccented, 7-bit ASCII alphabetic character. It may be followed by other 7-bit ASCII letters, digits, underscores or dollar signs. No other characters, including spaces, are valid. The name is case-insensitive, meaning it can be declared and used in either upper or lower case. Thus, from the system’s point of view, the following names are the same:
fullname FULLNAME FuLlNaMe FullName
<name> ::= <letter> | <name><letter> | <name><digit> | <name>_ | <name>$ <letter> ::= <upper letter> | <lower letter> <upper letter> ::= A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O | P | Q | R | S | T | U | V | W | X | Y | Z <lower letter> ::= a | b | c | d | e | f | g | h | i | j | k | l | m | n | o | p | q | r | s | t | u | v | w | x | y | z <digit> ::= 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9
2.3.2. Rules for Delimited Object Identifiers
-
Length cannot exceed 63 characters in character set UTF8 (252 bytes). Identifiers are stored in character set
UTF8
, which means characters outside the ASCII range are stored using 2 to 4 bytes. -
The entire string must be enclosed in double-quotes, e.g.
"anIdentifier"
-
It may contain any character from the
UTF8
character set, including accented characters, spaces and special characters -
An identifier can be a reserved word
-
Delimited identifiers are case-sensitive in all contexts
-
Trailing spaces in delimited names are removed, as with any string constant
-
Delimited identifiers are available in Dialect 3 only. For more details on dialects, see SQL Dialects
<delimited name> ::= "<permitted_character>[<permitted_character> ...]"
A delimited identifier such as |
2.4. Literals
Literals are used to directly represent data. Examples of standard types of literals are:
integer - 0, -34, 45, 0X080000000;
fixed-point - 0.0, -3.14
floating-point - 3.23e-23;
string - 'text', 'don''t!';
binary string - x'48656C6C6F20776F726C64'
date - DATE '2018-01-19';
time - TIME '15:12:56';
timestamp - TIMESTAMP '2018-01-19 13:32:02';
boolean - true, false, unknown
null state - null
Details about literals for each data type are discussed in section Literals (Constants) of chapter Common Language Elements.
2.5. Operators and Special Characters
A set of special characters is reserved for use as operators or separators.
<special char> ::=
<space> | " | % | & | ' | ( | ) | * | + | , | -
| . | / | : | ; | < | = | > | ? | [ | ] | ^ | { | }
Some of these characters, alone or in combinations, may be used as operators (arithmetical, string, logical), as SQL command separators, to quote identifiers and to mark the limits of string literals or comments.
<operator> ::= <string concatenation operator> | <arithmetic operator> | <comparison operator> | <logical operator> <string concatentation operator> ::= "||" <arithmetic operator> ::= * | / | + | - | <comparison operator> ::= = | <> | != | ~= | ^= | > | < | >= | <= | !> | ~> | ^> | !< | ~< | ^< <logical operator> ::= NOT | AND | OR
For more details on operators, see Expressions.
2.6. Comments
Comments may be present in SQL scripts, SQL statements and PSQL modules. A comment can be any text specified by the code writer, usually used to document how particular parts of the code work. The parser ignores the text of comments.
Firebird supports two types of comments: block and in-line.
<comment> ::= <block comment> | <single-line comment> <block comment> ::= /* <character>[<character> …] */ <single-line comment> ::= -- <character>[<character> …]<end line>
Block comments start with the /*
character pair and end with the */
character pair.
Text in block comments may be of any length and can occupy multiple lines.
In-line comments start with a pair of hyphen characters, --
and continue up to the end of the current line.
CREATE PROCEDURE P(APARAM INT)
RETURNS (B INT)
AS
BEGIN
/* This text will be ignored during the execution of the statement
since it is a comment
*/
B = A + 1; -- In-line comment
SUSPEND;
END
3. Data Types and Subtypes
Data of various types are used to:
-
define columns in a database table in the
CREATE TABLE
statement or change columns usingALTER TABLE
-
declare or change a domain using the
CREATE DOMAIN
orALTER DOMAIN
statements -
declare local variables in stored procedures, PSQL blocks and triggers and specify parameters in stored procedures
-
indirectly specify arguments and return values when declaring external functions (UDFs — user-defined functions)
-
provide arguments for the
CAST()
function when explicitly converting data from one type to another
Name | Size | Precision & Limits | Description |
---|---|---|---|
|
64 bits |
From -263 to (263 - 1) |
Signed 64-bit integer. This data type is available in Dialect 3 only |
|
n bytes |
from 1 to 32,767 bytes |
A fixed-length binary data type;
synonym for |
|
Varying |
The size of a |
A data type of variable size for storing large amounts of data, such as images, text, digital sounds. The basic structural unit is a segment. The blob subtype defines its content |
|
8 bits |
false, true, unknown |
Boolean data type |
|
n characters. Size in bytes depends on the encoding, the number of bytes in a character |
from 1 to 32,767 bytes |
A fixed-length character data type. Values shorter than the declared length are padded with spaces (NUL for character set OCTETS) up to the declared length. If the number of characters is not specified, 1 is used by default. |
|
32 bits |
From 0001-01-01 AD to 9999-12-31 AD |
Date only, no time element |
|
64 bits or 128 bits |
dec_prec = 16 or 34, defines the number of decimal digits |
Decimal floating-point type |
|
Varying (16, 32, 64 or 128 bits) |
precision = from 1 to 38, defines the least possible number of digits to store; scale = from 0 to 38, defines the number of digits after the decimal point |
A number with a decimal point that has scale digits after the point.
scale must be less than or equal to precision.
Example: |
|
64 bits |
2.225 * 10-308 to 1.797 * 10308 |
Double-precision IEEE, ~15 digits, reliable size depends on the platform |
|
32 bits |
1.175 * 10-38 to 3.402 * 1038 |
Single-precision IEEE, ~7 digits |
|
32 bits or 64 bits |
bin_prec binary precision |
Binary precision 1 - 24: synonym for |
|
32 bits |
-2,147,483,648 up to 2,147,483,647 |
Signed 32-bit integer |
|
128 bits |
From -2127 to (2127 - 1) |
Signed 128-bit integer |
|
Varying (16, 32, 64 or 128 bits) |
precision = from 1 to 38, defines the exact number of digits to store; scale = from 0 to 38, defines the number of digits after the decimal point |
A number with a decimal point that has scale digits after the point.
scale must be less than or equal to precision.
Example: |
|
32-bits |
|
Synonym for |
|
16 bits |
-32,768 to 32,767 |
Signed short (word) |
|
4 bytes |
0:00 to 23:59:59.9999 |
Time of day. It cannot be used to store an interval of time. |
|
6 bytes |
0:00 to 23:59:59.9999 |
Time of day with either a time zone offset or named zone. It cannot be used to store an interval of time. |
|
8 bytes |
From start of day 0001-01-01 AD to end of day 9999-12-31 AD |
Date and time of day |
|
10 bytes |
From start of day 0001-01-01 AD to end of day 9999-12-31 AD |
Date and time of day with either a time zone offset or named zone. |
|
n bytes |
from 1 to 32,765 bytes |
Variable length string type;
synonym for |
|
n characters. Size in bytes depends on the encoding, the number of bytes in a character |
from 1 to 32,765 bytes |
Variable length string type. The total size of characters in bytes cannot be larger than (32KB-3), taking into account their encoding. The two leading bytes store the declared length. There is no default size: the n argument is mandatory. Leading and trailing spaces are stored, and they are not trimmed, except for those trailing characters that are past the declared length. |
Note About Dates
Bear in mind that a time series consisting of dates in past centuries is processed without taking into account the actual historical facts, as though the Gregorian calendar were applicable throughout the entire series. |
3.1. Integer Data Types
The SMALLINT
, INTEGER
, BIGINT
and INT128
data types are used for integers of various precision in Dialect 3.
Firebird does not support an unsigned integer data type.
3.1.1. SMALLINT
The 16-bit SMALLINT
data type is for compact data storage of integer data for which only a narrow range of possible values is required.
Numbers of the SMALLINT
type are within the range from -216 to 216 - 1, that is, from -32,768 to 32,767.
SMALLINT
ExamplesCREATE DOMAIN DFLAG AS SMALLINT DEFAULT 0 NOT NULL
CHECK (VALUE=-1 OR VALUE=0 OR VALUE=1);
CREATE DOMAIN RGB_VALUE AS SMALLINT;
3.1.2. INTEGER
The INTEGER
data type is a 32-bit integer.
The shorthand name of the data type is INT
.
Numbers of the INTEGER
type are within the range from -232 to 232 - 1, that is, from -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
INTEGER
ExampleCREATE TABLE CUSTOMER (
CUST_NO INTEGER NOT NULL,
CUSTOMER VARCHAR(25) NOT NULL,
CONTACT_FIRST VARCHAR(15),
CONTACT_LAST VARCHAR(20),
...
PRIMARY KEY (CUST_NO) )
3.1.3. BIGINT
BIGINT
is an SQL:99-compliant 64-bit integer data type, available only in Dialect 3.
Numbers of the BIGINT
type are within the range from -263 to 263 - 1, or from -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to 9,223,372,036,854,775,807.
3.1.4. INT128
INT128
is a 128-bit integer data type.
This type is not defined in the SQL standard.
Numbers of the INT128
type are within the range from -2127 to 2127 - 1.
3.1.5. Hexadecimal Format for Integer Numbers
Constants of integer types can be specified in a hexadecimal format by means of 1 to 8 digits for INTEGER
, 9 to 16 hexadecimal digits for BIGINT
, and — since Firebird 4.0.1 — 10 to 32 hexadecimal digits for INT128
.
Hex representation for writing to SMALLINT
is not explicitly supported, but Firebird will transparently convert a hex number to SMALLINT
if necessary, provided it falls within the ranges of negative and positive SMALLINT
.
The usage and numerical value ranges of hexadecimal notation are described in more detail in the discussion of number constants in the chapter entitled Common Language Elements.
CREATE TABLE WHOLELOTTARECORDS (
ID BIGINT NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY,
DESCRIPTION VARCHAR(32)
);
INSERT INTO MYBIGINTS VALUES (
-236453287458723,
328832607832,
22,
-56786237632476,
0X6F55A09D42, -- 478177959234
0X7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF, -- 9223372036854775807
0XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF, -- -1
0X80000000, -- -2147483648, an INTEGER
0X080000000, -- 2147483648, a BIGINT
0XFFFFFFFF, -- -1, an INTEGER
0X0FFFFFFFF -- 4294967295, a BIGINT
);
The hexadecimal INTEGER
s in the above example are automatically cast to BIGINT
before being inserted into the table.
However, this happens after the numerical value is determined, so 0x80000000
(8 digits) and 0x080000000
(9 digits) will be saved as different BIGINT
values.
3.2. Floating-Point Data Types
Firebird supports two types of floating-point data types: approximate or binary floating-point data types (FLOAT
and DOUBLE PRECISION
), and decimal floating-point types (DECFLOAT
).
3.2.1. Approximate Floating-Point Data Types
Approximate floating-point data types are stored in an IEEE 754 binary format that comprises sign, exponent and mantissa.
Precision is dynamic, corresponding to the physical storage format of the value, which is exactly 4 bytes for the FLOAT
type and 8 bytes for DOUBLE PRECISION
.
Considering the peculiarities of storing floating-point numbers in a database, these data types are not recommended for storing monetary data. For the same reasons, columns with floating-point data are not recommended for use as keys or to have uniqueness constraints applied to them.
For testing data in columns with floating-point data types, expressions should check using a range, for instance, BETWEEN
, rather than searching for exact matches.
When using these data types in expressions, extreme care is advised regarding the rounding of evaluation results.
FLOAT
FLOAT [(bin_prec)]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
bin_prec |
Precision in binary digits, default is 24 1 - 24: 32-bit single precision 25 - 53: 64-bit double precision |
The FLOAT
data type defaults to a 32-bit single precision floating-point type with an approximate precision of 7 decimal digits after the decimal point (24 binary digits).
To ensure the safety of storage, rely on 6 decimal digits of precision.
The syntax FLOAT(bin_prec)
was introduced in Firebird 4.0, and behaves as follows:
-
1 <= _bin_prec <= 23: 32-bit single precision (synonym for
FLOAT
) -
25 <= _bin_prec <= 53: 64-bit double precision (synonym for
DOUBLE PRECISION
)
The behaviour of FLOAT
(without explicit precision) behaves as the SQL standard type REAL
.
Compatibility Notes
|
REAL
REAL
The data type REAL
is a synonym for FLOAT
, and is provided for syntax compatibility.
When used to define a column or parameter, it’s indistinguishable from using FLOAT
or FLOAT(1)
- FLOAT(24)
.
Compatibility Note
|
DOUBLE PRECISION
DOUBLE PRECISION
The DOUBLE PRECISION
data type is stored with an approximate precision of 15 digits.
Compatibility Notes
|
3.2.2. Decimal Floating-Point Types
Decimal floating-point are stored in an IEEE 754 decimal format that comprises sign, exponent and coefficient. Contrary to the approximate floating-point data types, precision is either 16 or 34 decimal digits.
DECFLOAT
DECFLOAT [(precision)]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
precision |
Precision in decimal digits, either 16 or 34. Default is 34. |
DECFLOAT
is a SQL:2016 standard-complient numeric type that stores floating-point number precisely (decimal floating-point type), unlike FLOAT
or DOUBLE PRECISION
that provide a binary approximation of the purported precision.
The type is stored and transmitted as IEEE 754 standard types Decimal64
(DECFLOAT(16)
) or Decimal128
(DECFLOAT(34)
).
All intermediate calculations are performed with 34-digit values.
Type | Maximum precision | Minimum Exponent | Maximum Exponent | Smallest value | Largest value |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
16 |
-383 |
+384 |
1E-398 |
9.9..9E+384 |
|
34 |
-6143 |
+6144 |
1E-6176 |
9.9..9E+6144 |
Observe that although the smallest exponent for DECFLOAT(16)
is -383, the smallest value has an exponent of -398, but 15 fewer digits.
And similar for DECFLOAT(34)
, smallest exponent is -6143, but the smalles value has an exponent of -6176, but 33 fewer digits.
The reason is that precision was “sacrificed” to be able to store a smaller value.
This is a result of how the value is stored: as a decimal value of 16 or 34 digits and an exponent.
For example 1.234567890123456e-383
is actually stored as coefficient 1234567890123456
and exponent -398
, while 1E-398
is stored as coefficient 1
, exponent -398
.
Behaviour of DECFLOAT
Operations
The behaviour of DECFLOAT
operations in a session, specifically rounding and error behaviour, can be configured using the SET DECFLOAT
management statement.
Length of DECFLOAT
Literals
It is possible to express DECFLOAT(34)
values in approximate numeric literals, but only for values with a mantissa of 20 or more digits, or an absolute exponent larger than 308.
Scientific notation literals with fewer digits or a smaller absolute exponent are DOUBLE PRECISION
literals.
Exact numeric literals with 40 or more digits — actually 39 digits, when larger than the maximum INT128
value — are also handled as DECFLOAT(34)
.
Alternatively, use a string literal and explicitly cast to the desired DECFLOAT
type.
The length of DECFLOAT
literals cannot exceed 1024 characters.
Scientific notation is required for greater values.
For example, 0.0<1020 zeroes>11
cannot be used as a literal, the equivalent in scientific notation, 1.1E-1022
is valid.
Similarly, 10<1022 zeroes>0
can be presented as 1.0E1024
.
Literals with more than 34 significant digits are rounded using the DECFLOAT
rounding mode of the session.
DECFLOAT
and Functions
Use with Standard Functions
A number of standard scalar functions can be used with expressions and values of the DECFLOAT
type.
They are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The aggregate functions SUM
, AVG
, MAX
and MIN
work with DECFLOAT
data, as do all the statistics aggregates (including but not limited to STDDEV
or CORR
).
Special Functions for DECFLOAT
Firebird supports four functions, designed to support DECFLOAT
data specifically:
COMPARE_DECFLOAT
-
compares two
DECFLOAT
values to be equal, different or unordered NORMALIZE_DECFLOAT
-
takes a single
DECFLOAT
argument and returns it in its simplest form QUANTIZE
-
takes two
DECFLOAT
arguments and returns the first argument scaled using the second value as a pattern TOTALORDER
-
performs an exact comparison on two
DECFLOAT
values
Detailed descriptions are available in the Special Functions for DECFLOAT
section of the Built-in Scalar Functions chapter.
3.3. Fixed-Point Data Types
Fixed-point data types ensure the predictability of multiplication and division operations, making them the choice for storing monetary values.
Firebird implements two fixed-point data types: NUMERIC
and DECIMAL
.
According to the standard, both types limit the stored number to the declared scale (the number of digits after the decimal point).
Different treatments limit precision for each type: precision for NUMERIC
columns is exactly “as declared”, while DECIMAL
columns accepts numbers whose precision is at least equal to what was declared.
The behaviour of |
For instance, NUMERIC(4, 2)
defines a number consisting altogether of four digits, including two digits after the decimal point;
that is, it can have up to two digits before the point and no more than two digits after the point.
If the number 3.1415 is written to a column with this data type definition, the value of 3.14 will be saved in the NUMERIC(4, 2)
column.
The form of declaration for fixed-point data, for instance, NUMERIC(p, s)
, is common to both types.
It is important to realise that the s
argument in this template is scale, rather than “a count of digits after the decimal point”.
Understanding the mechanism for storing and retrieving fixed-point data should help to visualise why: for storage, the number is multiplied by 10s (10 to the power of s
), converting it to an integer;
when read, the integer is converted back.
The method of storing fixed-point data in the database depends on several factors: declared precision, database dialect, declaration type.
Precision | Data type | Dialect 1 | Dialect 3 |
---|---|---|---|
1 - 4 |
|
|
|
1 - 4 |
|
|
|
5 - 9 |
|
|
|
10 - 18 |
|
|
|
19 - 38 |
|
|
|
Numerics with precision less than 19 digits use For complex calculations, those digits are cast internally to DECFLOAT(34).
The result of various mathematical operations, such as |
3.3.1. NUMERIC
NUMERIC [(precision [, scale])]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
precision |
Precision, between 1 and 38. Defaults to 9. |
scale |
Scale, between 0 and precision. Defaults to 0. |
Further to the explanation above, Firebird will store NUMERIC
data according the declared precision and scale.
Some more examples are:
NUMERIC(4) stored as SMALLINT (exact data) NUMERIC(4,2) SMALLINT (data * 102) NUMERIC(10,4) (Dialect 1) DOUBLE PRECISION (Dialect 3) BIGINT (data * 104) NUMERIC(38,6) INT128 (data * 106)
Always keep in mind that the storage format depends on the precision.
For instance, you define the column type as |
3.3.2. DECIMAL
DECIMAL [(precision [, scale])]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
precision |
Precision, between 1 and 38. Defaults to 9. |
scale |
Scale, between 0 and precision. Defaults to 0. |
The storage format in the database for DECIMAL
is very similar to NUMERIC
, with some differences that are easier to observe with the help of some more examples:
DECIMAL(4) stored as INTEGER (exact data) DECIMAL(4,2) INTEGER (data * 102) DECIMAL(10,4) (Dialect 1) DOUBLE PRECISION (Dialect 3) BIGINT (data * 104) DECIMAL(38,6) INT128 (data * 106)
3.4. Data Types for Dates and Times
The DATE
, TIME
and TIMESTAMP
data types are used to work with data containing dates and times.
Firebird 4.0 introduces time zone support, using the types TIME WITH TIME ZONE
and TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE
.
In this language reference, we’ll use TIME
and TIMESTAMP
to refer both to the specific types without time zone — TIME [WITHOUT TIME ZONE]
and TIMESTAMP [WITHOUT TIME ZONE]
— and aspects of both the without time zone and with time zone types, which one we mean is usually clear from the context.
The data types |
Dialect 3 supports all the five types, while Dialect 1 has only DATE
.
The DATE
type in Dialect 3 is “date-only”, whereas the Dialect 1 DATE
type stores both date and time-of-day, equivalent to TIMESTAMP
in Dialect 3.
Dialect 1 has no “date-only” type.
Dialect 1 |
If fractions of seconds are stored in date and time data types, Firebird stores them to ten-thousandths of a second. If a lower granularity is preferred, the fraction can be specified explicitly as thousandths, hundredths or tenths of a second, or second, in Dialect 3 databases of ODS 11 or higher.
Some Useful Knowledge about Subseconds Precision
The time-part of a
Deci-milliseconds precision is rare and is not supported by all drivers and access components.
The best assumption to make from all this is that, although Firebird stores |
3.4.1. DATE
DATE
The DATE
data type in Dialect 3 stores only date without time.
The available range for storing data is from January 01, 1 to December 31, 9999.
Dialect 1 has no “date-only” type.
In Dialect 1, date literals without a time part, as well as casts of date mnemonics If, for some reason, it is important to you to store a Dialect 1 timestamp literal with an explicit zero time-part, the engine will accept a literal like |
3.4.2. TIME
TIME [{ WITHOUT | WITH } TIME ZONE]
For a bare TIME
, WITHOUT TIME ZONE
is assumed.
The TIME
data type is available in Dialect 3 only.
It stores the time of day within the range from 00:00:00.0000 to 23:59:59.9999.
If you need to get the time-part from DATE
in Dialect 1, you can use the EXTRACT
function.
EXTRACT()
EXTRACT (HOUR FROM DATE_FIELD)
EXTRACT (MINUTE FROM DATE_FIELD)
EXTRACT (SECOND FROM DATE_FIELD)
See also the EXTRACT()
function in the chapter entitled Built-in Functions.
TIME [WITHOUT TIME ZONE]
The TIME
(or synonym TIME WITHOUT TIME ZONE
) represents a time without time zone information.
TIME WITH TIME ZONE
The TIME WITH TIME ZONE
represents a time with time zone information (either an offset or a named zone).
Firebird uses the ICU implementation of the IANA Time Zone Database for named zones.
EXTRACT()
EXTRACT (TIMEZONE_HOUR FROM TIME_TZ_FIELD)
EXTRACT (TIMEZONE_MINUTE FROM TIME_TZ_FIELD)
3.4.3. TIMESTAMP
TIMESTAMP [{ WITHOUT | WITH } TIME ZONE]
For a bare TIMESTAMP
, WITHOUT TIME ZONE
is assumed.
The TIMESTAMP
data type is available in Dialect 3 and Dialect 1.
It comprises two 32-bit words — a date-part and a time-part — to form a structure that stores both date and time-of-day.
It is the same as the DATE
type in Dialect 1.
The EXTRACT
function works equally well with TIMESTAMP
as with the Dialect 1 DATE
type.
3.4.4. Session Time Zone
As the name implies, the session time zone, can be different for each database attachment.
It can be set explicitly in the DPB with the item isc_dpb_session_time_zone
;
otherwise, by default, it uses the same time zone as the operating system of the Firebird server process.
This default can be overridden in firebird.conf
, setting DefaultTimeZone
.
Drivers may apply different defaults, for example specifying the client time zone as the default session time zone. Check your driver documentation for details. |
Subsequently, the time zone can be changed to a given time zone using a SET TIME ZONE
statement or reset to its original value with SET TIME ZONE LOCAL
.
3.4.5. Time Zone Format
A time zone is specified as a string, either a time zone region (for example, 'America/Sao_Paulo'
) or a displacement from GMT in hours:minutes (for example, '-03:00'
).
A time/timestamp with time zone is considered equal to another time/timestamp with time zone if their conversions to UTC are equivalent.
For example, time '10:00 -02:00'
and time '09:00 -03:00'
are equivalent, since both are the same as time '12:00 GMT'
.
The same equivalence applies in |
3.4.6. Operations Using Date and Time Values
The method of storing date and time values makes it possible to involve them as operands in some arithmetic operations. In storage, a date value or date-part of a timestamp is represented as the number of days elapsed since “date zero” — November 17, 1898 — whilst a time value or the time-part of a timestamp is represented as the number of seconds (with fractions of seconds taken into account) since midnight.
An example is to subtract an earlier date, time or timestamp from a later one, resulting in an interval of time, in days and fractions of days.
Operand 1 | Operation | Operand 2 | Result |
---|---|---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Numeric value |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Numeric value |
|
|
|
Numeric value |
|
|
|
Numeric value |
|
|
|
Numeric value |
|
|
|
|
Number of days elapsed, within the range |
|
|
Numeric value |
|
|
|
|
Number of seconds elapsed, within the range |
|
|
|
The without time zone value is converted to WITH TIME ZONE in the current session time zone.
Number of seconds elapsed between the UTC values, within the range |
|
|
|
Number of seconds elapsed between the UTC values, within the range |
|
|
Numeric value |
|
|
|
|
Number of days and part-day, within the range |
|
|
|
The without time zone value is converted to WITH TIME ZONE in the current session time zone.
Number of days and part-day between UTC values, within the range |
|
|
|
Number of days and part-day between UTC values, within the range |
|
|
Numeric value |
|
Notes
The |
3.4.7. Supplemental Time Zone Features
Firebird 4.0 provides a number of features to discover time zone information.
Virtual table RDB$TIME_ZONES
A virtual table listing time zones supported in the engine.
See also RDB$TIME_ZONES
in System Tables.
Package RDB$TIME_ZONE_UTIL
A package of time zone utility functions and procedures:
Function DATABASE_VERSION
RDB$TIME_ZONE_UTIL.DATABASE_VERSION
returns the version of the time zone database as a VARCHAR(10) CHARACTER SET ASCII
.
select rdb$time_zone_util.database_version() from rdb$database;
Returns:
DATABASE_VERSION
================
2021a
Procedure TRANSITIONS
RDB$TIME_ZONE_UTIL.TRANSITIONS
returns the set of rules between the start and end timestamps for a named time zone.
The input parameters are:
-
RDB$TIME_ZONE_NAME
typeCHAR(63)
-
RDB$FROM_TIMESTAMP
typeTIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE
-
RDB$TO_TIMESTAMP
typeTIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE
Output parameters:
RDB$START_TIMESTAMP
-
type
TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE
— The start timestamp of the transition RDB$END_TIMESTAMP
-
type
TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE
— The end timestamp of the transition RDB$ZONE_OFFSET
-
type
SMALLINT
— The zone’s offset, in minutes RDB$DST_OFFSET
-
type
SMALLINT
— The zone’s DST offset, in minutes RDB$EFFECTIVE_OFFSET
-
type
SMALLINT
— Effective offset (ZONE_OFFSET
+DST_OFFSET
)
select *
from rdb$time_zone_util.transitions(
'America/Sao_Paulo',
timestamp '2017-01-01',
timestamp '2019-01-01');
Returns (RDB$
prefix left off for brevity):
START_TIMESTAMP END_TIMESTAMP ZONE_OFFSET DST_OFFSET EFFECTIVE_OFFSET ============================ ============================ =========== ========== ================ 2016-10-16 03:00:00.0000 GMT 2017-02-19 01:59:59.9999 GMT -180 60 -120 2017-02-19 02:00:00.0000 GMT 2017-10-15 02:59:59.9999 GMT -180 0 -180 2017-10-15 03:00:00.0000 GMT 2018-02-18 01:59:59.9999 GMT -180 60 -120 2018-02-18 02:00:00.0000 GMT 2018-10-21 02:59:59.9999 GMT -180 0 -180 2018-10-21 03:00:00.0000 GMT 2019-02-17 01:59:59.9999 GMT -180 60 -120
Updating the Time Zone Database
Time zones are often changed: of course, when it happens, it is desirable to update the time zone database as soon as possible.
Firebird stores WITH TIME ZONE
values translated to UTC time.
Suppose a value is created with one time zone database, and a later update of that database changes the information in the range of our stored value.
When that value is read, it will be returned as different to the value that was stored initially.
Firebird uses the IANA time zone database through the ICU library. The ICU library presented in the Firebird kit (Windows), or installed in a POSIX operating system, can sometimes have an outdated time zone database.
An updated database can be found on this page on the FirebirdSQL GitHub.
Filename le.zip
stands for little-endian and is the necessary file for most computer architectures (Intel/AMD compatible x86 or x64), while be.zip
stands for big-endian architectures and is necessary mostly for RISC computer architectures.
The content of the zip file must be extracted in the /tzdata
sub-directory of the Firebird installation, overwriting existing *.res
files belonging to the database.
|
3.5. Character Data Types
For working with character data, Firebird has the fixed-length CHAR
and the variable-length VARCHAR
data types.
The maximum size of text data stored in these data types is 32,767 bytes for CHAR
and 32,765 bytes for VARCHAR
.
The maximum number of characters that will fit within these limits depends on the CHARACTER SET
being used for the data under consideration.
The collation sequence does not affect this maximum, although it may affect the maximum size of any index that involves the column.
If no character set is explicitly specified when defining a character object, the default character set specified when the database was created will be used.
If the database does not have a default character set defined, the field gets the character set NONE
.
3.5.1. Unicode
Most current development tools support Unicode, implemented in Firebird with the character sets UTF8
and UNICODE_FSS
. UTF8
comes with collations for many languages.
UNICODE_FSS
is more limited and is used mainly by Firebird internally for storing metadata.
Keep in mind that one UTF8
character occupies up to 4 bytes, thus limiting the size of CHAR
fields to 8,191 characters (32,767/4).
The actual “bytes per character” value depends on the range the character belongs to.
Non-accented Latin letters occupy 1 byte, Cyrillic letters from the |
The UTF8
character set implemented in Firebird supports the latest version of the Unicode standard, thus recommending its use for international databases.
3.5.2. Client Character Set
While working with strings, it is essential to keep the character set of the client connection in mind.
If there is a mismatch between the character sets of the stored data and that of the client connection, the output results for string columns are automatically re-encoded, both when data are sent from the client to the server and when they are sent back from the server to the client.
For example, if the database was created in the WIN1251
encoding but KOI8R
or UTF8
is specified in the client’s connection parameters, the mismatch will be transparent.
3.5.3. Special Character Sets
NONE
The character set NONE
is a special character set in Firebird.
It can be characterized such that each byte is a part of a string, but the string is stored in the system without any clues about what constitutes any character: character encoding, collation, case, etc. are simply unknown.
It is the responsibility of the client application to deal with the data and provide the means to interpret the string of bytes in some way that is meaningful to the application and the human user.
OCTETS
Data in OCTETS
encoding are treated as bytes that may not actually be interpreted as characters.
OCTETS
provides a way to store binary data, which could be the results of some Firebird functions.
The database engine has no concept of what it is meant to do with a string of bits in OCTETS
, other than just store it and retrieve it.
Again, the client side is responsible for validating the data, presenting them in formats that are meaningful to the application and its users and handling any exceptions arising from decoding and encoding them.
Since Firebird 4.0 CHAR
and VARCHAR
with character set OCTETS
have synonyms BINARY
and VARBINARY
.
3.5.4. Collation Sequence
Each character set has a default collation sequence (COLLATE
) that specifies the collation order.
Usually, it provides nothing more than ordering based on the numeric code of the characters and a basic mapping of upper- and lower-case characters.
If some behaviour is needed for strings that is not provided by the default collation sequence and a suitable alternative collation is supported for that character set, a COLLATE
clause can be specified in the column definition.collation
A COLLATE collation
clause can be applied in other contexts besides the column definition.
For greater-than/less-than comparison operations, it can be added in the WHERE
clause of a SELECT
statement.
If output needs to be sorted in a special alphabetic sequence, or case-insensitively, and the appropriate collation exists, then a COLLATE
clause can be included with the ORDER BY
clause when rows are being sorted on a character field and with the GROUP BY
clause in case of grouping operations.
Case-Insensitive Searching
For a case-insensitive search, the UPPER
function could be used to convert both the search argument and the searched strings to upper-case before attempting a match:
…
where upper(name) = upper(:flt_name)
For strings in a character set that has a case-insensitive collation available, you can simply apply the collation, to compare the search argument and the searched strings directly.
For example, using the WIN1251
character set, the collation PXW_CYRL
is case-insensitive for this purpose:
…
WHERE FIRST_NAME COLLATE PXW_CYRL >= :FLT_NAME
…
ORDER BY NAME COLLATE PXW_CYRL
UTF8
Collation Sequences
The following table shows the possible collation sequences for the UTF8
character set.
Collation | Characteristics |
---|---|
|
Collation works according to the position of the character in the table (binary). Added in Firebird 2.0 |
|
Collation works according to the UCA algorithm (Unicode Collation Algorithm) (alphabetical). Added in Firebird 2.0 |
|
The default, binary collation, identical to |
|
Case-insensitive collation, works without taking character case into account. Added in Firebird 2.1 |
|
Case-insensitive, accent-insensitive collation, works alphabetically without taking character case or accents into account. Added in Firebird 2.5 |
An example of collation for the UTF8 character set without taking into account the case or accentuation of characters (similar to COLLATE PXW_CYRL
).
...
ORDER BY NAME COLLATE UNICODE_CI_AI
3.5.5. Character Indexes
In Firebird earlier than version 2.0, a problem can occur with building an index for character columns that use a non-standard collation sequence: the length of an indexed field is limited to 252 bytes with no COLLATE
specified or 84 bytes if COLLATE
is specified.
Multi-byte character sets and compound indexes limit the size even further.
Starting from Firebird 2.0, the maximum length for an index equals one quarter of the page size, i.e. from 1,024 — for page size 4,096 — to 8,192 bytes — for page size 32,768. The maximum length of an indexed string is 9 bytes less than that quarter-page limit.
The table below shows the maximum length of an indexed string (in characters), according to page size and character set, calculated using this formula.
Page Size |
Bytes per character |
||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
6 |
|
4,096 |
1,015 |
507 |
338 |
253 |
169 |
8,192 |
2,039 |
1,019 |
679 |
509 |
339 |
16,384 |
4,087 |
2,043 |
1,362 |
1,021 |
681 |
32,768 |
8,183 |
4,091 |
2,727 |
2,045 |
1,363 |
With case-insensitive collations (“_CI”), one character in the index will occupy not 4, but 6 (six) bytes, so the maximum key length for a page of — for example — 4,096 bytes, will be 169 characters. |
CREATE DATABASE
, Collation sequence, SELECT
, WHERE
, GROUP BY
, ORDER BY
3.5.6. Character Types in Detail
BINARY
BINARY [(length)]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
length |
Length in bytes between 1 and 32,767;
defaults to |
BINARY
is a fixed-length data type, and is an SQL standard-compliant alias for CHAR(length) CHARACTER SET OCTETS
.
Values shorter than the declared length are padded with NUL up to the declared length.
Some tools may report the type as |
CHAR
{CHAR | CHARACTER} [(length)] [CHARACTER SET <set>] [COLLATE <name>]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
length |
Length in characters, defaults to |
set |
Character set name |
name |
Collation name |
CHAR
is a fixed-length data type.
Values shorter than the declared length are padded with spaces up to the declared length.
Generally, the pad character does not have to be a space: it depends on the character set.
For example, the pad character for the OCTETS
character set is NUL.
The full name of this data type is CHARACTER
, but there is no requirement to use full names and people rarely do so.
Fixed-length character data can be used to store codes whose length is standard and has a definite “width” in directories. An example of such a code is an EAN13 barcode — 13 characters, all filled.
|
VARBINARY
{VARBINARY | BINARY VARYING} (length)
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
length |
Length in bytes between 1 and 32,765 |
VARBINARY
is variable length binary type, and is an SQL standard-compliant alias for VARCHAR(length) CHARACTER SET OCTETS
.
Some tools may report the type as |
VARCHAR
{VARCHAR | {CHAR | CHARACTER} VARYING} (length) [CHARACTER SET <set>] [COLLATE <name>]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
length |
Length in characters. A valid length is from 1 to the maximum number of characters that can be accommodated within 32,765 bytes. |
set |
Character set name |
name |
Collation name |
VARCHAR
is the basic string type for storing texts of variable length, up to a maximum of 32,765 bytes.
The stored structure is equal to the actual size of the data plus 2 bytes where the length of the data is recorded.
All characters that are sent from the client application to the database are considered meaningful, including the leading and trailing spaces.
The full name of this type is CHARACTER VARYING
.
Another variant of the name is written as CHAR VARYING
.
|
NCHAR
{NCHAR | NATIONAL {CHAR | CHARACTER}} [(length)]
NCHAR
is a fixed-length character data type with the ISO8859_1
character set predefined.
In all other respects it is the same as CHAR
.
If no length is specified, it is taken to be 1. |
A similar data type is available for the variable-length string type: NATIONAL {CHAR | CHARACTER} VARYING
.
3.6. Boolean Data Type
3.6.1. BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
The SQL:2008 compliant BOOLEAN
data type (8 bits) comprises the distinct truth values TRUE
and FALSE
.
Unless prohibited by a NOT NULL
constraint, the BOOLEAN
data type also supports the truth value UNKNOWN
as the null value.
The specification does not make a distinction between the NULL
value of this data type, and the truth value UNKNOWN
that is the result of an SQL predicate, search condition, or Boolean value expression: they may be used interchangeably to mean exactly the same thing.
As with many programming languages, the SQL BOOLEAN
values can be tested with implicit truth values.
For example, field1 OR field2
and NOT field1
are valid expressions.
The IS Operator
Predicates can use the operator Boolean IS [NOT]
for matching.
For example, field1 IS FALSE
, or field1 IS NOT TRUE
.
|
BOOLEAN
Examples
-
Inserting and selecting
CREATE TABLE TBOOL (ID INT, BVAL BOOLEAN); COMMIT; INSERT INTO TBOOL VALUES (1, TRUE); INSERT INTO TBOOL VALUES (2, 2 = 4); INSERT INTO TBOOL VALUES (3, NULL = 1); COMMIT; SELECT * FROM TBOOL; ID BVAL ============ ======= 1 <true> 2 <false> 3 <null>
-
Test for
TRUE
valueSELECT * FROM TBOOL WHERE BVAL; ID BVAL ============ ======= 1 <true>
-
Test for
FALSE
valueSELECT * FROM TBOOL WHERE BVAL IS FALSE; ID BVAL ============ ======= 2 <false>
-
Test for
UNKNOWN
valueSELECT * FROM TBOOL WHERE BVAL IS UNKNOWN; ID BVAL ============ ======= 3 <null>
-
Boolean values in
SELECT
listSELECT ID, BVAL, BVAL AND ID < 2 FROM TBOOL; ID BVAL ============ ======= ======= 1 <true> <true> 2 <false> <false> 3 <null> <false>
-
PSQL declaration with start value
DECLARE VARIABLE VAR1 BOOLEAN = TRUE;
-
Valid syntax, but as with a comparison with
NULL
, will never return any record
SELECT * FROM TBOOL WHERE BVAL = UNKNOWN; SELECT * FROM TBOOL WHERE BVAL <> UNKNOWN;
Use of Boolean against other data types
Although BOOLEAN
is not inherently convertible to any other data type, from version 3.0.1 the strings 'true'
and 'false'
(case-insensitive) will be implicitly cast to BOOLEAN
in value expressions, e.g.
if (true > 'false') then ...
'false'
is converted to BOOLEAN
.
Any attempt to use the Boolean operators AND
, NOT
, OR
and IS
will fail.
NOT 'False'
, for example, is invalid.
A BOOLEAN
can be explicitly converted to and from string with CAST
.
UNKNOWN
is not available for any form of casting.
Other Notes
|
3.7. Binary Data Types
The types |
BLOB
s (Binary Large Objects) are complex structures used to store text and binary data of an undefined length, often very large.
BLOB [SUB_TYPE <subtype>] [SEGMENT SIZE <segment size>] [CHARACTER SET <character set>] [COLLATE <collation name>]
BLOB (<segment size>) BLOB (<segment size>, <subtype>) BLOB (, <subtype>)
Formally, the |
3.7.1. BLOB
Subtypes
The optional SUB_TYPE
parameter specifies the nature of data written to the column.
Firebird provides two pre-defined subtypes for storing user data:
- Subtype 0:
BINARY
-
If a subtype is not specified, the specification is assumed to be for untyped data and the default
SUB_TYPE 0
is applied. The alias for subtype zero isBINARY
. This is the subtype to specify when the data are any form of binary file or stream: images, audio, word-processor files, PDFs and so on. - Subtype 1:
TEXT
-
Subtype 1 has an alias,
TEXT
, which can be used in declarations and definitions. For instance,BLOB SUB_TYPE TEXT
. It is a specialized subtype used to store plain text data that is too large to fit into a string type. ACHARACTER SET
may be specified, if the field is to store text with a different encoding to that specified for the database. From Firebird 2.0, aCOLLATE
clause is also supported.Specifying a
CHARACTER SET
withoutSUB_TYPE
impliesSUB_TYPE TEXT
.
It is also possible to add custom data subtypes, for which the range of enumeration from -1 to -32,768 is reserved. Custom subtypes enumerated with positive numbers are not allowed, as the Firebird engine uses the numbers from 2-upward for some internal subtypes in metadata.
3.7.2. BLOB
Specifics
The maximum size of a BLOB
field is limited to 4GB, regardless of whether the server is 32-bit or 64-bit.
(The internal structures related to BLOB
s maintain their own 4-byte counters.)
For a page size of 4 KB (4096 bytes) the maximum size is lower — slightly less than 2GB.
Text BLOBs of any length and any character set — including multi-byte — can be operands for practically any statement or internal functions. The following operators are supported completely:
= |
(assignment) |
=, <>, <, <=, >, >= |
(comparison) |
|
(concatenation) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
As an efficient alternative to concatenation, you can also use BLOB_APPEND()
.
Partial support:
-
An error occurs with these if the search argument is larger than or equal to 32 KB:
STARTING [WITH]
,LIKE
,CONTAINING
-
Aggregation clauses work not on the contents of the field itself, but on the BLOB ID. Aside from that, there are some quirks:
SELECT DISTINCT
returns several NULL values by mistake if they are present
ORDER BY
—
GROUP BY
concatenates the same strings if they are adjacent to each other, but does not do it if they are remote from each other
BLOB
Storage-
By default, a regular record is created for each BLOB and it is stored on a data page that is allocated for it. If the entire
BLOB
fits onto this page, it is called a level 0 BLOB. The number of this special record is stored in the table record and occupies 8 bytes. -
If a
BLOB
does not fit onto one data page, its contents are put onto separate pages allocated exclusively to it (blob pages), while the numbers of these pages are stored into theBLOB
record. This is a level 1 BLOB. -
If the array of page numbers containing the
BLOB
data does not fit onto a data page, the array is put on separate blob pages, while the numbers of these pages are put into theBLOB
record. This is a level 2 BLOB. -
Levels higher than 2 are not supported.
3.8. Array Types
Firebird does not offer much in the way of language or tools for working with the contents of arrays, and there are no plans to improve this. This limits the usefulness and accessibility of array types. Therefore, the general advice is: do not use arrays. |
The support of arrays in the Firebird DBMS is a departure from the traditional relational model. Supporting arrays in the DBMS could make it easier to solve some data-processing tasks involving large sets of similar data.
Arrays in Firebird are stored in BLOB
of a specialized type.
Arrays can be one-dimensional and multi-dimensional and of any data type except BLOB
and ARRAY
.
CREATE TABLE SAMPLE_ARR (
ID INTEGER NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY,
ARR_INT INTEGER [4]
);
This example will create a table with a field of the array type consisting of four integers. The subscripts of this array are from 1 to 4.
3.8.1. Specifying Explicit Boundaries for Dimensions
By default, dimensions are 1-based — subscripts are numbered from 1. To specify explicit upper and lower bounds of the subscript values, use the following syntax:
'[' <lower>:<upper> ']'
3.8.2. Adding More Dimensions
A new dimension is added using a comma in the syntax. In this example we create a table with a two-dimensional array, with the lower bound of subscripts in both dimensions starting from zero:
CREATE TABLE SAMPLE_ARR2 (
ID INTEGER NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY,
ARR_INT INTEGER [0:3, 0:3]
);
The database employee.fdb
, found in the ../examples/empbuild
directory of any Firebird distribution package, contains a sample stored procedure showing some simple work with arrays:
3.8.3. PSQL Source for SHOW_LANGS
, a procedure involving an array
CREATE OR ALTER PROCEDURE SHOW_LANGS (
CODE VARCHAR(5),
GRADE SMALLINT,
CTY VARCHAR(15))
RETURNS (LANGUAGES VARCHAR(15))
AS
DECLARE VARIABLE I INTEGER;
BEGIN
I = 1;
WHILE (I <= 5) DO
BEGIN
SELECT LANGUAGE_REQ[:I]
FROM JOB
WHERE (JOB_CODE = :CODE)
AND (JOB_GRADE = :GRADE)
AND (JOB_COUNTRY = :CTY)
AND (LANGUAGE_REQ IS NOT NULL))
INTO :LANGUAGES;
IF (LANGUAGES = '') THEN
/* PRINTS 'NULL' INSTEAD OF BLANKS */
LANGUAGES = 'NULL';
I = I +1;
SUSPEND;
END
END
If the features described are enough for your tasks, you might consider using arrays in your projects. Currently, no improvements are planned to enhance support for arrays in Firebird.
3.9. Special Data Types
“Special” data types …
3.9.1. SQL_NULL
Data Type
The SQL_NULL
type holds no data, but only a state: NULL
or NOT NULL
.
It is not available as a data type for declaring table fields, PSQL variables or parameter descriptions.
It was added to support the use of untyped parameters in expressions involving the IS NULL
predicate.
An evaluation problem occurs when optional filters are used to write queries of the following type:
WHERE col1 = :param1 OR :param1 IS NULL
After processing, at the API level, the query will look like this:
WHERE col1 = ? OR ? IS NULL
This is a case where the developer writes an SQL query and considers :param1
as though it were a variable that he can refer to twice.
However, at the API level, the query contains two separate and independent parameters.
The server cannot determine the type of the second parameter since it comes in association with IS NULL
.
The SQL_NULL
data type solves this problem.
Whenever the engine encounters an “? IS NULL
” predicate in a query, it assigns the SQL_NULL
type to the parameter, which will indicate that parameter is only about “nullness” and the data type or the value need not be addressed.
The following example demonstrates its use in practice.
It assumes two named parameters — say, :size
and :colour
— which might, for example, get values from on-screen text fields or drop-down lists.
Each named parameter corresponds with two positional parameters in the query.
SELECT
SH.SIZE, SH.COLOUR, SH.PRICE
FROM SHIRTS SH
WHERE (SH.SIZE = ? OR ? IS NULL)
AND (SH.COLOUR = ? OR ? IS NULL)
Explaining what happens here assumes the reader is familiar with the Firebird API and the passing of parameters in XSQLVAR structures — what happens under the surface will not be of interest to those who are not writing drivers or applications that communicate using the “naked” API.
The application passes the parameterized query to the server in the usual positional ?
-form.
Pairs of “identical” parameters cannot be merged into one so, for two optional filters, for example, four positional parameters are needed: one for each ?
in our example.
After the call to isc_dsql_describe_bind()
, the SQLTYPE of the second and fourth parameters will be set to SQL_NULL
.
Firebird has no knowledge of their special relation with the first and third parameters: that responsibility lies entirely on the application side.
Once the values for size and colour have been set (or left unset) by the user and the query is about to be executed, each pair of XSQLVAR
s must be filled as follows:
- User has supplied a value
-
First parameter (value compare): set
*sqldata
to the supplied value and*sqlind
to0
(forNOT NULL
)Second parameter (
NULL
test): setsqldata
tonull
(null pointer, not SQLNULL
) and*sqlind
to0
(forNOT NULL
) - User has left the field blank
-
Both parameters: set
sqldata
tonull
(null pointer, not SQLNULL
) and*sqlind
to-1
(indicatingNULL
)
In other words: The value compare parameter is always set as usual.
The SQL_NULL
parameter is set the same, except that sqldata
remains null
at all times.
3.10. Conversion of Data Types
When composing an expression or specifying an operation, the aim should be to use compatible data types for the operands. When a need arises to use a mixture of data types, it should prompt you to look for a way to convert incompatible operands before subjecting them to the operation. The ability to convert data may well be an issue if you are working with Dialect 1 data.
3.10.1. Explicit Data Type Conversion
The CAST
function enables explicit conversion between many pairs of data types.
CAST (<expression> AS <target_type>) <target_type> ::= <domain_or_non_array_type> | <array_datatype> <domain_or_non_array_type> ::= !! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !! <array_datatype> ::= !! See Array Data Types Syntax !!
See also CAST()
in Chapter Built-in Scalar Functions.
Casting to a Domain
When you cast to a domain, any constraints declared for it are taken into account, i.e., NOT NULL
or CHECK
constraints.
If the value does not pass the check, the cast will fail.
If TYPE OF
is additionally specified — casting to its base type — any domain constraints are ignored during the cast.
If TYPE OF
is used with a character type (CHAR/VARCHAR
), the character set and collation are retained.
Casting to TYPE OF COLUMN
When operands are cast to the type of a column, the specified column may be from a table or a view.
Only the type of the column itself is used. For character types, the cast includes the character set, but not the collation. The constraints and default values of the source column are not applied.
CREATE TABLE TTT (
S VARCHAR (40)
CHARACTER SET UTF8 COLLATE UNICODE_CI_AI
);
COMMIT;
SELECT
CAST ('I have many friends' AS TYPE OF COLUMN TTT.S)
FROM RDB$DATABASE;
Conversions Possible for the CAST
Function
From Data Type | To Data Type |
---|---|
Numeric types |
Numeric types, |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To convert string data types to the BOOLEAN
type, the value must be (case-insensitive) 'true'
or 'false'
, or NULL
.
Keep in mind that partial information loss is possible.
For instance, when you cast the |
Datetime Formats
To cast string data types to the DATE
, TIME
or TIMESTAMP
data types, you need the string argument to be one of the predefined datetime mnemonics (see Table 16) or a representation of the date in one of the allowed datetime formats (see Datetime Format Syntax),
Literal |
Description |
---|---|
|
Current date and time |
|
Current date |
|
Current date + 1 (day) |
|
Current date - 1 (day) |
Casting the date mnemonics For example |
select
cast('04.12.2014' as date) as d1, -- DD.MM.YYYY
cast('04 12 2014' as date) as d2, -- MM DD YYYY
cast('4-12-2014' as date) as d3, -- MM-DD-YYYY
cast('04/12/2014' as date) as d4, -- MM/DD/YYYY
cast('04.12.14' as date) as d5, -- DD.MM.YY
-- DD.MM with current year
cast('04.12' as date) as d6,
-- MM/DD with current year
cast('04/12' as date) as d7,
cast('2014/12/04' as date) as d8, -- YYYY/MM/DD
cast('2014 12 04' as date) as d9, -- YYYY MM DD
cast('2014.12.04' as date) as d10, -- YYYY.MM.DD
cast('2014-12-04' as date) as d11, -- YYYY-MM-DD
cast('4 Jan 2014' as date) as d12, -- DD MM YYYY
cast('2014 Jan 4' as date) as dt13, -- YYYY MM DD
cast('Jan 4 2014' as date) as dt14, -- MM DD YYYY
cast('11:37' as time) as t1, -- HH:mm
cast('11:37:12' as time) as t2, -- HH:mm:ss
cast('11:31:12.1234' as time) as t3, -- HH:mm:ss.nnnn
-- DD.MM.YYYY HH:mm
cast('04.12.2014 11:37' as timestamp) as dt1,
-- MM/DD/YYYY HH:mm:ss
cast('04/12/2014 11:37:12' as timestamp) as dt2,
-- DD.MM.YYYY HH:mm:ss.nnnn
cast('04.12.2014 11:31:12.1234' as timestamp) as dt3,
cast('now' as timestamp) as m1,
cast('today' as date) as m2,
cast('yesterday' as date) as m3,
cast('tomorrow' as date) as m4
from rdb$database
Shorthand Casts for Datetime Data Types
Firebird allows the use of a shorthand “C-style” type syntax for casts from string to the types DATE
, TIME
and TIMESTAMP
.
The SQL standard calls these datetime literals.
<data_type> 'date_format_string'
See also Datetime Literals.
These literal expressions are evaluated directly during parsing, as though the statement were already prepared for execution.
As this produced unexpected or confusing results when using the datetime mnemonics like To use datetime mnemonics, use the full
|
3.10.2. Implicit Data Type Conversion
Implicit data conversion is not possible in Dialect 3 — the CAST
function is almost always required to avoid data type clashes.
In Dialect 1, in many expressions, one type is implicitly cast to another without the need to use the CAST function. For instance, the following statement in Dialect 1 is valid:
UPDATE ATABLE
SET ADATE = '25.12.2016' + 1
The date literal will be cast to the date type implicitly.
In Dialect 3, this statement will throw error 35544569, “Dynamic SQL Error: expression evaluation not supported, Strings cannot be added or subtracted in dialect 3” — a cast will be needed:
UPDATE ATABLE
SET ADATE = CAST ('25.12.2016' AS DATE) + 1
Or, with a datetime literal:
UPDATE ATABLE
SET ADATE = DATE '25.12.2016' + 1
In Dialect 1, mixing integer data and numeric strings is usually possible because the parser will try to cast the string implicitly. For example,
2 + '1'
will be executed correctly.
In Dialect 3, an expression like this will raise an error, so you will need to write it as a CAST
expression:
2 + CAST('1' AS SMALLINT)
The exception to the rule is during string concatenation.
Implicit Conversion During String Concatenation
When multiple data elements are being concatenated, all non-string data will undergo implicit conversion to string, if possible.
SELECT 30||' days hath September, April, June and November' CONCAT$
FROM RDB$DATABASE;
CONCAT$
------------------------------------------------
30 days hath September, April, June and November
3.11. Custom Data Types — Domains
In Firebird, the concept of a “user-defined data type” is implemented in the form of the domain. Creating a domain does not truly create a new data type, of course. A domain provides the means to encapsulate an existing data type with a set of attributes and make this “capsule” available for multiple usage across the whole database. If several tables need columns defined with identical or nearly identical attributes, a domain makes sense.
Domain usage is not limited to column definitions for tables and views. Domains can be used to declare input and output parameters and variables in PSQL code.
3.11.1. Domain Attributes
A domain definition contains required and optional attributes. The data type is a required attribute. Optional attributes include:
-
a default value
-
to allow or forbid
NULL
-
CHECK
constraints -
character set (for character data types and text BLOB fields)
-
collation (for character data types)
CREATE DOMAIN BOOL3 AS SMALLINT
CHECK (VALUE IS NULL OR VALUE IN (0, 1));
Explicit Data Type Conversion for the description of differences in the data conversion mechanism when domains are specified for the TYPE OF
and TYPE OF COLUMN
modifiers.
3.11.2. Domain Override
While defining a column using a domain, it is possible to override some of the attributes inherited from the domain. Table 3.9 summarises the rules for domain override.
Attribute | Override? | Comments |
---|---|---|
Data type |
No |
|
Default value |
Yes |
|
Text character set |
Yes |
It can be also used to restore the default database values for the column |
Text collation sequence |
Yes |
|
|
Yes |
To add new conditions to the check, you can use the corresponding |
|
No |
Often it is better to leave domain nullable in its definition and decide whether to make it |
3.11.3. Creating and Administering Domains
A domain is created with the DDL statement CREATE DOMAIN
.
CREATE DOMAIN name [AS] <type> [DEFAULT {<const> | <literal> | NULL | <context_var>}] [NOT NULL] [CHECK (<condition>)] [COLLATE <collation>]
CREATE DOMAIN
in the Data Definition Language (DDL) section.
Altering a Domain
To change the attributes of a domain, use the DDL statement ALTER DOMAIN
.
With this statement you can:
-
rename the domain
-
change the data type
-
drop the current default value
-
set a new default value
-
drop the
NOT NULL
constraint -
set the
NOT NULL
constraint -
drop an existing
CHECK
constraint -
add a new
CHECK
constraint
ALTER DOMAIN name [{TO new_name}] [{SET DEFAULT { <literal> | NULL | <context_var> } | DROP DEFAULT}] [{SET | DROP} NOT NULL ] [{ADD [CONSTRAINT] CHECK (<dom_condition>) | DROP CONSTRAINT}] [{TYPE <datatype>}]
ALTER DOMAIN STORE_GRP SET DEFAULT -1;
When changing a domain, its dependencies must be taken into account: whether there are table columns, any variables, input and/or output parameters with the type of this domain declared in the PSQL code. If you change domains in haste, without carefully checking them, your code may stop working!
When you convert data types in a domain, you must not perform any conversions that may result in data loss.
Also, for example, if you convert |
ALTER DOMAIN
in the Data Definition Language (DDL) section.
Deleting (Dropping) a Domain
The DDL statement DROP DOMAIN
deletes a domain from the database, provided it is not in use by any other database objects.
DROP DOMAIN name
DROP DOMAIN Test_Domain
DROP DOMAIN
in the Data Definition Language (DDL) section.
3.12. Data Type Declaration Syntax
This section documents the syntax of declaring data types.
Data type declaration commonly occurs in DDL statements, but also in CAST
and EXECUTE BLOCK
.
The syntax documented below is referenced from other parts of this language reference.
3.12.1. Scalar Data Types Syntax
The scalar data types are simple data types that hold a single value. For reasons of organisation, the syntax of BLOB types are defined separately in BLOB Data Types Syntax.
<domain_or_non_array_type> ::= <scalar_datatype> | <blob_datatype> | [TYPE OF] domain | TYPE OF COLUMN rel.col <scalar_datatype> ::= SMALLINT | INT[EGER] | BIGINT | INT128 | REAL | FLOAT [(bin_prec)] | DOUBLE PRECISION | DECFLOAT [(dec_prec)] | BOOLEAN | DATE | TIME [{WITHOUT | WITH} TIME ZONE] | TIMESTAMP [{WITHOUT | WITH} TIME ZONE] | {DECIMAL | NUMERIC} [(precision [, scale])] | {VARCHAR | {CHAR | CHARACTER} VARYING} (length) [CHARACTER SET charset] | {CHAR | CHARACTER} [(length)] [CHARACTER SET charset] | {NCHAR | NATIONAL {CHARACTER | CHAR}} VARYING (length) | {NCHAR | NATIONAL {CHARACTER | CHAR}} [(length)] | BINARY [(length)] | {VARBINARY | BINARY VARYING} (length)
Argument | Description |
---|---|
domain |
Domain (only non-array domains) |
rel |
Name of a table or view |
col |
Name of a column in a table or view (only columns of a non-array type) |
bin_prec |
Binary precision, default is 24. 1 - 24: 32-bit single precision |
dec_prec |
Decimal precision of |
precision |
Numeric precision in decimal digits. From 1 to 38 |
scale |
Scale, or number of decimals. From 0 to 38. It must be less than or equal to precision |
length |
The maximum length of a string, in characters, or — for |
charset |
Character set |
domain_or_non_array_type |
Non-array types that can be used in PSQL code and casts |
Use of Domains in Declarations
A domain name can be specified as the type of a PSQL parameter or local variable. The parameter or variable will inherit all domain attributes. If a default value is specified for the parameter or variable, it overrides the default value specified in the domain definition.
If the TYPE OF
clause is added before the domain name, only the data type of the domain is used: any of the other attributes of the domain — NOT NULL
constraint, CHECK
constraints, default value — are neither checked nor used.
However, if the domain is of a text type, its character set and collation sequence are always used.
Use of Column Type in Declarations
Input and output parameters or local variables can also be declared using the data type of columns in existing tables and views.
The TYPE OF COLUMN
clause is used for that, specifying relationname.columnname as its argument.
When TYPE OF COLUMN
is used, the parameter or variable inherits only the data type and — for string types — the character set and collation sequence.
The constraints and default value of the column are ignored.
3.12.2. BLOB Data Types Syntax
The BLOB data types hold binary, character or custom format data of unspecified size. For more information, see Binary Data Types.
<blob_datatype> ::= BLOB [SUB_TYPE {subtype_num | subtype_name}] [SEGMENT SIZE seglen] [CHARACTER SET charset] | BLOB [(seglen [, subtype_num])]
Argument | Description |
---|---|
charset |
Character set (ignored for sub-types other than |
subtype_num |
|
subtype_name |
|
seglen |
Segment size, cannot be greater than 65,535, defaults to 80 when not specified. See also Segment Size |
3.12.3. Array Data Types Syntax
The array data types hold multiple scalar values in a single or multi-dimensional array. For more information, see Array Types
<array_datatype> ::= {SMALLINT | INT[EGER] | BIGINT | INT128} <array_dim> | {REAL | FLOAT [(bin_prec)] | DOUBLE PRECISION} <array_dim> | DECFLOAT [(dec_prec)] <array_dim> | BOOLEAN <array_dim> | DATE <array_dim> | TIME [{WITHOUT | WITH} TIME ZONE] <array_dim> | TIMESTAMP [{WITHOUT | WITH} TIME ZONE] <array_dim> | {DECIMAL | NUMERIC} [(precision [, scale])] <array_dim> | {VARCHAR | {CHAR | CHARACTER} VARYING} (length) <array_dim> [CHARACTER SET charset] | {CHAR | CHARACTER} [(length)] <array_dim> [CHARACTER SET charset] | {NCHAR | NATIONAL {CHARACTER | CHAR}} VARYING (length) <array_dim> | {NCHAR | NATIONAL {CHARACTER | CHAR}} [(length)] <array_dim> | BINARY [(length)] <array_dim> | {VARBINARY | BINARY VARYING} (length) <array_dim> <array_dim> ::= '[' [m:]n [,[m:]n ...] ']'
Argument | Description |
---|---|
array_dim |
Array dimensions |
bin_prec |
Binary precision, default is 24. 1 - 24: 32-bit single precision |
dec_prec |
Decimal precision of |
precision |
Numeric precision in decimal digits. From 1 to 38 |
scale |
Scale, or number of decimals. From 0 to 38. It must be less than or equal to precision |
length |
The maximum length of a string, in characters, or — for |
charset |
Character set |
m, n |
Integer numbers defining the index range of an array dimension |
4. Common Language Elements
This chapter covers the elements that are common throughout the implementation of the SQL language — the expressions that are used to extract and operate on conditions about data and the predicates that test the truth of those assertions.
4.1. Expressions
SQL expressions provide formal methods for evaluating, transforming and comparing values. SQL expressions may include table columns, variables, constants, literals, various statements and predicates and also other expressions. The complete list of possible tokens in expressions follows.
- Column name
-
Identifier of a column from a specified table used in evaluations or as a search condition. A column of the array type cannot be an element in an expression except when used with the
IS [NOT] NULL
predicate. - Array element
-
An expression may contain a reference to an array member i.e.,
<array_name>[s]
, wheres
is the subscript of the member in the array<array_name>
- Arithmetic operators
-
The
+
,-
,*
,/
characters used to calculate values - Concatenation operator
-
The
||
(“double-pipe”) operator used to concatenate strings - Logical operators
-
The reserved words
NOT
,AND
andOR
, used to combine simple search conditions in order to create complex conditions - Comparison operators
-
The symbols
=
,<>
,!=
,~=
,^=
,<
,<=
,>
,>=
,!<
,~<
,^<
,!>
,~>
and^>
- Comparison predicates
-
LIKE
,STARTING WITH
,CONTAINING
,SIMILAR TO
,BETWEEN
,IS [NOT] NULL
,IS [NOT] {TRUE | FALSE | UNKNOWN}
andIS [NOT] DISTINCT FROM
- Existential predicates
-
Predicates used to check the existence of values in a set. The
IN
predicate can be used both with sets of comma-separated constants and with subqueries that return a single column. TheEXISTS
,SINGULAR
,ALL
,ANY
andSOME
predicates can be used only with subqueries. - Constant or Literal
-
Numbers, or string literals enclosed in apostrophes, Boolean values
TRUE
,FALSE
andUNKOWN
,NULL
- Datetime literal
-
An expression, similar to a string literal enclosed in apostrophes, that can be interpreted as a date, time or timestamp value. Datetime literals can be strings of characters and numerals, such as
TIMESTAMP '25.12.2016 15:30:35'
, that can be resolved as datetime value, also used for string literals that can be cast to a datetime type. - Datetime mnemonics
-
A string literal with a description of a desired datetime value that can be cast to a datetime type. For example
'TODAY'
,'NOW'
. - Context variable
-
An internally-defined context variable
- Local variable
-
Declared local variable, input or output parameter of a PSQL module (stored procedure, trigger, unnamed PSQL block in DSQL)
- Positional parameter
-
A member of in an ordered group of one or more unnamed parameters passed to a stored procedure or prepared query
- Subquery
-
A
SELECT
statement enclosed in parentheses that returns a single (scalar) value or, when used in existential predicates, a set of values - Function identifier
-
The identifier of an internal or external function in a function expression
- Type cast
-
An expression explicitly converting data of one data type to another using the
CAST
function (CAST (<value> AS <datatype>)
). For date/time literals only, the shorthand syntax <datatype> <value> is also supported (DATE '2016-12-25'
). - Conditional expression
-
Expressions using CASE and related internal functions
- Parentheses
-
Bracket pairs
(…)
used to group expressions. Operations inside the parentheses are performed before operations outside them. When nested parentheses are used, the most deeply nested expressions are evaluated first and then the evaluations move outward through the levels of nesting. COLLATE
clause-
Clause applied to CHAR and VARCHAR types to specify the character-set-specific collation sequence to use in string comparisons
NEXT VALUE FOR sequence
-
Expression for obtaining the next value of a specified generator (sequence). The internal
GEN_ID()
function does the same. AT
expression-
Expression to change the time zone of a datetime.
4.1.1. Literals (Constants)
A literal — or constant — is a value that is supplied directly in an SQL statement, not derived from an expression, a parameter, a column reference nor a variable. It can be a string or a number.
String Literals
A string literal is a series of characters enclosed between a pair of apostrophes (“single quotes”).
The maximum length of a string literal is 32,765 for CHAR
/VARCHAR
, or 65,533 bytes for BLOB
;
the maximum character count will be determined by the number of bytes used to encode each character.
|
The character set of a string constant is assumed to be the same as the character set of its destined storage.
String Literals in Hexadecimal Notation
From Firebird 2.5 forward, string literals can be entered in hexadecimal notation, so-called “binary strings”.
Each pair of hex digits defines one byte in the string.
Strings entered this way will be type BINARY
(or character set OCTETS
) by default, unless the introducer syntax is used to force a string to be interpreted as another character set.
{x|X}'<hexstring>' <hexstring> ::= an even number of <hexdigit> <hexdigit> ::= one of 0..9, A..F, a..f
select x'4E657276656E' from rdb$database
-- returns 4E657276656E, a 6-byte 'binary' string
select _ascii x'4E657276656E' from rdb$database
-- returns 'Nerven' (same string, now interpreted as ASCII text)
select _iso8859_1 x'53E46765' from rdb$database
-- returns 'Säge' (4 chars, 4 bytes)
select _utf8 x'53C3A46765' from rdb$database
-- returns 'Säge' (4 chars, 5 bytes)
Notes
The client interface determines how binary strings are displayed to the user.
The isql utility, for example, uses upper case letters A-F, while FlameRobin uses lower case letters.
Other client programs may use other conventions, such as displaying spaces between the byte pairs: The hexadecimal notation allows any byte value (including 00) to be inserted at any position in the string. However, if you want to coerce it to anything other than OCTETS, it is your responsibility to supply the bytes in a sequence that is valid for the target character set. |
Alternative String Literals
Since Firebird 3.0, it is possible to use a character, or character pair, other than the doubled (escaped) apostrophe, to embed a quoted string inside another string without the need to escape the quote.
The keyword q
or Q
preceding a quoted string informs the parser that certain left-right pairs or pairs of identical characters within the string are the delimiters of the embedded string literal.
<alternative string literal> ::= { q | Q } <quote> <start char> [<char> ...] <end char> <quote>
Rules
When Inside the string, i.e. |
select q'{abc{def}ghi}' from rdb$database; -- result: abc{def}ghi
select q'!That's a string!' from rdb$database; -- result: That's a string
Introducer Syntax for String Literals
If necessary, a string literal may be preceded by a character set name, itself prefixed with an underscore “_”. This is known as introducer syntax. Its purpose is to inform the engine about how to interpret and store the incoming string.
Example
INSERT INTO People
VALUES (_ISO8859_1 'Hans-Jörg Schäfer')
Number Literals
A number literal is any valid number in a supported notation:
-
In SQL, for numbers in the standard decimal notation, the decimal point is always represented by period character (‘
.
’, full-stop, dot); thousands are not separated. Inclusion of commas, blanks, etc. will cause errors. -
Exponential notation is supported. For example, 0.0000234 can be expressed as
2.34e-5
. -
Hexadecimal notation is supported by Firebird 2.5 and higher versions — see below.
The format of the literal decides the type (<d>
for a decimal digit, <h>
for a hexadecimal digit):
Format | Type |
---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
For backwards compatibility, some values of 19 digits are mapped to |
|
|
Hexadecimal Notation for Numbers
From Firebird 2.5 forward, integer values can be entered in hexadecimal notation.
Numbers with 1-8 hex digits will be interpreted as type INTEGER
;
numbers with 9-16 hex digits as type BIGINT
;
numbers with 17-32 hex digits as type INT128
.
0{x|X}<hexdigits> <hexdigits> ::= 1-32 of <hexdigit> <hexdigit> ::= one of 0..9, A..F, a..f
select 0x6FAA0D3 from rdb$database -- returns 117088467
select 0x4F9 from rdb$database -- returns 1273
select 0x6E44F9A8 from rdb$database -- returns 1850014120
select 0x9E44F9A8 from rdb$database -- returns -1639646808 (an INTEGER)
select 0x09E44F9A8 from rdb$database -- returns 2655320488 (a BIGINT)
select 0x28ED678A4C987 from rdb$database -- returns 720001751632263
select 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF from rdb$database -- returns -1
-
Hex numbers in the range 0 .. 7FFF FFFF are positive
INTEGER
s with values between 0 .. 2147483647 decimal. To coerce a number toBIGINT
, prepend enough zeroes to bring the total number of hex digits to nine or above. That changes the type but not the value. -
Hex numbers between 8000 0000 .. FFFF FFFF require some attention:
-
When written with eight hex digits, as in
0x9E44F9A8
, a value is interpreted as 32-bitINTEGER
. Since the leftmost bit (sign bit) is set, it maps to the negative range -2147483648 .. -1 decimal. -
With one or more zeroes prepended, as in
0x09E44F9A8
, a value is interpreted as 64-bitBIGINT
in the range 0000 0000 8000 0000 .. 0000 0000 FFFF FFFF. The sign bit is not set now, so they map to the positive range 2147483648 .. 4294967295 decimal.
Thus, in this range — and only in this range — prepending a mathematically insignificant 0 results in a totally different value. This is something to be aware of.
-
-
Hex numbers between 1 0000 0000 .. 7FFF FFFF FFFF FFFF are all positive
BIGINT
. -
Hex numbers between 8000 0000 0000 0000 .. FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF are all negative
BIGINT
. -
A SMALLINT cannot be written in hex, strictly speaking, since even
0x1
is evaluated asINTEGER
. However, if you write a positive integer within the 16-bit range0x0000
(decimal zero) to0x7FFF
(decimal 32767) it will be converted toSMALLINT
transparently.It is possible to write to a negative
SMALLINT
in hex, using a 4-byte hex number within the range0xFFFF8000
(decimal -32768) to0xFFFFFFFF
(decimal -1).
Datetime Literals
Formally, the SQL standard defines datetime literals as a prefix DATE
, TIME
and TIMESTAMP
followed by a string literal with a datetime format.
Historically, Firebird documentation has referred to these datetime literals as "shorthand casts"
.
In Firebird 4.0, the use of datetime mnemonics in datetime literals (e.g. DATE 'TODAY'
) is no longer allowed.
The format of datetime literals and strings in Firebird 4.0 is more strict compared to earlier Firebird versions. |
<datetime_literal> ::= DATE '<date_format>' | TIME { '<time_format>' | '<time_tz_format>' } | TIMESTAMP { '<timestamp_format>' | '<timestamp_tz_format>' }
<date_format> ::= [YYYY<p>]MM<p>DD | MM<p>DD[<p>{ YYYY | YY }] | DD<p>MM[<p>{ YYYY | YY }] <time_format> ::= HH[:mm[:SS[<f>NNNN]]] <timestamp_format> ::= <date_format> [<space> <time_format>] <time_zone> ::= { + | - }HH:MM | time zone name (e.g. Europe/Berlin) <time_tz_format> ::= <time_format> [<space>] <time_zone> <timestamp_tz_format> ::= <timestamp_format> [<space>] <time_zone> <p> ::= whitespace | . | - | / <f> ::= : | .
Argument | Description |
---|---|
datetime_literal |
Datetime literal |
date_format |
Format of date |
time_format |
Format of time |
timestamp_format |
Format of timestamp |
time_zone |
Format of time zone |
time_tz_format |
Format of time with time zone |
timestamp_tz_format |
Format of timestamp with time zone |
YYYY |
Four-digit year |
YY |
Two-digit year |
MM |
Month It may contain 1 or 2 digits (1-12 or 01-12). You can also specify the three-letter shorthand name or the full name of a month in English. Case-insensitive |
DD |
Day. It may contain 1 or 2 digits (1-31 or 01-31) |
HH |
Hour. It may contain 1 or 2 digits (0-23 or 00-23) |
mm |
Minutes. It may contain 1 or 2 digits (0-59 or 00-59) |
SS |
Seconds. It may contain 1 or 2 digits (0-59 or 00-59) |
NNNN |
Ten-thousandths of a second. It may contain from 1 to 4 digits (0-9999) |
p |
A date separator, any of permitted characters.
Leading and trailing spaces are ignored.
The choice of separator in a date decides whether the parser reads |
f |
Fractional seconds separator |
Use of the complete specification of the year in the four-digit form — |
-- 1
UPDATE PEOPLE
SET AGECAT = 'SENIOR'
WHERE BIRTHDATE < DATE '1-Jan-1943';
-- 2
INSERT INTO APPOINTMENTS
(EMPLOYEE_ID, CLIENT_ID, APP_DATE, APP_TIME)
VALUES (973, 8804, DATE '1-Jan-2021' + 2, TIME '16:00');
-- 3
NEW.LASTMOD = TIMESTAMP '1-Jan-2021 16:00';
Although the Firebird datetime syntax is very flexible, to avoid ambiguity we recommend using the ISO-8601 order (year-month-day), ‘ In short, use |
4.1.2. SQL Operators
SQL operators comprise operators for comparing, calculating, evaluating and concatenating values.
Operator Precedence
SQL Operators are divided into four types. Each operator type has a precedence, a ranking that determines the order in which operators and the values obtained with their help are evaluated in an expression. The higher the precedence of the operator type is, the earlier it will be evaluated. Each operator has its own precedence within its type, that determines the order in which they are evaluated in an expression.
Operators with the same precedence are evaluated from left to right. To force a different evaluation order, operations can be grouped by means of parentheses.
Operator Type | Precedence | Explanation |
---|---|---|
Concatenation |
1 |
Strings are concatenated before any other operations take place |
Arithmetic |
2 |
Arithmetic operations are performed after strings are concatenated, but before comparison and logical operations |
Comparison |
3 |
Comparison operations take place after string concatenation and arithmetic operations, but before logical operations |
Logical |
4 |
Logical operators are executed after all other types of operators |
Concatenation Operator
The concatenation operator, two pipe characters known as “double pipe” — ‘||
’ — concatenates (connects together) two character strings to form a single string.
Character strings can be constants or values obtained from columns or other expressions.
SELECT LAST_NAME || ', ' || FIRST_NAME AS FULL_NAME
FROM EMPLOYEE
Arithmetic Operators
Operator | Purpose | Precedence |
---|---|---|
|
Unary plus |
1 |
|
Unary minus |
1 |
|
Multiplication |
2 |
|
Division |
2 |
|
Addition |
3 |
|
Subtraction |
3 |
UPDATE T
SET A = 4 + 1/(B-C)*D
Where operators have the same precedence, they are evaluated in left-to-right sequence. |
Comparison Operators
Operator | Purpose | Precedence |
---|---|---|
|
Checks that the expression on the left is (not) |
1 |
|
Is equal to, is identical to |
2 |
|
Is not equal to |
2 |
|
Is greater than |
2 |
|
Is less than |
2 |
|
Is greater than or equal to |
2 |
|
Is less than or equal to |
2 |
|
Is not greater than |
2 |
|
Is not less than |
2 |
This group also includes comparison predicates BETWEEN
, LIKE
, CONTAINING
, SIMILAR TO
and others.
IF (SALARY > 1400) THEN
…
Logical Operators
Operator | Purpose | Precedence |
---|---|---|
|
Negation of a search condition |
1 |
|
Combines two or more predicates, each of which must be true for the entire predicate to be true |
2 |
|
Combines two or more predicates, of which at least one predicate must be true for the entire predicate to be true |
3 |
IF (A < B OR (A > C AND A > D) AND NOT (C = D)) THEN …
NEXT VALUE FOR
DSQL, PSQL
BIGINT
— dialect 2 and 3
INTEGER
— dialect 1
NEXT VALUE FOR sequence-name
NEXT VALUE FOR
returns the next value of a sequence.
SEQUENCE
is the SQL-standard term for what is historically called a generator in Firebird and its ancestor, InterBase.
The NEXT VALUE FOR
operator is equivalent to the legacy GEN_ID (…, increment)
function with increment the increment stored in the metadata of the sequence.
It is the recommended syntax for retrieving the next sequence value.
Unlike the The increment of a sequence can be configured with the In dialect 1, the result type is |
NEW.CUST_ID = NEXT VALUE FOR CUSTSEQ;
AT
Time Zone Expression
DSQL, PSQL
<at expr> ::= <expr> AT { TIME ZONE <time zone string> | LOCAL }
The AT
expression expresses a datetime value in a different time zone, while keeping the same UTC instant.
AT
translates a time/timestamp value to its corresponding value in another time zone.
If LOCAL
is used, the value is converted to the session time zone.
When expr is a WITHOUT TIME ZONE
type, expr is first converted to a WITH TIME ZONE
in the session time zone and then transformed to the specified time zone.
select time '12:00 GMT' at time zone '-03:00' from rdb$database;
select current_timestamp at time zone 'America/Sao_Paulo' from rdb$database;
select timestamp '2018-01-01 12:00 GMT' at local from rdb$database;
4.1.3. Conditional Expressions
A conditional expression is one that returns different values according to how a certain condition is met.
It is composed by applying a conditional function construct, of which Firebird supports several.
This section describes only one conditional expression construct: CASE
.
All other conditional expressions apply internal functions derived from CASE
and are described in Conditional Functions.
CASE
DSQL, PSQL
The CASE
construct returns a single value from a number of possible values.
Two syntactic variants are supported:
-
The simple
CASE
, comparable to a case construct in Pascal or a switch in C -
The searched
CASE
, which works like a series of “if … else if … else if
” clauses.
Simple CASE
… CASE <test-expr> WHEN <expr> THEN <result> [WHEN <expr> THEN <result> ...] [ELSE <defaultresult>] END …
When this variant is used, test-expr is compared to the first expr, second expr and so on, until a match is found, and the corresponding result is returned.
If no match is found, defaultresult from the optional ELSE
clause is returned.
If there are no matches and no ELSE
clause, NULL
is returned.
The matching works identically to the “=
” operator.
That is, if test-expr is NULL
, it does not match any expr, not even an expression that resolves to NULL
.
The returned result does not have to be a literal value: it might be a field or variable name, compound expression or NULL
literal.
SELECT
NAME,
AGE,
CASE UPPER(SEX)
WHEN 'M' THEN 'Male'
WHEN 'F' THEN 'Female'
ELSE 'Unknown'
END GENDER,
RELIGION
FROM PEOPLE
A short form of the simple CASE
construct is the DECODE
function.
Searched CASE
CASE WHEN <bool_expr> THEN <result> [WHEN <bool_expr> THEN <result> …] [ELSE <defaultresult>] END
The bool_expr expression is one that gives a ternary logical result: TRUE
, FALSE
or NULL
.
The first expression to return TRUE
determines the result.
If no expressions return TRUE
, defaultresult from the optional ELSE
clause is returned as the result.
If no expressions return TRUE
and there is no ELSE
clause, the result will be NULL
.
As with the simple CASE
construct, the result need not be a literal value: it might be a field or variable name, a compound expression, or be NULL
.
CANVOTE = CASE
WHEN AGE >= 18 THEN 'Yes'
WHEN AGE < 18 THEN 'No'
ELSE 'Unsure'
END
4.1.4. NULL
in Expressions
NULL
is not a value in SQL, but a state indicating that the value of the element either is unknown or it does not exist.
It is not a zero, nor a void, nor an “empty string”, and it does not act like any value.
When you use NULL
in numeric, string or date/time expressions, the result will always be NULL
.
When you use NULL
in logical (Boolean) expressions, the result will depend on the type of the operation and on other participating values.
When you compare a value to NULL
, the result will be unknown.
|
Expressions Returning NULL
Expressions in this list will always return NULL
:
1 + 2 + 3 + NULL
'Home ' || 'sweet ' || NULL
MyField = NULL
MyField <> NULL
NULL = NULL
not (NULL)
If it seems difficult to understand why, remember that NULL
is a state that stands for “unknown”.
NULL
in Logical Expressions
It has already been shown that NOT (NULL)
results in NULL
.
The interaction is a bit more complicated for the logical AND
and logical OR
operators:
NULL or false → NULL NULL or true → true NULL or NULL → NULL NULL and false → false NULL and true → NULL NULL and NULL → NULL
As a basic rule-of-thumb, if applying |
(1 = NULL) or (1 <> 1) -- returns NULL
(1 = NULL) or FALSE -- returns NULL
(1 = NULL) or (1 = 1) -- returns TRUE
(1 = NULL) or TRUE -- returns TRUE
(1 = NULL) or (1 = NULL) -- returns NULL
(1 = NULL) or UNKNOWN -- returns NULL
(1 = NULL) and (1 <> 1) -- returns FALSE
(1 = NULL) and FALSE -- returns FALSE
(1 = NULL) and (1 = 1) -- returns NULL
(1 = NULL) and TRUE -- returns NULL
(1 = NULL) and (1 = NULL) -- returns NULL
(1 = NULL) and UNKNOWN -- returns NULL
4.1.5. Subqueries
A subquery is a special form of expression that is actually a query embedded within another query.
Subqueries are written in the same way as regular SELECT
queries, but they must be enclosed in parentheses.
Subquery expressions can be used in the following ways:
-
To specify an output column in the SELECT list
-
To obtain values or conditions for search predicates (the
WHERE
,HAVING
clauses). -
To produce a set that the enclosing query can select from, as though were a regular table or view. Subqueries like this appear in the
FROM
clause (derived tables) or in a Common Table Expression (CTE)
Correlated Subqueries
A subquery can be correlated. A query is correlated when the subquery and the main query are interdependent. To process each record in the subquery, it is necessary to fetch a record in the main query; i.e. the subquery fully depends on the main query.
SELECT *
FROM Customers C
WHERE EXISTS
(SELECT *
FROM Orders O
WHERE C.cnum = O.cnum
AND O.adate = DATE '10.03.1990');
When subqueries are used to get the values of the output column in the SELECT
list, a subquery must return a scalar result (see below).
Scalar Results
Subqueries used in search predicates, other than existential and quantified predicates, must return a scalar result; that is, not more than one column from not more than one matching row or aggregation. If the result would return more, a run-time error will occur (“Multiple rows in a singleton select…”).
Although it is reporting a genuine error, the message can be slightly misleading. A “singleton SELECT” is a query that must not be capable of returning more than one row. However, “singleton” and “scalar” are not synonymous: not all singleton SELECTS are required to be scalar; and single-column selects can return multiple rows for existential and quantified predicates. |
-
A subquery as the output column in a
SELECT
list:SELECT e.first_name, e.last_name, (SELECT sh.new_salary FROM salary_history sh WHERE sh.emp_no = e.emp_no ORDER BY sh.change_date DESC ROWS 1) AS last_salary FROM employee e
-
A subquery in the
WHERE
clause for obtaining the employee’s maximum salary and filtering by it:SELECT e.first_name, e.last_name, e.salary FROM employee e WHERE e.salary = ( SELECT MAX(ie.salary) FROM employee ie )
4.2. Predicates
A predicate is a simple expression asserting some fact, let’s call it P
.
If P
resolves as TRUE, it succeeds.
If it resolves to FALSE or NULL (UNKNOWN), it fails.
A trap lies here, though: suppose the predicate, P
, returns FALSE.
In this case NOT(P)
will return TRUE.
On the other hand, if P
returns NULL (unknown), then NOT(P)
returns NULL as well.
In SQL, predicates can appear in CHECK
constraints, WHERE
and HAVING
clauses, CASE
expressions, the IIF()
function and in the ON
condition of JOIN
clauses, and anywhere a normal expression can occur.
4.2.1. Conditions
A condition — or Boolean expression — is a statement about the data that, like a predicate, can resolve to TRUE, FALSE or NULL.
Conditions consist of one or more predicates, possibly negated using NOT
and connected by AND
and OR
operators.
Parentheses may be used for grouping predicates and controlling evaluation order.
A predicate may embed other predicates. Evaluation sequence is in the outward direction, i.e., the innermost predicates are evaluated first. Each “level” is evaluated in precedence order until the truth value of the ultimate condition is resolved.
4.2.2. Comparison Predicates
A comparison predicate consists of two expressions connected with a comparison operator. There are six traditional comparison operators:
=, >, <, >=, <=, <>
For the complete list of comparison operators with their variant forms, see Comparison Operators.
If one of the sides (left or right) of a comparison predicate has NULL
in it, the value of the predicate will be UNKNOWN.
-
Retrieve information about computers with the CPU frequency not less than 500 MHz and the price lower than $800:
SELECT * FROM Pc WHERE speed >= 500 AND price < 800;
-
Retrieve information about all dot matrix printers that cost less than $300:
SELECT * FROM Printer WHERE ptrtype = 'matrix' AND price < 300;
-
The following query will return no data, even if there are printers with no type specified for them, because a predicate that compares
NULL
withNULL
returnsNULL
:SELECT * FROM Printer WHERE ptrtype = NULL AND price < 300;
On the other hand,
ptrtype
can be tested forNULL
and return a result: it is just that it is not a comparison test:SELECT * FROM Printer WHERE ptrtype IS NULL AND price < 300;
— see
IS [NOT] NULL
.
Note about String Comparison
When |
Other Comparison Predicates
Other comparison predicates are marked by keyword symbols.
BETWEEN
DSQL, PSQL, ESQL
<value> [NOT] BETWEEN <value_1> AND <value_2>
The BETWEEN
predicate tests whether a value falls within a specified range of two values.
(NOT BETWEEN
tests whether the value does not fall within that range.)
The operands for BETWEEN
predicate are two arguments of compatible data types.
Unlike in some other DBMS, the BETWEEN
predicate in Firebird is not symmetrical — if the lower value is not the first argument, the BETWEEN
predicate will always return FALSE.
The search is inclusive (the values represented by both arguments are included in the search).
In other words, the BETWEEN
predicate could be rewritten:
<value> >= <value_1> AND <value> <= <value_2>
When BETWEEN
is used in the search conditions of DML queries, the Firebird optimizer can use an index on the searched column, if it is available.
SELECT *
FROM EMPLOYEE
WHERE HIRE_DATE BETWEEN date '1992-01-01' AND CURRENT_DATE
LIKE
DSQL, PSQL, ESQL
<match_value> [NOT] LIKE <pattern> [ESCAPE <escape character>] <match_value> ::= character-type expression <pattern> ::= search pattern <escape character> ::= escape character
The LIKE
predicate compares the character-type expression with the pattern defined in the second expression.
Case- or accent-sensitivity for the comparison is determined by the collation that is in use.
A collation can be specified for either operand, if required.
Two wildcard symbols are available for use in the search pattern:
-
the percentage symbol (
%
) will match any sequence of zero or more characters in the tested value -
the underscore character (
_
) will match any single character in the tested value
If the tested value matches the pattern, taking into account wildcard symbols, the predicate is TRUE.
ESCAPE
Character OptionIf the search string contains either of the wildcard symbols, the ESCAPE
clause can be used to specify an escape character.
The escape character must precede the ‘%
’ or ‘_
’ symbol in the search string, to indicate that the symbol is to be interpreted as a literal character.
LIKE
-
Find the numbers of departments whose names start with the word “Software”:
SELECT DEPT_NO FROM DEPT WHERE DEPT_NAME LIKE 'Software%';
It is possible to use an index on the DEPT_NAME field if it exists.
AboutLIKE
and the OptimizerActually, the
LIKE
predicate does not use an index. However, if the predicate takes the form ofLIKE 'string%'
, it will be converted to theSTARTING WITH
predicate, which will use an index. This optimization only works for literal patterns, not for parameters.So, if you need to search for the beginning of a string, it is recommended to use the
STARTING WITH
predicate instead of theLIKE
predicate. -
Search for employees whose names consist of 5 letters, start with the letters “Sm” and end with “th”. The predicate will be true for such names as “Smith” and “Smyth”.
SELECT first_name FROM employee WHERE first_name LIKE 'Sm_th'
-
Search for all clients whose address contains the string “Rostov”:
SELECT * FROM CUSTOMER WHERE ADDRESS LIKE '%Rostov%'
If you need to do a case-insensitive search for something enclosed inside a string (
LIKE '%Abc%'
), use of theCONTAINING
predicate is recommended, in preference to theLIKE
predicate. -
Search for tables containing the underscore character in their names. The ‘
#
’ character is used as the escape character:SELECT RDB$RELATION_NAME FROM RDB$RELATIONS WHERE RDB$RELATION_NAME LIKE '%#_%' ESCAPE '#'
STARTING WITH
DSQL, PSQL, ESQL
<value> [NOT] STARTING WITH <value>
The STARTING WITH
predicate searches for a string or a string-like type that starts with the characters in its value argument.
The case- and accent-sensitivity of STARTING WITH
depends on the collation of the first value.
When STARTING WITH
is used in the search conditions of DML queries, the Firebird optimizer can use an index on the searched column, if it exists.
Search for employees whose last names start with “Jo”:
SELECT LAST_NAME, FIRST_NAME
FROM EMPLOYEE
WHERE LAST_NAME STARTING WITH 'Jo'
CONTAINING
DSQL, PSQL, ESQL
<value> [NOT] CONTAINING <value>
The CONTAINING
predicate searches for a string or a string-like type looking for the sequence of characters that matches its argument.
It can be used for an alphanumeric (string-like) search on numbers and dates.
A CONTAINING
search is not case-sensitive.
However, if an accent-sensitive collation is in use then the search will be accent-sensitive.
-
Search for projects whose names contain the substring “Map”:
SELECT * FROM PROJECT WHERE PROJ_NAME CONTAINING 'Map';
Two rows with the names “AutoMap” and “MapBrowser port” are returned.
-
Search for changes in salaries with the date containing number 84 (in this case, it means changes that took place in 1984):
SELECT * FROM SALARY_HISTORY WHERE CHANGE_DATE CONTAINING 84;
SIMILAR TO
DSQL, PSQL
string-expression [NOT] SIMILAR TO <pattern> [ESCAPE <escape-char>] <pattern> ::= an SQL regular expression <escape-char> ::= a single character
SIMILAR TO
matches a string against an SQL regular expression pattern.
Unlike in some other languages, the pattern must match the entire string in order to succeed — matching a substring is not enough.
If any operand is NULL
, the result is NULL
.
Otherwise, the result is TRUE
or FALSE
.
The following syntax defines the SQL regular expression format. It is a complete and correct top-down definition. It is also highly formal, rather long and probably perfectly fit to discourage everybody who hasn’t already some experience with regular expressions (or with highly formal, rather long top-down definitions). Feel free to skip it and read the next section, Building Regular Expressions, which uses a bottom-up approach, aimed at the rest of us.
<regular expression> ::= <regular term> ['|' <regular term> ...] <regular term> ::= <regular factor> ... <regular factor> ::= <regular primary> [<quantifier>] <quantifier> ::= ? | * | + | '{' <m> [,[<n>]] '}' <m>, <n> ::= unsigned int, with <m> <= <n> if both present <regular primary> ::= <character> | <character class> | % | (<regular expression>) <character> ::= <escaped character> | <non-escaped character> <escaped character> ::= <escape-char> <special character> | <escape-char> <escape-char> <special character> ::= any of the characters []()|^-+*%_?{} <non-escaped character> ::= any character that is not a <special character> and not equal to <escape-char> (if defined) <character class> ::= '_' | '[' <member> ... ']' | '[^' <non-member> ... ']' | '[' <member> ... '^' <non-member> ... ']' <member>, <non-member> ::= <character> | <range> | <predefined class> <range> ::= <character>-<character> <predefined class> ::= '[:' <predefined class name> ':]' <predefined class name> ::= ALPHA | UPPER | LOWER | DIGIT | ALNUM | SPACE | WHITESPACE
In this section are the elements and rules for building SQL regular expressions.
Within regular expressions, most characters represent themselves. The only exceptions are the special characters below:
[ ] ( ) | ^ - + * % _ ? { }
... and the escape character, if it is defined.
A regular expression that contains no special character or escape characters matches only strings that are identical to itself (subject to the collation in use).
That is, it functions just like the ‘=
’ operator:
'Apple' similar to 'Apple' -- true
'Apples' similar to 'Apple' -- false
'Apple' similar to 'Apples' -- false
'APPLE' similar to 'Apple' -- depends on collation
The known SQL wildcards ‘_
’ and ‘%
’ match any single character and a string of any length, respectively:
'Birne' similar to 'B_rne' -- true
'Birne' similar to 'B_ne' -- false
'Birne' similar to 'B%ne' -- true
'Birne' similar to 'Bir%ne%' -- true
'Birne' similar to 'Birr%ne' -- false
Notice how ‘%
’ also matches the empty string.
A bunch of characters enclosed in brackets define a character class. A character in the string matches a class in the pattern if the character is a member of the class:
'Citroen' similar to 'Cit[arju]oen' -- true
'Citroen' similar to 'Ci[tr]oen' -- false
'Citroen' similar to 'Ci[tr][tr]oen' -- true
As can be seen from the second line, the class only matches a single character, not a sequence.
Within a class definition, two characters connected by a hyphen define a range. A range comprises the two endpoints and all the characters that lie between them in the active collation. Ranges can be placed anywhere in the class definition without special delimiters to keep them apart from the other elements.
'Datte' similar to 'Dat[q-u]e' -- true
'Datte' similar to 'Dat[abq-uy]e' -- true
'Datte' similar to 'Dat[bcg-km-pwz]e' -- false
The following predefined character classes can also be used in a class definition:
[:ALPHA:]
-
Latin letters a..z and A..Z. With an accent-insensitive collation, this class also matches accented forms of these characters.
[:DIGIT:]
-
Decimal digits 0..9.
[:ALNUM:]
-
Union of
[:ALPHA:]
and[:DIGIT:]
. [:UPPER:]
-
Uppercase Latin letters A..Z. Also matches lowercase with case-insensitive collation and accented forms with accent-insensitive collation.
[:LOWER:]
-
Lowercase Latin letters a..z. Also matches uppercase with case-insensitive collation and accented forms with accent-insensitive collation.
[:SPACE:]
-
Matches the space character (ASCII 32).
[:WHITESPACE:]
-
Matches horizontal tab (ASCII 9), linefeed (ASCII 10), vertical tab (ASCII 11), formfeed (ASCII 12), carriage return (ASCII 13) and space (ASCII 32).
Including a predefined class has the same effect as including all its members. Predefined classes are only allowed within class definitions. If you need to match against a predefined class and nothing more, place an extra pair of brackets around it.
'Erdbeere' similar to 'Erd[[:ALNUM:]]eere' -- true
'Erdbeere' similar to 'Erd[[:DIGIT:]]eere' -- false
'Erdbeere' similar to 'Erd[a[:SPACE:]b]eere' -- true
'Erdbeere' similar to [[:ALPHA:]] -- false
'E' similar to [[:ALPHA:]] -- true
If a class definition starts with a caret, everything that follows is excluded from the class. All other characters match:
'Framboise' similar to 'Fra[^ck-p]boise' -- false
'Framboise' similar to 'Fr[^a][^a]boise' -- false
'Framboise' similar to 'Fra[^[:DIGIT:]]boise' -- true
If the caret is not placed at the start of the sequence, the class contains everything before the caret, except for the elements that also occur after the caret:
'Grapefruit' similar to 'Grap[a-m^f-i]fruit' -- true
'Grapefruit' similar to 'Grap[abc^xyz]fruit' -- false
'Grapefruit' similar to 'Grap[abc^de]fruit' -- false
'Grapefruit' similar to 'Grap[abe^de]fruit' -- false
'3' similar to '[[:DIGIT:]^4-8]' -- true
'6' similar to '[[:DIGIT:]^4-8]' -- false
Lastly, the already mentioned wildcard ‘_
’ is a character class of its own, matching any single character.
A question mark (‘?
’) immediately following a character or class indicates that the preceding item may occur 0 or 1 times in order to match:
'Hallon' similar to 'Hal?on' -- false
'Hallon' similar to 'Hal?lon' -- true
'Hallon' similar to 'Halll?on' -- true
'Hallon' similar to 'Hallll?on' -- false
'Hallon' similar to 'Halx?lon' -- true
'Hallon' similar to 'H[a-c]?llon[x-z]?' -- true
An asterisk (‘*
’) immediately following a character or class indicates that the preceding item may occur 0 or more times in order to match:
'Icaque' similar to 'Ica*que' -- true
'Icaque' similar to 'Icar*que' -- true
'Icaque' similar to 'I[a-c]*que' -- true
'Icaque' similar to '_*' -- true
'Icaque' similar to '[[:ALPHA:]]*' -- true
'Icaque' similar to 'Ica[xyz]*e' -- false
A plus sign (‘+
’) immediately following a character or class indicates that the preceding item must occur 1 or more times in order to match:
'Jujube' similar to 'Ju_+' -- true
'Jujube' similar to 'Ju+jube' -- true
'Jujube' similar to 'Jujuber+' -- false
'Jujube' similar to 'J[jux]+be' -- true
'Jujube' sililar to 'J[[:DIGIT:]]+ujube' -- false
If a character or class is followed by a number enclosed in braces (‘{
’ and ‘}
’), it must be repeated exactly that number of times in order to match:
'Kiwi' similar to 'Ki{2}wi' -- false
'Kiwi' similar to 'K[ipw]{2}i' -- true
'Kiwi' similar to 'K[ipw]{2}' -- false
'Kiwi' similar to 'K[ipw]{3}' -- true
If the number is followed by a comma (‘,
’), the item must be repeated at least that number of times in order to match:
'Limone' similar to 'Li{2,}mone' -- false
'Limone' similar to 'Li{1,}mone' -- true
'Limone' similar to 'Li[nezom]{2,}' -- true
If the braces contain two numbers separated by a comma, the second number not smaller than the first, then the item must be repeated at least the first number and at most the second number of times in order to match:
'Mandarijn' similar to 'M[a-p]{2,5}rijn' -- true
'Mandarijn' similar to 'M[a-p]{2,3}rijn' -- false
'Mandarijn' similar to 'M[a-p]{2,3}arijn' -- true
The quantifiers ‘?
’, ‘*
’ and ‘+
’ are shorthand for {0,1}
, {0,}
and {1,}
, respectively.
Regular expression terms can be OR’ed with the ‘|
’ operator.
A match is made when the argument string matches at least one of the terms:
'Nektarin' similar to 'Nek|tarin' -- false
'Nektarin' similar to 'Nektarin|Persika' -- true
'Nektarin' similar to 'M_+|N_+|P_+' -- true
One or more parts of the regular expression can be grouped into subexpressions (also called subpatterns) by placing them between parentheses (‘(
’ and ‘)
’).
A subexpression is a regular expression in its own right.
It can contain all the elements allowed in a regular expression, and can also have quantifiers added to it.
'Orange' similar to 'O(ra|ri|ro)nge' -- true
'Orange' similar to 'O(r[a-e])+nge' -- true
'Orange' similar to 'O(ra){2,4}nge' -- false
'Orange' similar to 'O(r(an|in)g|rong)?e' -- true
In order to match against a character that is special in regular expressions, that character has to be escaped. There is no default escape character; rather, the user specifies one when needed:
'Peer (Poire)' similar to 'P[^ ]+ \(P[^ ]+\)' escape '\' -- true
'Pera [Pear]' similar to 'P[^ ]+ #[P[^ ]+#]' escape '#' -- true
'Päron-äppledryck' similar to 'P%$-ä%' escape '$' -- true
'Pärondryck' similar to 'P%--ä%' escape '-' -- false
The last line demonstrates that the escape character can also escape itself, if needed.
IS [NOT] DISTINCT FROM
DSQL, PSQL
<operand1> IS [NOT] DISTINCT FROM <operand2>
Two operands are considered DISTINCT (different) if they have a different value or if one of them is NULL
and the other non-null.
They are considered NOT DISTINCT (equal) if they have the same value or if both of them are NULL
.
IS [NOT] DISTINCT FROM
always returns TRUE or FALSE and never UNKNOWN (NULL) (unknown value).
Operators ‘=
’ and ‘<>
’, conversely, will return UNKNOWN (NULL) if one or both operands are NULL.
Operand values |
Result of various predicates |
|||
---|---|---|---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
Same value |
|
|
|
|
Different values |
|
|
|
|
Both |
|
|
|
|
One |
|
|
|
|
SELECT ID, NAME, TEACHER
FROM COURSES
WHERE START_DAY IS NOT DISTINCT FROM END_DAY;
-- PSQL fragment
IF (NEW.JOB IS DISTINCT FROM OLD.JOB)
THEN POST_EVENT 'JOB_CHANGED';
Boolean IS [NOT]
DSQL, PSQL
<value> IS [NOT] { TRUE | FALSE | UNKNOWN }
The IS
predicate with Boolean literal values checks if the expression on the left side matches the Boolean value on the right side.
The expression on the left side must be of type BOOLEAN
, otherwise an exception is raised.
The IS [NOT] UNKNOWN
is equivalent to IS [NOT] NULL
.
The right side of the predicate only accepts the literals |
-- Checking FALSE value
SELECT * FROM TBOOL WHERE BVAL IS FALSE;
ID BVAL
============= =======
2 <false>
-- Checking UNKNOWN value
SELECT * FROM TBOOL WHERE BVAL IS UNKNOWN;
ID BVAL
============= =======
3 <null>
IS [NOT] NULL
DSQL, PSQL, ESQL
<value> IS [NOT] NULL
Since NULL
is not a value, these operators are not comparison operators.
The IS [NOT] NULL
predicate tests that the expression on the left side has a value (IS NOT NULL) or has no value (IS NULL).
Search for sales entries that have no shipment date set for them:
SELECT * FROM SALES
WHERE SHIP_DATE IS NULL;
Note regarding the
IS predicatesUp to and including Firebird 2.5, the |
4.2.3. Existential Predicates
This group of predicates includes those that use subqueries to submit values for all kinds of assertions in search conditions.
Existential predicates are so called because they use various methods to test for the existence or non-existence of some condition, returning TRUE
if the existence or non-existence is confirmed or FALSE
otherwise.
EXISTS
DSQL, PSQL, ESQL
[NOT] EXISTS (<select_stmt>)
The EXISTS
predicate uses a subquery expression as its argument.
It returns TRUE
if the subquery result would contain at least one row; otherwise it returns FALSE
.
NOT EXISTS
returns FALSE
if the subquery result would contain at least one row; it returns TRUE
otherwise.
The subquery can specify multiple columns, or |
-
Find those employees who have projects.
SELECT * FROM employee WHERE EXISTS(SELECT * FROM employee_project ep WHERE ep.emp_no = employee.emp_no)
-
Find those employees who have no projects.
SELECT * FROM employee WHERE NOT EXISTS(SELECT * FROM employee_project ep WHERE ep.emp_no = employee.emp_no)
IN
DSQL, PSQL, ESQL
<value> [NOT] IN (<select_stmt> | <value_list>) <value_list> ::= <value_1> [, <value_2> …]
The IN
predicate tests whether the value of the expression on the left side is present in the set of values specified on the right side.
The set of values cannot have more than 1500 items.
The IN
predicate can be replaced with the following equivalent forms:
(<value> = <value_1> [OR <value> = <value_2> …]) <value> = { ANY | SOME } (<select_stmt>)
When the IN
predicate is used in the search conditions of DML queries, the Firebird optimizer can use an index on the searched column, if a suitable one exists.
In its second form, the IN
predicate tests whether the value of the expression on the left side is present — or not present, if NOT IN
is used — in the result of the executed subquery on the right side.
The subquery must be specified to result in only one column, otherwise the error “count of column list and variable list do not match” will occur.
Queries specified using the IN
predicate with a subquery can be replaced with a similar query using the EXISTS
predicate.
For instance, the following query:
SELECT
model, speed, hd
FROM PC
WHERE
model IN (SELECT model
FROM product
WHERE maker = 'A');
can be replaced with a similar one using the EXISTS predicate:
SELECT
model, speed, hd
FROM PC
WHERE
EXISTS (SELECT *
FROM product
WHERE maker = 'A'
AND product.model = PC.model);
However, a query using NOT IN
with a subquery does not always give the same result as its NOT EXISTS
counterpart.
The reason is that EXISTS
always returns TRUE or FALSE, whereas IN
returns NULL
in one of these two cases:
-
when the test value is
NULL
and theIN ()
list is not empty -
when the test value has no match in the
IN ()
list and at least one list element isNULL
It is in only these two cases that IN ()
will return NULL
while the corresponding EXISTS
predicate will return FALSE
('no matching row found').
In a search or, for example, an IF (…)
statement, both results mean “failure” and it makes no difference to the outcome.
But, for the same data, NOT IN ()
will return NULL
, while NOT EXISTS
will return TRUE
, leading to opposite results.
As an example, suppose you have the following query:
-- Looking for people who were not born
-- on the same day as any famous New York citizen
SELECT P1.name AS NAME
FROM Personnel P1
WHERE P1.birthday NOT IN (SELECT C1.birthday
FROM Celebrities C1
WHERE C1.birthcity = 'New York');
Now, assume that the NY celebrities list is not empty and contains at least one NULL birthday.
Then for every citizen who does not share his birthday with a NY celebrity, NOT IN
will return NULL
, because that is what IN
does.
The search condition is thereby not satisfied and the citizen will be left out of the SELECT
result, which is wrong.
For citizens whose birthday does match with a celebrity’s birthday, NOT IN
will correctly return FALSE
, so they will be left out too, and no rows will be returned.
If the NOT EXISTS
form is used:
-- Looking for people who were not born
-- on the same day as any famous New York citizen
SELECT P1.name AS NAME
FROM Personnel P1
WHERE NOT EXISTS (SELECT *
FROM Celebrities C1
WHERE C1.birthcity = 'New York'
AND C1.birthday = P1.birthday);
non-matches will have a NOT EXISTS
result of TRUE
and their records will be in the result set.
If there is any chance of |
-
Find employees with the names “Pete”, “Ann” and “Roger”:
SELECT * FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE FIRST_NAME IN ('Pete', 'Ann', 'Roger');
-
Find all computers that have models whose manufacturer starts with the letter “A”:
SELECT model, speed, hd FROM PC WHERE model IN (SELECT model FROM product WHERE maker STARTING WITH 'A');
SINGULAR
DSQL, PSQL, ESQL
[NOT] SINGULAR (<select_stmt>)
The SINGULAR
predicate takes a subquery as its argument and evaluates it as TRUE if the subquery returns exactly one result row; otherwise the predicate is evaluated as FALSE.
The subquery may list several output columns since the rows are not returned anyway.
They are only tested for (singular) existence.
For brevity, people usually specify ‘SELECT *
’.
The SINGULAR
predicate can return only two values: TRUE
or FALSE
.
Find those employees who have only one project.
SELECT *
FROM employee
WHERE SINGULAR(SELECT *
FROM employee_project ep
WHERE ep.emp_no = employee.emp_no)
4.2.4. Quantified Subquery Predicates
A quantifier is a logical operator that sets the number of objects for which this condition is true. It is not a numeric quantity, but a logical one that connects the condition with the full set of possible objects. Such predicates are based on logical universal and existential quantifiers that are recognised in formal logic.
In subquery expressions, quantified predicates make it possible to compare separate values with the results of subqueries; they have the following common form:
<value expression> <comparison operator> <quantifier> <subquery>
ALL
DSQL, PSQL, ESQL
<value> <op> ALL (<select_stmt>)
When the ALL
quantifier is used, the predicate is TRUE if every value returned by the subquery satisfies the condition in the predicate of the main query.
Show only those clients whose ratings are higher than the rating of every client in Paris.
SELECT c1.*
FROM Customers c1
WHERE c1.rating > ALL
(SELECT c2.rating
FROM Customers c2
WHERE c2.city = 'Paris')
If the subquery returns an empty set, the predicate is TRUE for every left-side value, regardless of the operator. This may appear to be contradictory, because every left-side value will thus be considered both smaller and greater than, both equal to and unequal to, every element of the right-side stream. Nevertheless, it aligns perfectly with formal logic: if the set is empty, the predicate is true 0 times, i.e. for every row in the set. |
ANY
and SOME
DSQL, PSQL, ESQL
<value> <op> {ANY | SOME} (<select_stmt>)
The quantifiers ANY
and SOME
are identical in their behaviour.
Apparently, both are present in the SQL standard so that they could be used interchangeably in order to improve the readability of operators.
When the ANY
or the SOME
quantifier is used, the predicate is TRUE if any of the values returned by the subquery satisfies the condition in the predicate of the main query.
If the subquery would return no rows at all, the predicate is automatically considered as FALSE.
Show only those clients whose ratings are higher than those of one or more clients in Rome.
SELECT *
FROM Customers
WHERE rating > ANY
(SELECT rating
FROM Customers
WHERE city = 'Rome')
5. Data Definition (DDL) Statements
DDL is the data definition language subset of Firebird’s SQL language. DDL statements are used to create, modify and delete database objects that have been created by users. When a DDL statement is committed, the metadata for the object are created, changed or deleted.
5.1. DATABASE
This section describes how to create a database, connect to an existing database, alter the file structure of a database and how to delete one. It also explains how to back up a database in two quite different ways and how to switch the database to the “copy-safe” mode for performing an external backup safely.
5.1.1. CREATE DATABASE
Creating a new database
DSQL, ESQL
CREATE {DATABASE | SCHEMA} <filespec> [<db_initial_option> [<db_initial_option> ...]] [<db_config_option> [<db_config_option> ...]] <db_initial_option> ::= USER username | PASSWORD 'password' | ROLE rolename | PAGE_SIZE [=] size | LENGTH [=] num [PAGE[S]] | SET NAMES 'charset' <db_config_option> ::= DEFAULT CHARACTER SET default_charset [COLLATION collation] -- not supported in ESQL | <sec_file> | DIFFERENCE FILE 'diff_file' -- not supported in ESQL <filespec> ::= "'" [server_spec]{filepath | db_alias} "'" <server_spec> ::= host[/{port | service}]: | \\host\ | <protocol>://[host[:{port | service}]/] <protocol> ::= inet | inet4 | inet6 | wnet | xnet <sec_file> ::= FILE 'filepath' [LENGTH [=] num [PAGE[S]] [STARTING [AT [PAGE]] pagenum]
Each db_initial_option and db_config_option can occur at most once, except sec_file, which can occur zero or more times. |
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
filespec |
File specification for primary database file |
server_spec |
Remote server specification. Some protocols require specifying a hostname. Optionally includes a port number or service name. Required if the database is created on a remote server. |
filepath |
Full path and file name including its extension. The file name must be specified according to the rules of the platform file system being used. |
db_alias |
Database alias previously created in the |
host |
Host name or IP address of the server where the database is to be created |
port |
The port number where the remote server is listening (parameter RemoteServicePort in |
service |
Service name.
Must match the parameter value of RemoteServiceName in |
username |
Username of the owner of the new database.
The maximum length is 63 characters.
The username can optionally be enclosed in single or double quotes.
When a username is enclosed in double quotes, it is case-sensitive following the rules for quoted identifiers.
When enclosed in single quotes, it behaves as if the value was specified without quotes.
The user must be an administrator or have the |
password |
Password of the user as the database owner.
When using the |
rolename |
The name of the role whose rights should be taken into account when creating a database. The role name can be enclosed in single or double quotes. When the role name is enclosed in double quotes, it is case-sensitive following the rules for quoted identifiers. When enclosed in single quotes, it behaves as if the value was specified without quotes. |
size |
Page size for the database, in bytes. Possible values are 4096, 8192, 16384 and 32768. The default page size is 8192. |
num |
Maximum size of the primary database file, or a secondary file, in pages |
charset |
Specifies the character set of the connection available to a client connecting after the database is successfully created. Single quotes are required. |
default_charset |
Specifies the default character set for string data types |
collation |
Default collation for the default character set |
sec_file |
File specification for a secondary file |
pagenum |
Starting page number for a secondary database file |
diff_file |
File path and name for DIFFERENCE files (.delta files) for backup mode |
The CREATE DATABASE
statement creates a new database.
You can use CREATE DATABASE
or CREATE SCHEMA
.
They are synonymous, but we recommend to always use CREATE DATABASE
as this may change in a future version of Firebird.
A database may consist of one or several files. The first (main) file is called the primary file, subsequent files are called secondary file(s).
Multi-file Databases
Nowadays, multi-file databases are considered an anachronism. It made sense to use multi-file databases on old file systems where the size of any file is limited. For instance, you could not create a file larger than 4 GB on FAT32. |
The primary file specification is the name of the database file and its extension with the full path to it according to the rules of the OS platform file system being used. The database file must not exist at the moment the database is being created. If it does exist, you will get an error message, and the database will not be created.
If the full path to the database is not specified, the database will be created in one of the system directories. The particular directory depends on the operating system. For this reason, unless you have a strong reason to prefer that situation, always specify either the absolute path or an alias, when creating a database.
Using a Database Alias
You can use aliases instead of the full path to the primary database file.
Aliases are defined in the databases.conf
file in the following format:
alias = filepath
Executing a If necessary, you can always fallback to isql to create a database. |
Creating a Database on a Remote Server
If you create a database on a remote server, you need to specify the remote server specification. The remote server specification depends on the protocol being used. If you use the TCP/IP protocol to create a database, the primary file specification should look like this:
host[/{port|service}]:{filepath | db_alias}
If you use the Named Pipes protocol to create a database on a Windows server, the primary file specification should look like this:
\\host\{filepath | db_alias}
Firebird also has a unified URL-like syntax for the remote server specification. In this syntax, the first part specifies the name of the protocol, then a host name or IP address, port number, and path of the primary database file, or an alias.
The following values can be specified as the protocol:
- inet
-
TCP/IP (first tries to connect using the IPv6 protocol, if it fails, then IPv4)
- inet4
-
TCP/IP v4
- inet6
-
TCP/IP v6
- wnet
-
NetBEUI or Named Pipes Protocol
- xnet
-
local protocol (does not include a host, port and service name)
<protocol>://[host[:{port | service}]/]{filepath | db_alias}
Optional Parameters for CREATE DATABASE
USER
andPASSWORD
-
Clauses for specifying the username and the password, respectively, of an existing user in the security database (
security4.fdb
or whatever is configured in the SecurityDatabase configuration). You do not have to specify the username and password if theISC_USER
andISC_PASSWORD
environment variables are set. The user specified in the process of creating the database will be its owner. This will be important when considering database and object privileges. ROLE
-
The
ROLE
clause specifies the name of the role (usuallyRDB$ADMIN
), which will be taken into account when creating the database. The role must be assigned to the user in the applicable security database. PAGE_SIZE
-
Clause for specifying the database page size. This size will be set for the primary file and all secondary files of the database. If you specify the database page size less than 4,096, it will be automatically rounded up to 4,096. Other values not equal to either 4,096, 8,192, 16,384 or 32,768 will be changed to the closest smaller supported value. If the database page size is not specified, it is set to the default value of 8,192.
Bigger Isn’t Always Better.Larger page sizes can fit more records on a single page, have wider indexes, and more indexes, but they will also waste more space for blobs (compare the wasted space of a 3KB blob on page size 4096 with one on 32768: +/- 1KB vs +/- 29KB), and increase memory consumption of the page cache.
LENGTH
-
Clause specifying the maximum size of the primary or secondary database file, in pages. When a database is created, its primary and secondary files will occupy the minimum number of pages necessary to store the system data, regardless of the value specified in the
LENGTH
clause. TheLENGTH
value does not affect the size of the only (or last, in a multi-file database) file. The file will keep increasing its size automatically when necessary. SET NAMES
-
Clause specifying the character set of the connection available after the database is successfully created. The character set
NONE
is used by default. Notice that the character set should be enclosed in a pair of apostrophes (single quotes). DEFAULT CHARACTER SET
-
Clause specifying the default character set for creating data structures of string data types. Character sets are used for
CHAR
,VARCHAR
andBLOB SUB_TYPE TEXT
data types. The character setNONE
is used by default. It is also possible to specify the defaultCOLLATION
for the default character set, making that collation sequence the default for the default character set. The default will be used for the entire database except where an alternative character set, with or without a specified collation, is used explicitly for a field, domain, variable, cast expression, etc. STARTING AT
-
Clause that specifies the database page number at which the next secondary database file should start. When the previous file is completely filled with data according to the specified page number, the system will start adding new data to the next database file.
DIFFERENCE FILE
-
Clause specifying the path and name for the file delta that stores any mutations to the database file after it has been switched to the “copy-safe” mode by the
ALTER DATABASE BEGIN BACKUP
statement. For the detailed description of this clause, seeALTER DATABASE
.
Specifying the Database Dialect
Databases are created in Dialect 3 by default.
For the database to be created in SQL dialect 1, you will need to execute the statement SET SQL DIALECT 1
from script or the client application, e.g. in isql, before the CREATE DATABASE
statement.
Who Can Create a Database
The CREATE DATABASE
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE DATABASE
privilege
Examples Using CREATE DATABASE
-
Creating a database in Windows, located on disk D with a page size of 4,096. The owner of the database will be the user wizard. The database will be in Dialect , and will use
WIN1251
as its default character set.SET SQL DIALECT 1; CREATE DATABASE 'D:\test.fdb' USER 'wizard' PASSWORD 'player' PAGE_SIZE = 4096 DEFAULT CHARACTER SET WIN1251;
-
Creating a database in the Linux operating system with a page size of 8,192 (default). The owner of the database will be the user wizard. The database will be in Dialect 3 and will use
UTF8
as its default character set, withUNICODE_CI_AI
as the default collation.CREATE DATABASE '/home/firebird/test.fdb' USER 'wizard' PASSWORD 'player' DEFAULT CHARACTER SET UTF8 COLLATION UNICODE_CI_AI;
-
Creating a database on the remote server “baseserver” with the path specified in the alias “test” that has been defined previously in the file
databases.conf
. The TCP/IP protocol is used. The owner of the database will be the user wizard. The database will be in Dialect 3 and will useUTF8
as its default character set.CREATE DATABASE 'baseserver:test' USER 'wizard' PASSWORD 'player' DEFAULT CHARACTER SET UTF8;
-
Creating a database in Dialect 3 with
UTF8
as its default character set. The primary file will contain up to 10,000 pages with a page size of 8,192. As soon as the primary file has reached the maximum number of pages, Firebird will start allocating pages to the secondary filetest.fdb2
. If that file is filled up to its maximum as well,test.fdb3
becomes the recipient of all new page allocations. As the last file, it has no page limit imposed on it by Firebird. New allocations will continue for as long as the file system allows it or until the storage device runs out of free space. If aLENGTH
parameter were supplied for this last file, it would be ignored.SET SQL DIALECT 3; CREATE DATABASE 'baseserver:D:\test.fdb' USER 'wizard' PASSWORD 'player' PAGE_SIZE = 8192 DEFAULT CHARACTER SET UTF8 FILE 'D:\test.fdb2' STARTING AT PAGE 10001 FILE 'D:\test.fdb3' STARTING AT PAGE 20001;
-
Creating a database in Dialect 3 with
UTF8
as its default character set. The primary file will contain up to 10,000 pages with a page size of 8,192. As far as file size and the use of secondary files are concerned, this database will behave exactly like the one in the previous example.SET SQL DIALECT 3; CREATE DATABASE 'baseserver:D:\test.fdb' USER 'wizard' PASSWORD 'player' PAGE_SIZE = 8192 LENGTH 10000 PAGES DEFAULT CHARACTER SET UTF8 FILE 'D:\test.fdb2' FILE 'D:\test.fdb3' STARTING AT PAGE 20001;
5.1.2. ALTER DATABASE
Altering the file organisation of a database, toggling its “copy-safe” state, managing encryption, and other database-wide configuration
DSQL, ESQL — limited feature set
ALTER {DATABASE | SCHEMA} <alter_db_option> [<alter_db_option> ...] <alter_db_option> :== <add_sec_clause> | {ADD DIFFERENCE FILE 'diff_file' | DROP DIFFERENCE FILE} | {BEGIN | END} BACKUP | SET DEFAULT CHARACTER SET charset | {ENCRYPT WITH plugin_name [KEY key_name] | DECRYPT} | SET LINGER TO linger_duration | DROP LINGER | SET DEFAULT SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER} | {ENABLE | DISABLE} PUBLICATION | INCLUDE <pub_table_filter> TO PUBLICATION | EXCLUDE <pub_table_filter> FROM PUBLICATION <add_sec_clause> ::= ADD <sec_file> [<sec_file> ...] <sec_file> ::= FILE 'filepath' [STARTING [AT [PAGE]] pagenum] [LENGTH [=] num [PAGE[S]] <pub_table_filter> ::= ALL | TABLE table_name [, table_name ...]
Multiple files can be added in one ADD clause:
Multiple occurrences of add_sec_clause ( |
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
add_sec_clause |
Adding a secondary database file |
sec_file |
File specification for secondary file |
filepath |
Full path and file name of the delta file or secondary database file |
pagenum |
Page number from which the secondary database file is to start |
num |
Maximum size of the secondary file in pages |
diff_file |
File path and name of the .delta file (difference file) |
charset |
New default character set of the database |
linger_duration |
Duration of linger delay in seconds; must be greater than or equal to 0 (zero) |
plugin_name |
The name of the encryption plugin |
key_name |
The name of the encryption key |
pub_table_filter |
Filter of tables to include to or exclude from publication |
table_name |
Name (identifier) of a table |
The ALTER DATABASE
statement can:
-
add secondary files to a database
-
switch a single-file database into and out of the “copy-safe” mode (DSQL only)
-
set or unset the path and name of the delta file for physical backups (DSQL only)
|
Who Can Alter the Database
The ALTER DATABASE
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
ALTER DATABASE
privilege
Parameters for ALTER DATABASE
ADD (FILE)
-
Adds secondary files to the database. It is necessary to specify the full path to the file and the name of the secondary file. The description for the secondary file is similar to the one given for the
CREATE DATABASE
statement. ADD DIFFERENCE FILE
-
Specifies the path and name of the delta file that stores any mutations to the database whenever it is switched to the “copy-safe” mode. This clause does not actually add any file. It just overrides the default name and path of the .delta file. To change the existing settings, you should delete the previously specified description of the .delta file using the
DROP DIFFERENCE FILE
clause before specifying the new description of the delta file. If the path and name of the .delta file are not overridden, the file will have the same path and name as the database, but with the.delta
file extension.If only a file name is specified, the .delta file will be created in the current directory of the server. On Windows, this will be the system directory — a very unwise location to store volatile user files and contrary to Windows file system rules.
DROP DIFFERENCE FILE
-
Deletes the description (path and name) of the .delta file specified previously in the
ADD DIFFERENCE FILE
clause. The file is not actually deleted.DROP DIFFERENCE FILE
deletes the path and name of the .delta file from the database header. Next time the database is switched to the “copy-safe” mode, the default values will be used (i.e. the same path and name as those of the database, but with the .delta extension). BEGIN BACKUP
-
Switches the database to the “copy-safe” mode.
ALTER DATABASE
with this clause freezes the main database file, making it possible to back it up safely using file system tools, even if users are connected and performing operations with data. Until the backup state of the database is reverted to NORMAL, all changes made to the database will be written to the .delta (difference) file.Despite its syntax, a statement with the
BEGIN BACKUP
clause does not start a backup process but just creates the conditions for doing a task that requires the database file to be read-only temporarily. END BACKUP
-
Switches the database from the “copy-safe” mode to the normal mode. A statement with this clause merges the .delta file with the main database file and restores the normal operation of the database. Once the
END BACKUP
process starts, the conditions no longer exist for creating safe backups by means of file system tools.Use of
BEGIN BACKUP
andEND BACKUP
and copying the database files with filesystem tools, is not safe with multi-file databases! Use this method only on single-file databases.Making a safe backup with the gbak utility remains possible at all times, although it is not recommended running gbak while the database is in LOCKED or MERGE state.
SET DEFAULT CHARACTER SET
-
Changes the default character set of the database. This change does not affect existing data or columns. The new default character set will only be used in subsequent DDL commands.
ENCRYPT WITH
-
See Encrypting a Database in the Security chapter.
DECRYPT
-
See Decrypting a Database in the Security chapter.
SET LINGER TO
-
Sets the linger-delay. The linger-delay applies only to Firebird SuperServer, and is the number of seconds the server keeps a database file (and its caches) open after the last connection to that database was closed. This can help to improve performance at low cost, when the database is opened and closed frequently, by keeping resources “warm” for the next connection.
This mode can be useful for web applications - without a connection pool - where the connection to the database usually “lives” for a very short time.
The
SET LINGER TO
andDROP LINGER
clauses can be combined in a single statement, but the last clause “wins”. For example,ALTER DATABASE SET LINGER TO 5 DROP LINGER
will set the linger-delay to 0 (no linger), whileALTER DATABASE DROP LINGER SET LINGER to 5
will set the linger-delay to 5 seconds. DROP LINGER
-
Drops the linger-delay (sets it to zero). Using
DROP LINGER
is equivalent to usingSET LINGER TO 0
.Dropping
LINGER
is not an ideal solution for the occasional need to turn it off for some once-only condition where the server needs a forced shutdown. The gfix utility now has the-NoLinger
switch, which will close the specified database immediately after the last attachment is gone, regardless of theLINGER
setting in the database. TheLINGER
setting is retained and works normally the next time.The same one-off override is also available through the Services API, using the tag
isc_spb_prp_nolinger
, e.g. (in one line):fbsvcmgr host:service_mgr user sysdba password xxx action_properties dbname employee prp_nolinger
The
DROP LINGER
andSET LINGER TO
clauses can be combined in a single statement, but the last clause “wins”. SET DEFAULT SQL SECURITY
-
Specifies the default
SQL SECURITY
option to apply at runtime for objects without the SQL Security property set. See also SQL Security in chapter Security. ENABLE PUBLICATION
-
Enables publication of this database for replication. Replication begins (or continues) with the next transaction started after this transaction commits.
DISABLE PUBLICATION
-
Enables publication of this database for replication. Replication is disabled immediately after commit.
EXCLUDE … FROM PUBLICATION
-
Excludes tables from publication. If
INCLUDE ALL TO PUBLICATION
clause is used, then all tables created afterwards will also be replicated, unless overridden explicitly in theCREATE TABLE
statement. INCLUDE … TO PUBLICATION
-
Includes tables to publication. If
INCLUDE ALL TO PUBLICATION
clause is used, then all tables created afterwards will also be replicated, unless overridden explicitly in theCREATE TABLE
statement.
Replication
|
Examples of ALTER DATABASE
Usage
-
Adding a secondary file to the database. As soon as 30000 pages are filled in the previous primary or secondary file, the Firebird engine will start adding data to the secondary file
test4.fdb
.ALTER DATABASE ADD FILE 'D:\test4.fdb' STARTING AT PAGE 30001;
-
Specifying the path and name of the delta file:
ALTER DATABASE ADD DIFFERENCE FILE 'D:\test.diff';
-
Deleting the description of the delta file:
ALTER DATABASE DROP DIFFERENCE FILE;
-
Switching the database to the “copy-safe” mode:
ALTER DATABASE BEGIN BACKUP;
-
Switching the database back from the “copy-safe” mode to the normal operation mode:
ALTER DATABASE END BACKUP;
-
Changing the default character set for a database to
WIN1251
ALTER DATABASE SET DEFAULT CHARACTER SET WIN1252;
-
Setting a linger-delay of 30 seconds
ALTER DATABASE SET LINGER TO 30;
-
Encrypting the database with a plugin called
DbCrypt
ALTER DATABASE ENCRYPT WITH DbCrypt;
-
Decrypting the database
ALTER DATABASE DECRYPT;
5.1.3. DROP DATABASE
Deleting the database to which you are currently connected
DSQL, ESQL
DROP DATABASE
The DROP DATABASE
statement deletes the current database.
Before deleting a database, you have to connect to it.
The statement deletes the primary file, all secondary files and all shadow files.
Contrary to |
Who Can Drop a Database
The DROP DATABASE
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
DROP DATABASE
privilege
5.2. SHADOW
A shadow is an exact, page-by-page copy of a database. Once a shadow is created, all changes made in the database are immediately reflected in the shadow. If the primary database file becomes unavailable for some reason, the DBMS will switch to the shadow.
This section describes how to create and delete shadow files.
5.2.1. CREATE SHADOW
Creating a shadow for the current database
DSQL, ESQL
CREATE SHADOW <sh_num> [{AUTO | MANUAL}] [CONDITIONAL] 'filepath' [LENGTH [=] num [PAGE[S]]] [<secondary_file> ...] <secondary_file> ::= FILE 'filepath' [STARTING [AT [PAGE]] pagenum] [LENGTH [=] num [PAGE[S]]]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
sh_num |
Shadow number — a positive number identifying the shadow set |
filepath |
The name of the shadow file and the path to it, in accord with the rules of the operating system |
num |
Maximum shadow size, in pages |
secondary_file |
Secondary file specification |
page_num |
The number of the page at which the secondary shadow file should start |
The CREATE SHADOW
statement creates a new shadow.
The shadow starts duplicating the database right at the moment it is created.
It is not possible for a user to connect to a shadow.
Like a database, a shadow may be multi-file. The number and size of a shadow’s files are not related to the number and size of the files of database it is shadowing.
The page size for shadow files is set to be equal to the database page size and cannot be changed.
If a calamity occurs involving the original database, the system converts the shadow to a copy of the database and switches to it.
The shadow is then unavailable.
What happens next depends on the MODE
option.
AUTO | MANUAL
Modes
When a shadow is converted to a database, it becomes unavailable. A shadow might alternatively become unavailable because someone accidentally deletes its file, or the disk space where the shadow files are stored is exhausted or is itself damaged.
-
If the AUTO mode is selected (the default value), shadowing ceases automatically, all references to it are deleted from the database header, and the database continues functioning normally.
If the
CONDITIONAL
option was set, the system will attempt to create a new shadow to replace the lost one. It does not always succeed, however, and a new one may need to be created manually. -
If the MANUAL mode attribute is set when the shadow becomes unavailable, all attempts to connect to the database and to query it will produce error messages. The database will remain inaccessible until either the shadow again becomes available, or the database administrator deletes it using the
DROP SHADOW
statement.MANUAL
should be selected if continuous shadowing is more important than uninterrupted operation of the database.
Options for CREATE SHADOW
LENGTH
-
Specifies the maximum size of the primary or secondary shadow file in pages. The
LENGTH
value does not affect the size of the only shadow file, nor the last if it is a set. The last (or only) file will keep automatically growing as long as it is necessary. STARTING AT
-
Specifies the shadow page number at which the next shadow file should start. The system will start adding new data to the next shadow file when the previous file is filled with data up to the specified page number.
You can verify the sizes, names and location of the shadow files by connecting to the database using isql and running the command |
Who Can Create a Shadow
The CREATE SHADOW
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
ALTER DATABASE
privilege
5.2.2. DROP SHADOW
Deleting a shadow from the current database
DSQL, ESQL
DROP SHADOW sh_num [{DELETE | PRESERVE} FILE]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
sh_num |
Shadow number — a positive number identifying the shadow set |
The DROP SHADOW
statement deletes the specified shadow for the current database.
When a shadow is dropped, all files related to it are deleted and shadowing to the specified sh_num ceases.
The optional DELETE FILE
clause makes this behaviour explicit.
On the contrary, the PRESERVE FILE
clause will remove the shadow from the database, but the file itself will not be deleted.
5.3. DOMAIN
DOMAIN
is one of the object types in a relational database.
A domain is created as a specific data type with some attributes attached to it.
Once it has been defined in the database, it can be reused repeatedly to define table columns, PSQL arguments and PSQL local variables.
Those objects inherit all of the attributes of the domain.
Some attributes can be overridden when the new object is defined, if required.
This section describes the syntax of statements used to create, modify and delete domains. A detailed description of domains and their usage can be found in Custom Data Types — Domains.
5.3.1. CREATE DOMAIN
Creating a new domain
DSQL, ESQL
CREATE DOMAIN name [AS] <datatype> [DEFAULT {<literal> | NULL | <context_var>}] [NOT NULL] [CHECK (<dom_condition>)] [COLLATE collation_name] <datatype> ::= <scalar_datatype> | <blob_datatype> | <array_datatype> <scalar_datatype> ::= !! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !! <blob_datatype> ::= !! See BLOB Data Types Syntax !! <array_datatype> ::= !! See Array Data Types Syntax !! <dom_condition> ::= <val> <operator> <val> | <val> [NOT] BETWEEN <val> AND <val> | <val> [NOT] IN ({<val> [, <val> ...] | <select_list>}) | <val> IS [NOT] NULL | <val> IS [NOT] DISTINCT FROM <val> | <val> [NOT] CONTAINING <val> | <val> [NOT] STARTING [WITH] <val> | <val> [NOT] LIKE <val> [ESCAPE <val>] | <val> [NOT] SIMILAR TO <val> [ESCAPE <val>] | <val> <operator> {ALL | SOME | ANY} (<select_list>) | [NOT] EXISTS (<select_expr>) | [NOT] SINGULAR (<select_expr>) | (<dom_condition>) | NOT <dom_condition> | <dom_condition> OR <dom_condition> | <dom_condition> AND <dom_condition> <operator> ::= <> | != | ^= | ~= | = | < | > | <= | >= | !< | ^< | ~< | !> | ^> | ~> <val> ::= VALUE | <literal> | <context_var> | <expression> | NULL | NEXT VALUE FOR genname | GEN_ID(genname, <val>) | CAST(<val> AS <cast_type>) | (<select_one>) | func([<val> [, <val> ...]]) <cast_type> ::= <domain_or_non_array_type> | <array_datatype> <domain_or_non_array_type> ::= !! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !!
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
name |
Domain name. The maximum length is 63 characters |
datatype |
SQL data type |
literal |
A literal value that is compatible with datatype |
context_var |
Any context variable whose type is compatible with datatype |
dom_condition |
Domain condition |
collation_name |
Name of a collation sequence that is valid for charset_name, if it is supplied with datatype or, otherwise, is valid for the default character set of the database |
select_one |
A scalar |
select_list |
A |
select_expr |
A |
expression |
An expression resolving to a value that is compatible with datatype |
genname |
Sequence (generator) name |
func |
Internal function or UDF |
The CREATE DOMAIN
statement creates a new domain.
Any SQL data type can be specified as the domain type.
Type-specific Details
- Array Types
-
-
If the domain is to be an array, the base type can be any SQL data type except
BLOB
and array. -
The dimensions of the array are specified between square brackets. (In the Syntax block, these brackets appear in quotes to distinguish them from the square brackets that identify optional syntax elements.)
-
For each array dimension, one or two integer numbers define the lower and upper boundaries of its index range:
-
By default, arrays are 1-based. The lower boundary is implicit and only the upper boundary need be specified. A single number smaller than 1 defines the range num..1 and a number greater than 1 defines the range 1..num.
-
Two numbers separated by a colon (‘
:
’) and optional whitespace, the second greater than the first, can be used to define the range explicitly. One or both boundaries can be less than zero, as long as the upper boundary is greater than the lower.
-
-
When the array has multiple dimensions, the range definitions for each dimension must be separated by commas and optional whitespace.
-
Subscripts are validated only if an array actually exists. It means that no error messages regarding invalid subscripts will be returned if selecting a specific element returns nothing or if an array field is
NULL
.
-
- String Types
-
You can use the
CHARACTER SET
clause to specify the character set for theCHAR
,VARCHAR
andBLOB
(SUB_TYPE TEXT
) types. If the character set is not specified, the character set specified asDEFAULT CHARACTER SET
of the database will be used. If no character set was specified then, the character setNONE
is applied by default when you create a character domain.With character set
NONE
, character data are stored and retrieved the way they were submitted. Data in any encoding can be added to a column based on such a domain, but it is impossible to add this data to a column with a different encoding. Because no transliteration is performed between the source and destination encodings, errors may result. DEFAULT
Clause-
The optional
DEFAULT
clause allows you to specify a default value for the domain. This value will be added to the table column that inherits this domain when theINSERT
statement is executed, if no value is specified for it in the DML statement. Local variables and arguments in PSQL modules that reference this domain will be initialized with the default value. For the default value, use a literal of a compatible type or a context variable of a compatible type. NOT NULL
Constraint-
Columns and variables based on a domain with the
NOT NULL
constraint will be prevented from being written asNULL
, i.e., a value is required.When creating a domain, take care to avoid specifying limitations that would contradict one another. For instance,
NOT NULL
andDEFAULT NULL
are contradictory. CHECK
Constraint(s)-
The optional
CHECK
clause specifies constraints for the domain. A domain constraint specifies conditions that must be satisfied by the values of table columns or variables that inherit from the domain. A condition must be enclosed in parentheses. A condition is a logical expression (also called a predicate) that can return the Boolean resultsTRUE
,FALSE
andUNKNOWN
. A condition is considered satisfied if the predicate returns the valueTRUE
or “unknown value” (equivalent toNULL
). If the predicate returnsFALSE
, the condition for acceptance is not met. VALUE
Keyword-
The keyword
VALUE
in a domain constraint substitutes for the table column that is based on this domain or for a variable in a PSQL module. It contains the value assigned to the variable or the table column.VALUE
can be used anywhere in theCHECK
constraint, though it is usually used in the left part of the condition. COLLATE
-
The optional
COLLATE
clause allows you to specify the collation sequence if the domain is based on one of the string data types, includingBLOB
s with text subtypes. If no collation sequence is specified, the collation sequence will be the one that is default for the specified character set at the time the domain is created.
Who Can Create a Domain
The CREATE DOMAIN
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE DOMAIN
privilege
CREATE DOMAIN
Examples
-
Creating a domain that can take values greater than 1,000, with a default value of 10,000.
CREATE DOMAIN CUSTNO AS INTEGER DEFAULT 10000 CHECK (VALUE > 1000);
-
Creating a domain that can take the values 'Yes' and 'No' in the default character set specified during the creation of the database.
CREATE DOMAIN D_BOOLEAN AS CHAR(3) CHECK (VALUE IN ('Yes', 'No'));
-
Creating a domain with the
UTF8
character set and theUNICODE_CI_AI
collation sequence.CREATE DOMAIN FIRSTNAME AS VARCHAR(30) CHARACTER SET UTF8 COLLATE UNICODE_CI_AI;
-
Creating a domain of the
DATE
type that will not accept NULL and uses the current date as the default value.CREATE DOMAIN D_DATE AS DATE DEFAULT CURRENT_DATE NOT NULL;
-
Creating a domain defined as an array of 2 elements of the
NUMERIC(18, 3)
type. The starting array index is 1.CREATE DOMAIN D_POINT AS NUMERIC(18, 3) [2];
Domains defined over an array type may be used only to define table columns. You cannot use array domains to define local variables in PSQL modules.
-
Creating a domain whose elements can be only country codes defined in the
COUNTRY
table.CREATE DOMAIN D_COUNTRYCODE AS CHAR(3) CHECK (EXISTS(SELECT * FROM COUNTRY WHERE COUNTRYCODE = VALUE));
The example is given only to show the possibility of using predicates with queries in the domain test condition. It is not recommended to create this style of domain in practice unless the lookup table contains data that are never deleted.
5.3.2. ALTER DOMAIN
Altering the current attributes of a domain or renaming it
DSQL, ESQL
ALTER DOMAIN domain_name
[TO new_name]
[TYPE <datatype>]
[{SET DEFAULT {<literal> | NULL | <context_var>} | DROP DEFAULT}]
[{SET | DROP} NOT NULL]
[{ADD [CONSTRAINT] CHECK (<dom_condition>) | DROP CONSTRAINT}]
<datatype> ::=
<scalar_datatype> | <blob_datatype>
<scalar_datatype> ::=
!! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !!
<blob_datatype> ::=
!! See BLOB Data Types Syntax !!
!! See also CREATE DOMAIN
Syntax !!
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
new_name |
New name for domain. The maximum length is 63 characters |
literal |
A literal value that is compatible with datatype |
context_var |
Any context variable whose type is compatible with datatype |
The ALTER DOMAIN
statement enables changes to the current attributes of a domain, including its name.
You can make any number of domain alterations in one ALTER DOMAIN
statement.
ALTER DOMAIN
clauses
TO name
-
Use the
TO
clause to rename the domain, as long as there are no dependencies on the domain, i.e. table columns, local variables or procedure arguments referencing it. SET DEFAULT
-
With the
SET DEFAULT
clause you can set a new default value. If the domain already has a default value, there is no need to delete it first — it will be replaced by the new one. DROP DEFAULT
-
Use this clause to delete a previously specified default value and replace it with
NULL
. SET NOT NULL
-
Use this class to add a
NOT NULL
constraint to the domain; columns or parameters of this domain will be prevented from being written asNULL
, i.e., a value is required.Adding a
NOT NULL
constraint to an existing domain will subject all columns using this comain to a full data validation, so ensure that the columns have no nulls before attempting the change. DROP NOT NULL
-
Drop the
NOT NULL
constraint from the domain.An explicit
NOT NULL
constraint on a column that depends on a domain prevails over the domain. In this situation, the modification of the domain to make it nullable does not propagate to the column. ADD CONSTRAINT CHECK
-
Use the
ADD CONSTRAINT CHECK
clause to add aCHECK
constraint to the domain. If the domain already has aCHECK
constraint, it will have to be deleted first, using anALTER DOMAIN
statement that includes aDROP CONSTRAINT
clause. TYPE
-
The
TYPE
clause is used to change the data type of the domain to a different, compatible one. The system will forbid any change to the type that could result in data loss. An example would be if the number of characters in the new type were smaller than in the existing type.
When you alter the attributes of a domain, existing PSQL code may become invalid. For information on how to detect it, read the piece entitled The RDB$VALID_BLR Field in Appendix A. |
What ALTER DOMAIN
Cannot Alter
-
If the domain was declared as an array, it is not possible to change its type or its dimensions; nor can any other type be changed to an array type.
-
There is no way to change the default collation without dropping the domain and recreating it with the desired attributes.
Who Can Alter a Domain
The ALTER DOMAIN
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the domain
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY DOMAIN
privilege
Domain alterations can be prevented by dependencies from objects to which the user does not have sufficient privileges.
ALTER DOMAIN
Examples
-
Changing the data type to
INTEGER
and setting or changing the default value to 2,000:ALTER DOMAIN CUSTNO TYPE INTEGER SET DEFAULT 2000;
-
Renaming a domain.
ALTER DOMAIN D_BOOLEAN TO D_BOOL;
-
Deleting the default value and adding a constraint for the domain:
ALTER DOMAIN D_DATE DROP DEFAULT ADD CONSTRAINT CHECK (VALUE >= date '01.01.2000');
-
Changing the
CHECK
constraint:ALTER DOMAIN D_DATE DROP CONSTRAINT; ALTER DOMAIN D_DATE ADD CONSTRAINT CHECK (VALUE BETWEEN date '01.01.1900' AND date '31.12.2100');
-
Changing the data type to increase the permitted number of characters:
ALTER DOMAIN FIRSTNAME TYPE VARCHAR(50) CHARACTER SET UTF8;
-
Adding a
NOT NULL
constraint:ALTER DOMAIN FIRSTNAME SET NOT NULL;
-
Removing a
NOT NULL
constraint:ALTER DOMAIN FIRSTNAME DROP NOT NULL;
5.3.3. DROP DOMAIN
Deleting an existing domain
DSQL, ESQL
DROP DOMAIN domain_name
The DROP DOMAIN
statement deletes a domain that exists in the database.
It is not possible to delete a domain if it is referenced by any database table columns or used in any PSQL module.
In order to delete a domain that is in use, all columns in all tables that refer to the domain will have to be dropped and all references to the domain will have to be removed from PSQL modules.
Who Can Drop a Domain
The DROP DOMAIN
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the domain
-
Users with the
DROP ANY DOMAIN
privilege
5.4. TABLE
As a relational DBMS, Firebird stores data in tables. A table is a flat, two-dimensional structure containing any number of rows. Table rows are often called records.
All rows in a table have the same structure and consist of columns. Table columns are often called fields. A table must have at least one column. Each column contains a single type of SQL data.
This section describes how to create, alter and delete tables in a database.
5.4.1. CREATE TABLE
creating a new table (relation)
DSQL, ESQL
CREATE [GLOBAL TEMPORARY] TABLE tablename [EXTERNAL [FILE] 'filespec'] (<col_def> [, {<col_def> | <tconstraint>} ...]) [{<table_attrs> | <gtt_table_attrs>}] <col_def> ::= <regular_col_def> | <computed_col_def> | <identity_col_def> <regular_col_def> ::= colname {<datatype> | domainname} [DEFAULT {<literal> | NULL | <context_var>}] [<col_constraint> ...] [COLLATE collation_name] <computed_col_def> ::= colname [{<datatype> | domainname}] {COMPUTED [BY] | GENERATED ALWAYS AS} (<expression>) <identity_col_def> ::= colname {<datatype> | domainname} GENERATED {ALWAYS | BY DEFAULT} AS IDENTITY [(<identity_col_option>...)] [<col_constraint> ...] <identity_col_option> ::= START WITH start_value | INCREMENT [BY] inc_value <datatype> ::= <scalar_datatype> | <blob_datatype> | <array_datatype> <scalar_datatype> ::= !! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !! <blob_datatype> ::= !! See BLOB Data Types Syntax !! <array_datatype> ::= !! See Array Data Types Syntax !! <col_constraint> ::= [CONSTRAINT constr_name] { PRIMARY KEY [<using_index>] | UNIQUE [<using_index>] | REFERENCES other_table [(colname)] [<using_index>] [ON DELETE {NO ACTION | CASCADE | SET DEFAULT | SET NULL}] [ON UPDATE {NO ACTION | CASCADE | SET DEFAULT | SET NULL}] | CHECK (<check_condition>) | NOT NULL } <tconstraint> ::= [CONSTRAINT constr_name] { PRIMARY KEY (<col_list>) [<using_index>] | UNIQUE (<col_list>) [<using_index>] | FOREIGN KEY (<col_list>) REFERENCES other_table [(<col_list>)] [<using_index>] [ON DELETE {NO ACTION | CASCADE | SET DEFAULT | SET NULL}] [ON UPDATE {NO ACTION | CASCADE | SET DEFAULT | SET NULL}] | CHECK (<check_condition>) } <col_list> ::= colname [, colname ...] <using_index> ::= USING [ASC[ENDING] | DESC[ENDING]] INDEX indexname <check_condition> ::= <val> <operator> <val> | <val> [NOT] BETWEEN <val> AND <val> | <val> [NOT] IN (<val> [, <val> ...] | <select_list>) | <val> IS [NOT] NULL | <val> IS [NOT] DISTINCT FROM <val> | <val> [NOT] CONTAINING <val> | <val> [NOT] STARTING [WITH] <val> | <val> [NOT] LIKE <val> [ESCAPE <val>] | <val> [NOT] SIMILAR TO <val> [ESCAPE <val>] | <val> <operator> {ALL | SOME | ANY} (<select_list>) | [NOT] EXISTS (<select_expr>) | [NOT] SINGULAR (<select_expr>) | (<check_condition>) | NOT <check_condition> | <check_condition> OR <check_condition> | <check_condition> AND <check_condition> <operator> ::= <> | != | ^= | ~= | = | < | > | <= | >= | !< | ^< | ~< | !> | ^> | ~> <val> ::= colname ['['array_idx [, array_idx ...]']'] | <literal> | <context_var> | <expression> | NULL | NEXT VALUE FOR genname | GEN_ID(genname, <val>) | CAST(<val> AS <cast_type>) | (<select_one>) | func([<val> [, <val> ...]]) <cast_type> ::= <domain_or_non_array_type> | <array_datatype> <domain_or_non_array_type> ::= !! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !! <table_attrs> ::= <table_attr> [<table_attr> ...] <table_attr> ::= <sql_security> | {ENABLE | DISABLE} PUBLICATION <sql_security> ::= SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER} <gtt_table_attrs> ::= <gtt_table_attr> [gtt_table_attr> ...] <gtt_table_attr> ::= <sql_security> | ON COMMIT {DELETE | PRESERVE} ROWS
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
tablename |
Name (identifier) for the table. The maximum length is 63 characters and must be unique in the database. |
filespec |
File specification (only for external tables). Full file name and path, enclosed in single quotes, correct for the local file system and located on a storage device that is physically connected to Firebird’s host computer. |
colname |
Name (identifier) for a column in the table. The maximum length is 63 characters and must be unique in the table. |
tconstraint |
Table constraint |
table_attrs |
Attributes of a normal table |
gtt_table_attrs |
Attributes of a global temporary table |
datatype |
SQL data type |
domain_name |
Domain name |
start_value |
The initial value of the identity column |
inc_value |
The increment (or step) value of the identity column, default is |
col_constraint |
Column constraint |
constr_name |
The name (identifier) of a constraint. The maximum length is 63 characters. |
other_table |
The name of the table referenced by the foreign key constraint |
other_col |
The name of the column in other_table that is referenced by the foreign key |
literal |
A literal value that is allowed in the given context |
context_var |
Any context variable whose data type is allowed in the given context |
check_condition |
The condition applied to a CHECK constraint, that will resolve as either true, false or |
collation |
Collation |
select_one |
A scalar |
select_list |
A |
select_expr |
A |
expression |
An expression resolving to a value that is allowed in the given context |
genname |
Sequence (generator) name |
func |
Internal function or UDF |
The CREATE TABLE
statement creates a new table.
Any user can create it and its name must be unique among the names of all tables, views and stored procedures in the database.
A table must contain at least one column that is not computed, and the names of columns must be unique in the table.
A column must have either an explicit SQL data type, the name of a domain whose attributes will be copied for the column, or be defined as COMPUTED BY
an expression (a calculated field).
A table may have any number of table constraints, including none.
Character Columns
You can use the CHARACTER SET
clause to specify the character set for the CHAR
, VARCHAR
and BLOB
(text subtype) types.
If the character set is not specified, the default character set of the database - at time of the creation of the column - will be used.
If the database has no default character set, the NONE
character set is applied.
In this case, data is stored and retrieved the way it was submitted.
Data in any encoding can be added to such a column, but it is not possible to add this data to a column with a different encoding.
No transliteration is performed between the source and destination encodings, which may result in errors.
The optional COLLATE
clause allows you to specify the collation sequence for character data types, including BLOB SUB_TYPE TEXT
.
If no collation sequence is specified, the default collation sequence for the specified character set - at time of the creation of the column - is applied.
Setting a DEFAULT
Value
The optional DEFAULT
clause allows you to specify the default value for the table column.
This value will be added to the column when an INSERT
statement is executed if no value was specified for it and that column was omitted from the INSERT
command.
The default value can be a literal of a compatible type, a context variable that is type-compatible with the data type of the column, or NULL
, if the column allows it.
If no default value is explicitly specified, NULL
is implied.
An expression cannot be used as a default value.
Domain-based Columns
To define a column, you can use a previously defined domain.
If the definition of a column is based on a domain, it may contain a new default value, additional CHECK
constraints, and a COLLATE
clause that will override the values specified in the domain definition.
The definition of such a column may contain additional column constraints (for instance, NOT NULL
), if the domain does not have it.
It is not possible to define a domain-based column that is nullable if the domain was defined with the |
Identity Columns (Autoincrement)
Identity columns are defined using the GENERATED {ALWAYS | BY DEFAULT} AS IDENTITY
clause.
The identity column is a column associated with an internal sequence generator.
Its value is set automatically every time it is not specified in the INSERT
statement, or when the column value is specified as DEFAULT
.
-
The data type of an identity column must be an exact number type with zero scale. Allowed types are
SMALLINT
,INTEGER
,BIGINT
,NUMERIC(p[,0])
andDECIMAL(p[,0])
with p <= 18.-
The
INT128
type and numeric types with a precision higher than 18 are not supported.
-
-
An identity column cannot have a
DEFAULT
orCOMPUTED
value. -
An identity column can be altered to become a regular column.
-
A regular column cannot be altered to become an identity column.
-
Identity columns are implicitly
NOT NULL
(non-nullable), and cannot be made nullable. -
Uniqueness is not enforced automatically. A
UNIQUE
orPRIMARY KEY
constraint is required to guarantee uniqueness. -
The use of other methods of generating key values for identity columns, e.g. by trigger-generator code or by allowing users to change or add them, is discouraged to avoid unexpected key violations.
-
The
INCREMENT
value cannot be zero (0
).
GENERATED ALWAYS
An identity column of type GENERATED ALWAYS
will always generate a column value on insert.
Explicitly inserting a value into a column of this type is not allowed, unless either:
-
the specified value is
DEFAULT
; this generates the identity value as normal. -
the
OVERRIDING SYSTEM VALUE
clause is specified in theINSERT
statement; this allows a user value to be inserted.
GENERATED BY DEFAULT
An identity column of type GENERATED BY DEFAULT
will generate a value on insert if no value — other than DEFAULT
— is specified on insert.
When the OVERRIDING USER VALUE
clause is specified in the INSERT
statement, the user-provided value is ignored, and an identity value is generated (as if the column was not included in the insert, or the value DEFAULT
was specified).
START WITH
Option
The optional START WITH
clause allows you to specify an initial value other than 1.
Previous versions of Firebird instead used the specified value as the initial value of the internal generator backing the identity column, so the first value was 1 higher than the This has been fixed in Firebird 4.0 and now the first value generated is the |
INCREMENT
Option
The optional INCREMENT
clause allows you to specify another non-zero step value than 1.
The SQL standard specifies that if |
Calculated Fields
Calculated fields can be defined with the COMPUTED [BY]
or GENERATED ALWAYS AS
clause (according to the SQL:2003 standard).
They mean the same.
Describing the data type is not required (but possible) for calculated fields, as the DBMS calculates and stores the appropriate type as a result of the expression analysis.
Appropriate operations for the data types included in an expression must be specified precisely.
If the data type is explicitly specified for a calculated field, the calculation result is converted to the specified type. This means, for instance, that the result of a numeric expression could be rendered as a string.
In a query that selects a COMPUTED BY
column, the expression is evaluated for each row of the selected data.
Instead of a computed column, in some cases it makes sense to use a regular column whose value is evaluated in triggers for adding and updating data. It may reduce the performance of inserting/updating records, but it will increase the performance of data selection. |
Defining an Array Column
-
If the column is to be an array, the base type can be any SQL data type except
BLOB
and array. -
The dimensions of the array are specified between square brackets. (In the Syntax block these brackets appear in quotes to distinguish them from the square brackets that identify optional syntax elements.)
-
For each array dimension, one or two integer numbers define the lower and upper boundaries of its index range:
-
By default, arrays are 1-based. The lower boundary is implicit and only the upper boundary need be specified. A single number smaller than 1 defines the range num..1 and a number greater than 1 defines the range 1..num.
-
Two numbers separated by a colon (‘
:
’) and optional whitespace, the second greater than the first, can be used to define the range explicitly. One or both boundaries can be less than zero, as long as the upper boundary is greater than the lower.
-
-
When the array has multiple dimensions, the range definitions for each dimension must be separated by commas and optional whitespace.
-
Subscripts are validated only if an array actually exists. It means that no error messages regarding invalid subscripts will be returned if selecting a specific element returns nothing or if an array field is
NULL
.
Constraints
Five types of constraints can be specified. They are:
-
Primary key (
PRIMARY KEY
) -
Unique key (
UNIQUE
) -
Foreign key (
REFERENCES
) -
CHECK
constraint (CHECK
) -
NOT NULL
constraint (NOT NULL
)
Constraints can be specified at column level (“column constraints”) or at table level (“table constraints”).
Table-level constraints are required when keys (unique constraint, Primary Key, Foreign Key) consist of multiple columns and when a CHECK
constraint involves other columns in the row besides the column being defined.
The NOT NULL
constraint can only be specified as a column constraint.
Syntax for some types of constraint may differ slightly according to whether the constraint is defined at the column or table level.
-
A column-level constraint is specified during a column definition, after all column attributes except
COLLATION
are specified, and can involve only the column specified in that definition -
A table-level constraints can only be specified after the definitions of the columns used in the constraint.
-
Table-level constraints are a more flexible way to set constraints, since they can cater for constraints involving multiple columns
-
You can mix column-level and table-level constraints in the same
CREATE TABLE
statement
The system automatically creates the corresponding index for a primary key (PRIMARY KEY
), a unique key (UNIQUE
) and a foreign key (REFERENCES
for a column-level constraint, FOREIGN KEY REFERENCES
for one at the table level).
Names for Constraints and Their Indexes
Column-level constraints and their indexes are named automatically:
-
The constraint name has the form
INTEG_n
, where n represents one or more digits -
The index name has the form
RDB$PRIMARYn
(for a primary key index),RDB$FOREIGNn
(for a foreign key index) orRDB$n
(for a unique key index). Again, n represents one or more digits.
Automatic naming of table-level constraints and their indexes follows the same pattern, unless the names are supplied explicitly.
A constraint can be named explicitly if the CONSTRAINT
clause is used for its definition.
While the CONSTRAINT
clause is optional for defining column-level constraints, it is mandatory for table-level constraints.
By default, the constraint index will have the same name as the constraint.
If a different name is wanted for the constraint index, a USING
clause can be included.
PRIMARY KEY
The PRIMARY KEY
constraint is built on one or more key columns, where each column has the NOT NULL
constraint specified.
The values across the key columns in any row must be unique.
A table can have only one primary key.
-
A single-column Primary Key can be defined as a column level or a table-level constraint
-
A multi-column Primary Key must be specified as a table-level constraint
The UNIQUE
Constraint
The UNIQUE
constraint defines the requirement of content uniqueness for the values in a key throughout the table.
A table can contain any number of unique key constraints.
As with the Primary Key, the Unique constraint can be multi-column. If so, it must be specified as a table-level constraint.
NULL
in Unique KeysFirebird’s SQL-99-compliant rules for UNIQUE
constraints allow one or more NULL
s in a column with a UNIQUE
constraint.
That makes it possible to define a UNIQUE
constraint on a column that does not have the NOT NULL
constraint.
For UNIQUE
keys that span multiple columns, the logic is a little complicated:
-
Multiple rows having null in all the columns of the key are allowed
-
Multiple rows having keys with different combinations of nulls and non-null values are allowed
-
Multiple rows having the same key columns null and the rest filled with non-null values are allowed, provided the values differ in at least one column
-
Multiple rows having the same key columns null and the rest filled with non-null values that are the same in every column will violate the constraint
The rules for uniqueness can be summarised thus:
In principle, all nulls are considered distinct.
However, if two rows have exactly the same key columns filled with non-null values, the NULL
columns are ignored and the uniqueness is determined on the non-null columns as though they constituted the entire key.
RECREATE TABLE t( x int, y int, z int, unique(x,y,z));
INSERT INTO t values( NULL, 1, 1 );
INSERT INTO t values( NULL, NULL, 1 );
INSERT INTO t values( NULL, NULL, NULL );
INSERT INTO t values( NULL, NULL, NULL ); -- Permitted
INSERT INTO t values( NULL, NULL, 1 ); -- Not permitted
FOREIGN KEY
A Foreign Key ensures that the participating column(s) can contain only values that also exist in the referenced column(s) in the master table.
These referenced columns are often called target columns.
They must be the primary key or a unique key in the target table.
They need not have a NOT NULL
constraint defined on them although, if they are the primary key, they will, of course, have that constraint.
The foreign key columns in the referencing table itself do not require a NOT NULL
constraint.
A single-column Foreign Key can be defined in the column declaration, using the keyword REFERENCES
:
... ,
ARTIFACT_ID INTEGER REFERENCES COLLECTION (ARTIFACT_ID),
The column ARTIFACT_ID
in the example references a column of the same name in the table COLLECTIONS
.
Both single-column and multi-column foreign keys can be defined at the table level. For a multi-column Foreign Key, the table-level declaration is the only option. This method also enables the provision of an optional name for the constraint:
...
CONSTRAINT FK_ARTSOURCE FOREIGN KEY(DEALER_ID, COUNTRY)
REFERENCES DEALER (DEALER_ID, COUNTRY),
Notice that the column names in the referenced (“master”) table may differ from those in the Foreign Key.
If no target columns are specified, the Foreign Key automatically references the target table’s Primary Key. |
With the sub-clauses ON UPDATE
and ON DELETE
it is possible to specify an action to be taken on the affected foreign key column(s) when referenced values in the master table are changed:
NO ACTION
-
(the default) - Nothing is done
CASCADE
-
The change in the master table is propagated to the corresponding row(s) in the child table. If a key value changes, the corresponding key in the child records changes to the new value; if the master row is deleted, the child records are deleted.
SET DEFAULT
-
The Foreign Key columns in the affected rows will be set to their default values as they were when the foreign key constraint was defined.
SET NULL
-
The Foreign Key columns in the affected rows will be set to
NULL
.
The specified action, or the default NO ACTION
, could cause a Foreign Key column to become invalid.
For example, it could get a value that is not present in the master table, or it could become NULL
while the column has a NOT NULL
constraint.
Such conditions will cause the operation on the master table to fail with an error message.
...
CONSTRAINT FK_ORDERS_CUST
FOREIGN KEY (CUSTOMER) REFERENCES CUSTOMERS (ID)
ON UPDATE CASCADE ON DELETE SET NULL
CHECK
Constraint
The CHECK
constraint defines the condition the values inserted in this column must satisfy.
A condition is a logical expression (also called a predicate) that can return the TRUE, FALSE and UNKNOWN values.
A condition is considered satisfied if the predicate returns TRUE or value UNKNOWN (equivalent to NULL
).
If the predicate returns FALSE, the value will not be accepted.
This condition is used for inserting a new row into the table (the INSERT
statement) and for updating the existing value of the table column (the UPDATE
statement) and also for statements where one of these actions may take place (UPDATE OR INSERT, MERGE).
A |
CHECK
constraints — whether defined at table level or column level — refer to table columns by their names.
The use of the keyword VALUE
as a placeholder — as in domain CHECK
constraints — is not valid in the context of defining column constraints.
with two column-level constraints and one at table-level:
CREATE TABLE PLACES (
...
LAT DECIMAL(9, 6) CHECK (ABS(LAT) <= 90),
LON DECIMAL(9, 6) CHECK (ABS(LON) <= 180),
...
CONSTRAINT CHK_POLES CHECK (ABS(LAT) < 90 OR LON = 0)
);
SQL SECURITY
Clause
The SQL SECURITY
clause specifies the security context for executing functions referenced in calculated columns, and check constraints, and the default context used for triggers fired for this table.
When SQL Security is not specified, the default value of the database is applied at runtime.
See also SQL Security in chapter Security.
Replication Management
When the database has been configured using ALTER DATABASE INCLUDE ALL TO PUBLICATION
, new tables will automatically be added for publication, unless overridden using the DISABLE PUBLICATION
clause.
If the database has not been configured for INCLUDE ALL
(or has later been reconfigured using ALTER DATABASE EXCLUDE ALL FROM PUBLICATION
), new tables will not automatically be added for publication.
To include tables for publication, the ENABLE PUBLICATION
clause must be used.
Who Can Create a Table
The CREATE TABLE
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE TABLE
privilege
The user executing the CREATE TABLE
statement becomes the owner of the table.
CREATE TABLE
Examples
-
Creating the
COUNTRY
table with the primary key specified as a column constraint.CREATE TABLE COUNTRY ( COUNTRY COUNTRYNAME NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY, CURRENCY VARCHAR(10) NOT NULL );
-
Creating the
STOCK
table with the named primary key specified at the column level and the named unique key specified at the table level.CREATE TABLE STOCK ( MODEL SMALLINT NOT NULL CONSTRAINT PK_STOCK PRIMARY KEY, MODELNAME CHAR(10) NOT NULL, ITEMID INTEGER NOT NULL, CONSTRAINT MOD_UNIQUE UNIQUE (MODELNAME, ITEMID) );
-
Creating the
JOB
table with a primary key constraint spanning two columns, a foreign key constraint for theCOUNTRY
table and a table-levelCHECK
constraint. The table also contains an array of 5 elements.CREATE TABLE JOB ( JOB_CODE JOBCODE NOT NULL, JOB_GRADE JOBGRADE NOT NULL, JOB_COUNTRY COUNTRYNAME, JOB_TITLE VARCHAR(25) NOT NULL, MIN_SALARY NUMERIC(18, 2) DEFAULT 0 NOT NULL, MAX_SALARY NUMERIC(18, 2) NOT NULL, JOB_REQUIREMENT BLOB SUB_TYPE 1, LANGUAGE_REQ VARCHAR(15) [1:5], PRIMARY KEY (JOB_CODE, JOB_GRADE), FOREIGN KEY (JOB_COUNTRY) REFERENCES COUNTRY (COUNTRY) ON UPDATE CASCADE ON DELETE SET NULL, CONSTRAINT CHK_SALARY CHECK (MIN_SALARY < MAX_SALARY) );
-
Creating the
PROJECT
table with primary, foreign and unique key constraints with custom index names specified with theUSING
clause.CREATE TABLE PROJECT ( PROJ_ID PROJNO NOT NULL, PROJ_NAME VARCHAR(20) NOT NULL UNIQUE USING DESC INDEX IDX_PROJNAME, PROJ_DESC BLOB SUB_TYPE 1, TEAM_LEADER EMPNO, PRODUCT PRODTYPE, CONSTRAINT PK_PROJECT PRIMARY KEY (PROJ_ID) USING INDEX IDX_PROJ_ID, FOREIGN KEY (TEAM_LEADER) REFERENCES EMPLOYEE (EMP_NO) USING INDEX IDX_LEADER );
-
Creating a table with an identity column
create table objects ( id integer generated by default as identity primary key, name varchar(15) ); insert into objects (name) values ('Table'); insert into objects (id, name) values (10, 'Computer'); insert into objects (name) values ('Book'); select * from objects order by id; ID NAME ============ =============== 1 Table 2 Book 10 Computer
-
Creating the
SALARY_HISTORY
table with two computed fields. The first one is declared according to the SQL:2003 standard, while the second one is declared according to the traditional declaration of computed fields in Firebird.CREATE TABLE SALARY_HISTORY ( EMP_NO EMPNO NOT NULL, CHANGE_DATE TIMESTAMP DEFAULT 'NOW' NOT NULL, UPDATER_ID VARCHAR(20) NOT NULL, OLD_SALARY SALARY NOT NULL, PERCENT_CHANGE DOUBLE PRECISION DEFAULT 0 NOT NULL, SALARY_CHANGE GENERATED ALWAYS AS (OLD_SALARY * PERCENT_CHANGE / 100), NEW_SALARY COMPUTED BY (OLD_SALARY + OLD_SALARY * PERCENT_CHANGE / 100) );
-
With
DEFINER
set for tablet
, userUS
needs only theSELECT
privilege ont
. If it were set forINVOKER
, the user would also need theEXECUTE
privilege on functionf
.set term ^; create function f() returns int as begin return 3; end^ set term ;^ create table t (i integer, c computed by (i + f())) SQL SECURITY DEFINER; insert into t values (2); grant select on table t to user us; commit; connect 'localhost:/tmp/7.fdb' user us password 'pas'; select * from t;
-
With
DEFINER
set for tabletr
, userUS
needs only theINSERT
privilege ontr
. If it were set forINVOKER
, either the user or the trigger would also need theINSERT
privilege on tablet
. The result would be the same ifSQL SECURITY DEFINER
were specified for triggertr_ins
:create table tr (i integer) SQL SECURITY DEFINER; create table t (i integer); set term ^; create trigger tr_ins for tr after insert as begin insert into t values (NEW.i); end^ set term ;^ grant insert on table tr to user us; commit; connect 'localhost:/tmp/29.fdb' user us password 'pas'; insert into tr values(2);
Global Temporary Tables (GTT)
Global temporary tables have persistent metadata, but their contents are transaction-bound (the default) or connection-bound.
Every transaction or connection has its own private instance of a GTT, isolated from all the others.
Instances are only created if and when the GTT is referenced.
They are destroyed when the transaction ends or on disconnection.
The metadata of a GTT can be modified or removed using ALTER TABLE
and DROP TABLE
, respectively.
CREATE GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE tablename (<column_def> [, {<column_def> | <table_constraint>} ...]) [<gtt_table_attrs>] <gtt_table_attrs> ::= <gtt_table_attr> [gtt_table_attr> ...] <gtt_table_attr> ::= <sql_security> | ON COMMIT {DELETE | PRESERVE} ROWS
Syntax notes
|
GTTs are writable in read-only transactions. The effect is as follows:
- Read-only transaction in read-write database
-
Writable in both
ON COMMIT PRESERVE ROWS
andON COMMIT DELETE ROWS
- Read-only transaction in read-only database
-
Writable in
ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS
only
Restrictions on GTTs
GTTs can be “dressed up” with all the features and paraphernalia of ordinary tables (keys, references, indexes, triggers and so on) but there are a few restrictions:
-
GTTs and regular tables cannot reference one another
-
A connection-bound (“
PRESERVE ROWS
”) GTT cannot reference a transaction-bound (“DELETE ROWS
”) GTT -
Domain constraints cannot reference any GTT
-
The destruction of a GTT instance at the end of its life cycle does not cause any
BEFORE
/AFTER
delete triggers to fire
In an existing database, it is not always easy to distinguish a regular table from a GTT, or a transaction-level GTT from a connection-level GTT. Use this query to find out what type of table you are looking at:
For an overview of the types of all the relations in the database:
The |
Examples of Global Temporary Tables
-
Creating a connection-scoped global temporary table.
CREATE GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE MYCONNGTT ( ID INTEGER NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY, TXT VARCHAR(32), TS TIMESTAMP DEFAULT CURRENT_TIMESTAMP) ON COMMIT PRESERVE ROWS;
-
Creating a transaction-scoped global temporary table that uses a foreign key to reference a connection-scoped global temporary table. The
ON COMMIT
sub-clause is optional becauseDELETE ROWS
is the default.CREATE GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE MYTXGTT ( ID INTEGER NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY, PARENT_ID INTEGER NOT NULL REFERENCES MYCONNGTT(ID), TXT VARCHAR(32), TS TIMESTAMP DEFAULT CURRENT_TIMESTAMP ) ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS;
External Tables
The optional EXTERNAL [FILE]
clause specifies that the table is stored outside the database in an external text file of fixed-length records.
The columns of a table stored in an external file can be of any type except BLOB
or ARRAY
, although for most purposes, only columns of CHAR
types would be useful.
All you can do with a table stored in an external file is insert new rows (INSERT
) and query the data (SELECT
).
Updating existing data (UPDATE
) and deleting rows (DELETE
) are not possible.
A file that is defined as an external table must be located on a storage device that is physically present on the machine where the Firebird server runs and, if the parameter ExternalFileAccess in the firebird.conf
configuration file is Restrict
, it must be in one of the directories listed there as the argument for Restrict
.
If the file does not exist yet, Firebird will create it on first access.
The ability to use external files for a table depends on the value set for the ExternalFileAccess parameter in
|
External File Format
The “row” format of the external table is fixed length and binary. There are no field delimiters: both field and row boundaries are determined by maximum sizes, in bytes, of the field definitions. It is important to keep this in mind, both when defining the structure of the external table and when designing an input file for an external table that is to import data from another application. The ubiquitous “.csv” format, for example, is of no use as an input file and cannot be generated directly into an external file.
The most useful data type for the columns of external tables is the fixed-length CHAR
type, of suitable lengths for the data they are to carry.
Date and number types are easily cast to and from strings whereas, unless the files are to be read by another Firebird database, the native data types — binary data — will appear to external applications as unparseable “alphabetti”.
Of course, there are ways to manipulate typed data so as to generate output files from Firebird that can be read directly as input files to other applications, using stored procedures, with or without employing external tables. Such techniques are beyond the scope of a language reference. Here, we provide some guidelines and tips for producing and working with simple text files, since the external table feature is often used as an easy way to produce or read transaction-independent logs that can be studied off-line in a text editor or auditing application.
Generally, external files are more useful if rows are separated by a delimiter, in the form of a “newline” sequence that is recognised by reader applications on the intended platform.
For most contexts on Windows, it is the two-byte 'CRLF' sequence, carriage return (ASCII code decimal 13) and line feed (ASCII code decimal 10).
On POSIX, LF on its own is usual;
for some MacOSX applications, it may be LFCR.
There are various ways to populate this delimiter column.
In our example below, it is done by using a BEFORE INSERT
trigger and the internal function ASCII_CHAR
.
For our example, we will define an external log table that might be used by an exception handler in a stored procedure or trigger. The external table is chosen because the messages from any handled exceptions will be retained in the log, even if the transaction that launched the process is eventually rolled back because of another, unhandled exception. For demonstration purposes, it has just two data columns, a time stamp and a message. The third column stores the row delimiter:
CREATE TABLE ext_log
EXTERNAL FILE 'd:\externals\log_me.txt' (
stamp CHAR (24),
message CHAR(100),
crlf CHAR(2) -- for a Windows context
);
COMMIT;
Now, a trigger, to write the timestamp and the row delimiter each time a message is written to the file:
SET TERM ^;
CREATE TRIGGER bi_ext_log FOR ext_log
ACTIVE BEFORE INSERT
AS
BEGIN
IF (new.stamp is NULL) then
new.stamp = CAST (CURRENT_TIMESTAMP as CHAR(24));
new.crlf = ASCII_CHAR(13) || ASCII_CHAR(10);
END ^
COMMIT ^
SET TERM ;^
Inserting some records (which could have been done by an exception handler or a fan of Shakespeare):
insert into ext_log (message)
values('Shall I compare thee to a summer''s day?');
insert into ext_log (message)
values('Thou art more lovely and more temperate');
The output:
2015-10-07 15:19:03.4110Shall I compare thee to a summer's day?
2015-10-07 15:19:58.7600Thou art more lovely and more temperate
5.4.2. ALTER TABLE
Altering the structure of a table.
DSQL, ESQL
ALTER TABLE tablename
<operation> [, <operation> ...]
<operation> ::=
ADD <col_def>
| ADD <tconstraint>
| DROP colname
| DROP CONSTRAINT constr_name
| ALTER [COLUMN] colname <col_mod>
| ALTER SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER}
| DROP SQL SECURITY
| {ENABLE | DISABLE} PUBLICATION
<col_mod> ::=
TO newname
| POSITION newpos
| <regular_col_mod>
| <computed_col_mod>
| <identity_col_mod>
<regular_col_mod> ::=
TYPE {<datatype> | domainname}
| SET DEFAULT {<literal> | NULL | <context_var>}
| DROP DEFAULT
| {SET | DROP} NOT NULL
<computed_col_mod> ::=
[TYPE <datatype>] {COMPUTED [BY] | GENERATED ALWAYS AS} (<expression>)
<identity_col_mod> ::=
SET GENERATED {ALWAYS | BY DEFAULT} [<identity_mod_option>...]
| <identity_mod_options>...
| DROP IDENTITY
<identity_mod_options> ::=
RESTART [WITH restart_value]
| SET INCREMENT [BY] inc_value
!! See CREATE TABLE
syntax for further rules !!
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
tablename |
Name (identifier) of the table |
operation |
One of the available operations altering the structure of the table |
colname |
Name (identifier) for a column in the table. The maximum length is 63 characters. Must be unique in the table. |
domain_name |
Domain name |
newname |
New name (identifier) for the column. The maximum length is 63 characters. Must be unique in the table. |
newpos |
The new column position (an integer between 1 and the number of columns in the table) |
other_table |
The name of the table referenced by the foreign key constraint |
literal |
A literal value that is allowed in the given context |
context_var |
A context variable whose type is allowed in the given context |
check_condition |
The condition of a |
restart_value |
The first value of the identity column after restart |
inc_value |
The increment (or step) value of the identity column;
zero ( |
The ALTER TABLE
statement changes the structure of an existing table.
With one ALTER TABLE
statement it is possible to perform multiple operations, adding/dropping columns and constraints and also altering column specifications.
Multiple operations in an ALTER TABLE
statement are separated with commas.
Version Count Increments
Some changes in the structure of a table increment the metadata change counter (“version count”) assigned to every table. The number of metadata changes is limited to 255 for each table, or 32,000 for each view. Once the counter reaches this limit, you will not be able to make any further changes to the structure of the table or view without resetting the counter.
The ADD
Clause
With the ADD
clause you can add a new column or a new table constraint.
The syntax for defining the column and the syntax of defining the table constraint correspond with those described for CREATE TABLE
statement.
-
Each time a new column is added, the metadata change counter is increased by one
-
Adding a new table constraint does not increase the metadata change counter
Points to Be Aware of
|
The DROP
Clause
The DROP colname
clause deletes the specified column from the table.
An attempt to drop a column will fail if anything references it.
Consider the following items as sources of potential dependencies:
-
column or table constraints
-
indexes
-
stored procedures and triggers
-
views
-
Each time a column is dropped, the table’s metadata change counter is increased by one.
The DROP CONSTRAINT
Clause
The DROP CONSTRAINT
clause deletes the specified column-level or table-level constraint.
A PRIMARY KEY
or UNIQUE
key constraint cannot be deleted if it is referenced by a FOREIGN KEY
constraint in another table.
It will be necessary to drop that FOREIGN KEY
constraint before attempting to drop the PRIMARY KEY
or UNIQUE
key constraint it references.
-
Deleting a column constraint or a table constraint does not increase the metadata change counter.
The ALTER [COLUMN]
Clause
With the ALTER [COLUMN]
clause, attributes of existing columns can be modified without the need to drop and re-add the column.
Permitted modifications are:
-
change the name (does not affect the metadata change counter)
-
change the data type (increases the metadata change counter by one)
-
change the column position in the column list of the table (does not affect the metadata change counter)
-
delete the default column value (does not affect the metadata change counter)
-
set a default column value or change the existing default (does not affect the metadata change counter)
-
change the type and expression for a computed column (does not affect the metadata change counter)
-
set the
NOT NULL
constraint (does not affect the metadata change counter) -
drop the
NOT NULL
constraint (does not affect the metadata change counter) -
change the type of an identity column, or change an identity column to a regular column
-
restart an identity column
-
change the increment of an identity column
Renaming a Column: the TO
Clause
The TO
keyword with a new identifier renames an existing column.
The table must not have an existing column that has the same identifier.
It will not be possible to change the name of a column that is included in any constraint: PRIMARY KEY
, UNIQUE
key, FOREIGN KEY
, column constraint or the CHECK
constraint of the table.
Renaming a column will also be disallowed if the column is used in any trigger, stored procedure or view.
Changing the Data Type of a Column: the TYPE
Clause
The keyword TYPE
changes the data type of an existing column to another, allowable type.
A type change that might result in data loss will be disallowed.
As an example, the number of characters in the new type for a CHAR
or VARCHAR
column cannot be smaller than the existing specification for it.
If the column was declared as an array, no change to its type or its number of dimensions is permitted.
The data type of a column that is involved in a foreign key, primary key or unique constraint cannot be changed at all.
Changing the Position of a Column: the POSITION
Clause
The POSITION keyword changes the position of an existing column in the notional “left-to-right” layout of the record.
Numbering of column positions starts at 1.
-
If a position less than 1 is specified, an error message will be returned
-
If a position number is greater than the number of columns in the table, its new position will be adjusted silently to match the number of columns.
The DROP DEFAULT
and SET DEFAULT
Clauses
The optional DROP DEFAULT
clause deletes the default value for the column if it was put there previously by a CREATE TABLE
or ALTER TABLE
statement.
-
If the column is based on a domain with a default value, the default value will revert to the domain default
-
An execution error will be raised if an attempt is made to delete the default value of a column which has no default value or whose default value is domain-based
The optional SET DEFAULT
clause sets a default value for the column.
If the column already has a default value, it will be replaced with the new one.
The default value applied to a column always overrides one inherited from a domain.
The SET NOT NULL
and DROP NOT NULL
Clauses
The SET NOT NULL
clause adds a NOT NULL
constraint on an existing table column.
Contrary to definition in CREATE TABLE
, it is not possible to specify a constraint name.
The successful addition of the An explicit |
Dropping the NOT NULL
constraint from the column if its type is a domain that also has a NOT NULL
constraint, has no observable effect until the NOT NULL
constraint is dropped from the domain as well.
The COMPUTED [BY]
or GENERATED ALWAYS AS
Clauses
The data type and expression underlying a computed column can be modified using a COMPUTED [BY]
or GENERATED ALWAYS AS
clause in the ALTER TABLE ALTER [COLUMN]
statement.
Converting a regular column to a computed one and vice versa are not permitted.
Changing Identity Columns
or identity columns (SET GENERATED {ALWAYS | BY DEFAULT}
) it is possible to modify several properties using the following clauses.
Identity Type
The SET GENERATED {ALWAYS | BY DEFAULT}
changes an identity column from ALWAYS
to BY DEFAULT
and vice versa.
It is not possible to use this to change a regular column to an identity column.
RESTART
The RESTART
clause restarts the sequence used for generating identity values.
If only the RESTART
clause is specified, then the sequence resets to the initial value specified when the identity column was defined.
If the optional WITH restart_value
clause is specified, the sequence will restart with the specified value.
In Firebird 3.0, It is currently not possible to change the configured start value. |
Changing SQL Security
Using the ALTER SQL SECURITY
or DROP SQL SECURITY
clauses, it is possible to change or drop the SQL Security property of a table.
After dropping SQL Security, the default value of the database is applied at runtime.
If the SQL Security property is changed for a table, triggers that do not have an explicit SQL Security property will not see the effect of the change until the next time the trigger is loaded into the metadata cache. |
Replication Management
To stop replicating a table, use the DISABLE PUBLICATION
clause.
To start replicating a table, use the ENABLE PUBLICATION
clause.
The change in publication status takes effect at commit.
Attributes that Cannot Be Altered
The following alterations are not supported:
-
Changing the collation of a character type column
Who Can Alter a Table?
The ALTER TABLE
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the table
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY TABLE
privilege
Examples Using ALTER TABLE
-
Adding the
CAPITAL
column to theCOUNTRY
table.ALTER TABLE COUNTRY ADD CAPITAL VARCHAR(25);
-
Adding the
CAPITAL
column with theNOT NULL
andUNIQUE
constraint and deleting theCURRENCY
column.ALTER TABLE COUNTRY ADD CAPITAL VARCHAR(25) NOT NULL UNIQUE, DROP CURRENCY;
-
Adding the
CHK_SALARY
check constraint and a foreign key to theJOB
table.ALTER TABLE JOB ADD CONSTRAINT CHK_SALARY CHECK (MIN_SALARY < MAX_SALARY), ADD FOREIGN KEY (JOB_COUNTRY) REFERENCES COUNTRY (COUNTRY);
-
Setting default value for the
MODEL
field, changing the type of theITEMID
column and renaming the MODELNAME column.ALTER TABLE STOCK ALTER COLUMN MODEL SET DEFAULT 1, ALTER COLUMN ITEMID TYPE BIGINT, ALTER COLUMN MODELNAME TO NAME;
-
Restarting the sequence of an identity column.
ALTER TABLE objects ALTER ID RESTART WITH 100;
-
Changing the computed columns
NEW_SALARY
andSALARY_CHANGE
.ALTER TABLE SALARY_HISTORY ALTER NEW_SALARY GENERATED ALWAYS AS (OLD_SALARY + OLD_SALARY * PERCENT_CHANGE / 100), ALTER SALARY_CHANGE COMPUTED BY (OLD_SALARY * PERCENT_CHANGE / 100);
5.4.3. DROP TABLE
Dropping (deleting) a table
DSQL, ESQL
DROP TABLE tablename
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
tablename |
Name (identifier) of the table |
The DROP TABLE
statement drops (deletes) an existing table.
If the table has dependencies, the DROP TABLE
statement will fail with an execution error.
When a table is dropped, all its triggers and indexes will be deleted as well.
Who Can Drop a Table?
The DROP TABLE
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the table
-
Users with the
DROP ANY TABLE
privilege
5.4.4. RECREATE TABLE
Creating a new table (relation) or recreating an existing one
DSQL
RECREATE [GLOBAL TEMPORARY] TABLE tablename [EXTERNAL [FILE] 'filespec'] (<col_def> [, {<col_def> | <tconstraint>} ...]) [{<table_attrs> | <gtt_table_attrs>}]
See the CREATE TABLE
section for the full syntax of CREATE TABLE
and descriptions of defining tables, columns and constraints.
RECREATE TABLE
creates or recreates a table.
If a table with this name already exists, the RECREATE TABLE
statement will try to drop it and create a new one.
Existing dependencies will prevent the statement from executing.
5.5. INDEX
An index is a database object used for faster data retrieval from a table or for speeding up the sorting in a query.
Indexes are used also to enforce the refererential integrity constraints PRIMARY KEY
, FOREIGN KEY
and UNIQUE
.
This section describes how to create indexes, activate and deactivate them, delete them and collect statistics (recalculate selectivity) for them.
5.5.1. CREATE INDEX
Creating an index for a table
DSQL, ESQL
CREATE [UNIQUE] [ASC[ENDING] | DESC[ENDING]] INDEX indexname ON tablename {(col [, col …]) | COMPUTED BY (<expression>)}
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
indexname |
Index name. The maximum length is 63 characters |
tablename |
The name of the table for which the index is to be built |
col |
Name of a column in the table.
Columns of the types |
expression |
The expression that will compute the values for a computed index, also known as an “expression index” |
The CREATE INDEX
statement creates an index for a table that can be used to speed up searching, sorting and grouping.
Indexes are created automatically in the process of defining constraints, such as primary key, foreign key or unique constraints.
An index can be built on the content of columns of any data type except for BLOB
and arrays.
The name (identifier) of an index must be unique among all index names.
Key Indexes
When a primary key, foreign key or unique constraint is added to a table or column, an index with the same name is created automatically, without an explicit directive from the designer.
For example, the
|
Who Can Create an Index?
The CREATE INDEX
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the table
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY TABLE
privilege
Unique Indexes
Specifying the keyword UNIQUE
in the index creation statement creates an index in which uniqueness will be enforced throughout the table.
The index is referred to as a “unique index”.
A unique index is not a constraint.
Unique indexes cannot contain duplicate key values (or duplicate key value combinations, in the case of compound, or multi-column, or multi-segment) indexes.
Duplicated NULL
s are permitted, in accordance with the SQL:99 standard, in both single-segment and multi-segment indexes.
Index Direction
All indexes in Firebird are uni-directional.
An index may be constructed from the lowest value to the highest (ascending order) or from the highest value to the lowest (descending order). The keywords ASC[ENDING]
and DESC[ENDING]
are used to specify the direction of the index.
The default index order is ASC[ENDING]
.
It is quite valid to define both an ascending and a descending index on the same column or key set.
A descending index can be useful on a column that will be subjected to searches on the high values (“newest”, maximum, etc.) |
Firebird uses B-tree indexes, which are bidirectional. However, due to technical limitations, Firebird uses an index in one direction only. |
Computed (Expression) Indexes
In creating an index, you can use the COMPUTED BY
clause to specify an expression instead of one or more columns.
Computed indexes are used in queries where the condition in a WHERE
, ORDER BY
or GROUP BY
clause exactly matches the expression in the index definition.
The expression in a computed index may involve several columns in the table.
Expression indexes can also be used as a workaround for indexing computed columns: use the name of the computed column as the expression. |
Limits on Indexes
Certain limits apply to indexes.
The maximum length of a key in an index is limited to ¼ of the page size.
Maximum Indexes per Table
The number of indexes that can be accommodated for each table is limited. The actual maximum for a specific table depends on the page size and the number of columns in the indexes.
Page Size |
Number of Indexes Depending on Column Count |
||
---|---|---|---|
Single |
2-Column |
3-Column |
|
4096 |
203 |
145 |
113 |
8192 |
408 |
291 |
227 |
16384 |
818 |
584 |
454 |
32768 |
1637 |
1169 |
909 |
Character Index Limits
The maximum indexed string length is 9 bytes less than the maximum key length. The maximum indexable string length depends on the page size and the character set.
Page Size |
Maximum Indexable String Length by Charset Type |
|||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 byte/char |
2 byte/char |
3 byte/char |
4 byte/char |
|
4096 |
1015 |
507 |
338 |
253 |
8192 |
2039 |
1019 |
679 |
509 |
16384 |
4087 |
2043 |
1362 |
1021 |
32768 |
8183 |
4091 |
2727 |
2045 |
Depending on the collation, the maximum size can be further reduced as case-insensitive and accent-insensitive collations require more bytes per character in an index. See also Character Indexes in Chapter Data Types and Subtypes. |
Examples Using CREATE INDEX
-
Creating an index for the
UPDATER_ID
column in theSALARY_HISTORY
tableCREATE INDEX IDX_UPDATER ON SALARY_HISTORY (UPDATER_ID);
-
Creating an index with keys sorted in the descending order for the
CHANGE_DATE
column in theSALARY_HISTORY
tableCREATE DESCENDING INDEX IDX_CHANGE ON SALARY_HISTORY (CHANGE_DATE);
-
Creating a multi-segment index for the
ORDER_STATUS
,PAID
columns in theSALES
tableCREATE INDEX IDX_SALESTAT ON SALES (ORDER_STATUS, PAID);
-
Creating an index that does not permit duplicate values for the
NAME
column in theCOUNTRY
tableCREATE UNIQUE INDEX UNQ_COUNTRY_NAME ON COUNTRY (NAME);
-
Creating a computed index for the
PERSONS
tableCREATE INDEX IDX_NAME_UPPER ON PERSONS COMPUTED BY (UPPER (NAME));
An index like this can be used for a case-insensitive search:
SELECT * FROM PERSONS WHERE UPPER(NAME) STARTING WITH UPPER('Iv');
5.5.2. ALTER INDEX
Activating or deactivating an index; rebuilding an index
DSQL, ESQL
ALTER INDEX indexname {ACTIVE | INACTIVE}
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
indexname |
Index name |
The ALTER INDEX
statement activates or deactivates an index.
There is no facility on this statement for altering any attributes of the index.
INACTIVE
-
With the
INACTIVE
option, the index is switched from the active to inactive state. The effect is similar to theDROP INDEX
statement except that the index definition remains in the database. Altering a constraint index to the inactive state is not permitted.An active index can be deactivated if there are no queries prepared using that index; otherwise, an “object in use” error is returned.
Activating an inactive index is also safe. However, if there are active transactions modifying the table, the transaction containing the
ALTER INDEX
statement will fail if it has theNOWAIT
attribute. If the transaction is inWAIT
mode, it will wait for completion of concurrent transactions.On the other side of the coin, if our
ALTER INDEX
succeeds and starts to rebuild the index atCOMMIT
, other transactions modifying that table will fail or wait, according to theirWAIT
/NO WAIT
attributes. The situation is exactly the same forCREATE INDEX
.How is it Useful?It might be useful to switch an index to the inactive state whilst inserting, updating or deleting a large batch of records in the table that owns the index.
ACTIVE
-
With the
ACTIVE
option, if the index is in the inactive state, it will be switched to active state and the system rebuilds the index.How is it Useful?Even if the index is active when
ALTER INDEX … ACTIVE
is executed, the index will be rebuilt. Rebuilding indexes can be a useful piece of houskeeping to do, occasionally, on the indexes of a large table in a database that has frequent inserts, updates or deletes but is infrequently restored.
Who Can Alter an Index?
The ALTER INDEX
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the table
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY TABLE
privilege
Use of ALTER INDEX
on a Constraint Index
Altering the index of a PRIMARY KEY
, FOREIGN KEY
or UNIQUE
constraint to INACTIVE
is not permitted.
However, ALTER INDEX … ACTIVE
works just as well with constraint indexes as it does with others, as an index rebuilding tool.
5.5.3. DROP INDEX
Dropping (deleting) an index
DSQL, ESQL
DROP INDEX indexname
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
indexname |
Index name |
The DROP INDEX
statement drops (deletes) the named index from the database.
A constraint index cannot dropped using |
Who Can Drop an Index?
The DROP INDEX
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the table
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY TABLE
privilege
5.5.4. SET STATISTICS
Recalculating the selectivity of an index
DSQL, ESQL
SET STATISTICS INDEX indexname
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
indexname |
Index name |
The SET STATISTICS
statement recalculates the selectivity of the specified index.
Who Can Update Index Statistics?
The SET STATISTICS
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the table
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY TABLE
privilege
Index Selectivity
The selectivity of an index is the result of evaluating the number of rows that can be selected in a search on every index value. A unique index has the maximum selectivity because it is impossible to select more than one row for each value of an index key if it is used. Keeping the selectivity of an index up to date is important for the optimizer’s choices in seeking the most optimal query plan.
Index statistics in Firebird are not automatically recalculated in response to large batches of inserts, updates or deletions. It may be beneficial to recalculate the selectivity of an index after such operations because the selectivity tends to become outdated.
The statements |
It can be performed under concurrent load without risk of corruption.
However, be aware that, under concurrent load, the newly calculated statistics could become outdated as soon as SET STATISTICS
finishes.
5.6. VIEW
A view is a virtual table that is actually a stored and named SELECT
query for retrieving data of any complexity.
Data can be retrieved from one or more tables, from other views and also from selectable stored procedures.
Unlike regular tables in relational databases, a view is not an independent data set stored in the database. The result is dynamically created as a data set when the view is selected.
The metadata of a view are available to the process that generates the binary code for stored procedures and triggers, just as though they were concrete tables storing persistent data.
5.6.1. CREATE VIEW
Creating a view
DSQL
CREATE VIEW viewname [<full_column_list>] AS <select_statement> [WITH CHECK OPTION] <full_column_list> ::= (colname [, colname ...])
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
viewname |
View name. The maximum length is 63 characters |
select_statement |
SELECT statement |
full_column_list |
The list of columns in the view |
colname |
View column name. Duplicate column names are not allowed. |
The CREATE VIEW
statement creates a new view.
The identifier (name) of a view must be unique among the names of all views, tables and stored procedures in the database.
The name of the new view can be followed by the list of column names that should be returned to the caller when the view is invoked. Names in the list do not have to be related to the names of the columns in the base tables from which they derive.
If the view column list is omitted, the system will use the column names and/or aliases from the SELECT
statement.
If duplicate names or non-aliased expression-derived columns make it impossible to obtain a valid list, creation of the view fails with an error.
The number of columns in the view’s list must exactly match the number of columns in the selection list of the underlying SELECT statement in the view definition.
Additional Points
|
Updatable Views
A view can be updatable or read-only.
If a view is updatable, the data retrieved when this view is called can be changed by the DML statements INSERT
, UPDATE
, DELETE
, UPDATE OR INSERT
or MERGE
.
Changes made in an updatable view are applied to the underlying table(s).
A read-only view can be made updateable with the use of triggers. Once triggers have been defined on a view, changes posted to it will never be written automatically to the underlying table, even if the view was updateable to begin with. It is the responsibility of the programmer to ensure that the triggers update (or delete from, or insert into) the base tables as needed.
A view will be automatically updatable if all the following conditions are met:
-
the
SELECT
statement queries only one table or one updatable view -
the
SELECT
statement does not call any stored procedures -
each base table (or base view) column not present in the view definition meets one of the following conditions:
-
it is nullable
-
it has a non-
NULL
default value -
it has a trigger that supplies a permitted value
-
-
the
SELECT
statement contains no fields derived from subqueries or other expressions -
the
SELECT
statement does not contain fields defined through aggregate functions (MIN
,MAX
,AVG
,SUM
,COUNT
,LIST
, etc.), statistical functions (CORR
,COVAR_POP
,COVAR_SAMP
, etc.), linear regression functions (REGR_AVGX
,REGR_AVGY
, etc.) or any type of window function -
the
SELECT
statement contains noORDER BY
,GROUP BY
orHAVING
clause -
the
SELECT
statement does not include the keywordDISTINCT
or row-restrictive keywords such asROWS
,FIRST
,SKIP
,OFFSET
orFETCH
WITH CHECK OPTION
The optional WITH CHECK OPTION
clause requires an updatable view to check whether new or updated data meet the condition specified in the WHERE
clause of the SELECT
statement.
Every attempt to insert a new record or to update an existing one is checked whether the new or updated record would meet the WHERE
criteria.
If they fail the check, the operation is not performed and an appropriate error message is returned.
WITH CHECK OPTION
can be specified only in a CREATE VIEW
statement in which a WHERE
clause is present to restrict the output of the main SELECT
statement.
An error message is returned otherwise.
Please note:
If Furthermore, view fields omitted from the For views that do not have |
Who Can Create a View?
The CREATE VIEW
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE VIEW
privilege
The creator of a view becomes its owner.
To create a view, a non-admin user also needs at least SELECT
access to the underlying table(s) and/or view(s), and the EXECUTE
privilege on any selectable stored procedures involved.
To enable insertions, updates and deletions through the view, the creator/owner must also possess the corresponding INSERT
, UPDATE
and DELETE
rights on the underlying object(s).
Granting other users privileges on the view is only possible if the view owner has these privileges on the underlying objects WITH GRANT OPTION
.
It will always be the case if the view owner is also the owner of the underlying objects.
Examples of Creating Views
-
Creating view returning the
JOB_CODE
andJOB_TITLE
columns only for those jobs whereMAX_SALARY
is less than $15,000.CREATE VIEW ENTRY_LEVEL_JOBS AS SELECT JOB_CODE, JOB_TITLE FROM JOB WHERE MAX_SALARY < 15000;
-
Creating a view returning the
JOB_CODE
andJOB_TITLE
columns only for those jobs whereMAX_SALARY
is less than $15,000. Whenever a new record is inserted or an existing record is updated, theMAX_SALARY < 15000
condition will be checked. If the condition is not true, the insert/update operation will be rejected.CREATE VIEW ENTRY_LEVEL_JOBS AS SELECT JOB_CODE, JOB_TITLE FROM JOB WHERE MAX_SALARY < 15000 WITH CHECK OPTION;
-
Creating a view with an explicit column list.
CREATE VIEW PRICE_WITH_MARKUP ( CODE_PRICE, COST, COST_WITH_MARKUP ) AS SELECT CODE_PRICE, COST, COST * 1.1 FROM PRICE;
-
Creating a view with the help of aliases for fields in the
SELECT
statement (the same result as in Example 3).CREATE VIEW PRICE_WITH_MARKUP AS SELECT CODE_PRICE, COST, COST * 1.1 AS COST_WITH_MARKUP FROM PRICE;
-
Creating a read-only view based on two tables and a stored procedure.
CREATE VIEW GOODS_PRICE AS SELECT goods.name AS goodsname, price.cost AS cost, b.quantity AS quantity FROM goods JOIN price ON goods.code_goods = price.code_goods LEFT JOIN sp_get_balance(goods.code_goods) b ON 1 = 1;
5.6.2. ALTER VIEW
Modifying an existing view
DSQL
ALTER VIEW viewname [<full_column_list>] AS <select_statement> [WITH CHECK OPTION] <full_column_list> ::= (colname [, colname ...])
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
viewname |
Name of an existing view |
select_statement |
SELECT statement |
full_column_list |
The list of columns in the view |
colname |
View column name. Duplicate column names are not allowed. |
Use the ALTER VIEW
statement for changing the definition of an existing view.
Privileges for views remain intact and dependencies are not affected.
The syntax of the ALTER VIEW
statement corresponds completely with that of CREATE VIEW
.
Be careful when you change the number of columns in a view. Existing application code and PSQL modules that access the view may become invalid. For information on how to detect this kind of problem in stored procedures and trigger, see The RDB$VALID_BLR Field in the Appendix. |
Who Can Alter a View?
The ALTER VIEW
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the view
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY VIEW
privilege
5.6.3. CREATE OR ALTER VIEW
Creating a new view or altering an existing view.
DSQL
CREATE OR ALTER VIEW viewname [<full_column_list>] AS <select_statement> [WITH CHECK OPTION] <full_column_list> ::= (colname [, colname ...])
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
viewname |
Name of a view which may or may not exist |
select_statement |
SELECT statement |
full_column_list |
The list of columns in the view |
colname |
View column name. Duplicate column names are not allowed. |
Use the CREATE OR ALTER VIEW
statement for changing the definition of an existing view or creating it if it does not exist.
Privileges for an existing view remain intact and dependencies are not affected.
The syntax of the CREATE OR ALTER VIEW
statement corresponds completely with that of CREATE VIEW
.
5.6.4. DROP VIEW
Deleting (dropping) a view
DSQL
DROP VIEW viewname
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
viewname |
View name |
The DROP VIEW
statement drops (deletes) an existing view.
The statement will fail if the view has dependencies.
Who Can Drop a View?
The DROP VIEW
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the view
-
Users with the
DROP ANY VIEW
privilege
5.6.5. RECREATE VIEW
Creating a new view or recreating an existing view
DSQL
RECREATE VIEW viewname [<full_column_list>] AS <select_statement> [WITH CHECK OPTION] <full_column_list> ::= (colname [, colname ...])
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
viewname |
View name. The maximum length is 63 characters |
select_statement |
SELECT statement |
full_column_list |
The list of columns in the view |
colname |
View column name. Duplicate column names are not allowed. |
Creates or recreates a view.
If there is a view with this name already, the engine will try to drop it before creating the new instance.
If the existing view cannot be dropped, because of dependencies or insufficient rights, for example, RECREATE VIEW
fails with an error.
5.7. TRIGGER
A trigger is a special type of stored procedure that is not called directly, instead being executed when a specified event occurs in the associated table or view. A DML trigger is specific to one and only one relation (table or view) and one phase in the timing of the event (BEFORE or AFTER). It can be specified to execute for one specific event (insert, update, delete) or for some combination of two or three of those events.
Two other forms of trigger exist:
-
a “database trigger” can be specified to fire at the start or end of a user session (connection) or a user transaction.
-
a “DDL trigger” can be specified to fire at the before or after execution of one or more types of DDL statements.
5.7.1. CREATE TRIGGER
Creating a new trigger
DSQL, ESQL
CREATE TRIGGER trigname { <relation_trigger_legacy> | <relation_trigger_sql2003> | <database_trigger> | <ddl_trigger> } {<psql_trigger> | <external-module-body>} <relation_trigger_legacy> ::= FOR {tablename | viewname} [ACTIVE | INACTIVE] {BEFORE | AFTER} <mutation_list> [POSITION number] <relation_trigger_sql2003> ::= [ACTIVE | INACTIVE] {BEFORE | AFTER} <mutation_list> ON {tablename | viewname} [POSITION number] <database_trigger> ::= [ACTIVE | INACTIVE] ON <db_event> [POSITION number] <ddl_trigger> ::= [ACTIVE | INACTIVE] {BEFORE | AFTER} <ddl_event> [POSITION number] <mutation_list> ::= <mutation> [OR <mutation> [OR <mutation>]] <mutation> ::= INSERT | UPDATE | DELETE <db_event> ::= CONNECT | DISCONNECT | TRANSACTION {START | COMMIT | ROLLBACK} <ddl_event> ::= ANY DDL STATEMENT | <ddl_event_item> [{OR <ddl_event_item>} ...] <ddl_event_item> ::= {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} TABLE | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} PROCEDURE | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} FUNCTION | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} TRIGGER | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} EXCEPTION | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} VIEW | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} DOMAIN | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} ROLE | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} SEQUENCE | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} USER | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} INDEX | {CREATE | DROP} COLLATION | ALTER CHARACTER SET | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} PACKAGE | {CREATE | DROP} PACKAGE BODY | {CREATE | ALTER | DROP} MAPPING <psql_trigger> ::= [SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER}] <psql-module-body> <psql-module-body> ::= !! See Syntax of Module Body !! <external-module-body> ::= !! See Syntax of Module Body !!
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
trigname |
Trigger name. The maximum length is 63 characters. It must be unique among all trigger names in the database. |
relation_trigger_legacy |
Legacy style of trigger declaration for a relation trigger |
relation_trigger_sql2003 |
Relation trigger declaration compliant with the SQL:2003 standard |
database_trigger |
Database trigger declaration |
tablename |
Name of the table with which the relation trigger is associated |
viewname |
Name of the view with which the relation trigger is associated |
mutation_list |
List of relation (table | view) events |
number |
Position of the trigger in the firing order. From 0 to 32,767 |
db_event |
Connection or transaction event |
ddl_event |
List of metadata change events |
ddl_event_item |
One of the metadata change events |
The CREATE TRIGGER
statement is used for creating a new trigger.
A trigger can be created either for a relation (table | view) event (or a combination of events), for a database event, or for a DDL event.
CREATE TRIGGER
, along with its associates ALTER TRIGGER
, CREATE OR ALTER TRIGGER
and RECREATE TRIGGER
, is a compound statement, consisting of a header and a body.
The header specifies the name of the trigger, the name of the relation (for a DML trigger), the phase of the trigger, the event(s) it applies to, and the position to determine an order between triggers.
The trigger body consists of optional declarations of local variables and named cursors followed by one or more statements, or blocks of statements, all enclosed in an outer block that begins with the keyword BEGIN
and ends with the keyword END
.
Declarations and embedded statements are terminated with semi-colons (‘;
’).
The name of the trigger must be unique among all trigger names.
Statement Terminators
Some SQL statement editors — specifically the isql utility that comes with Firebird and possibly some third-party editors — employ an internal convention that requires all statements to be terminated with a semi-colon. This creates a conflict with PSQL syntax when coding in these environments. If you are unacquainted with this problem and its solution, please study the details in the PSQL chapter in the section entitled Switching the Terminator in isql.
SQL Security
The SQL SECURITY
clause specifies the security context for executing other routines or inserting into other tables.
By default, a trigger applies the SQL Security property defined on its table (or — if the table doesn’t have the SQL Security property set — the database default), but it can be overridden by specifying it explicitly.
If the SQL Security property is changed for the table, triggers that do not have an explicit SQL Security property will not see the effect of the change until the next time the trigger is loaded into the metadata cache. |
See also SQL Security in chapter Security.
The Trigger Body
The trigger body is either a PSQL body, or an external UDR module body.
See The Module Body in the PSQL chapter for details.
DML Triggers (on Tables or Views)
DML — or “relation” — triggers are executed at the row (record) level, every time the row image changes.
A trigger can be either ACTIVE
or INACTIVE
.
Only active triggers are executed.
Triggers are created ACTIVE
by default.
Who Can Create a DML Trigger?
DML triggers can be created by:
-
The owner of the table (or view)
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY TABLE
or — for a view —ALTER ANY VIEW
privilege
Forms of Declaration
Firebird supports two forms of declaration for relation triggers:
-
The original, legacy syntax
-
The SQL:2003 standard-compliant form (recommended)
The SQL:2003 standard-compliant form is the recommended one.
A relation trigger specifies — among other things — a phase and one or more events.
Phase
Phase concerns the timing of the trigger with regard to the change-of-state event in the row of data:
-
A
BEFORE
trigger is fired before the specified database operation (insert, update or delete) is carried out -
An
AFTER
trigger is fired after the database operation has been completed
Row Events
A relation trigger definition specifies at least one of the DML operations INSERT
, UPDATE
and DELETE
, to indicate one or more events on which the trigger should fire.
If multiple operations are specified, they must be separated by the keyword OR
.
No operation may occur more than once.
Firing Order of Triggers
The keyword POSITION
allows an optional execution order (“firing order”) to be specified for a series of triggers that have the same phase and event as their target.
The default position is 0.
If no positions are specified, or if several triggers have a single position number, the triggers will be executed in the alphabetical order of their names.
Examples of CREATE TRIGGER
for Tables and Views
-
Creating a trigger in the “legacy” form, firing before the event of inserting a new record into the
CUSTOMER
table occurs.CREATE TRIGGER SET_CUST_NO FOR CUSTOMER ACTIVE BEFORE INSERT POSITION 0 AS BEGIN IF (NEW.CUST_NO IS NULL) THEN NEW.CUST_NO = GEN_ID(CUST_NO_GEN, 1); END
-
Creating a trigger firing before the event of inserting a new record into the
CUSTOMER
table in the SQL:2003 standard-compliant form.CREATE TRIGGER set_cust_no ACTIVE BEFORE INSERT ON customer POSITION 0 AS BEGIN IF (NEW.cust_no IS NULL) THEN NEW.cust_no = GEN_ID(cust_no_gen, 1); END
-
Creating a trigger that will file after either inserting, updating or deleting a record in the
CUSTOMER
table.CREATE TRIGGER TR_CUST_LOG ACTIVE AFTER INSERT OR UPDATE OR DELETE ON CUSTOMER POSITION 10 AS BEGIN INSERT INTO CHANGE_LOG (LOG_ID, ID_TABLE, TABLE_NAME, MUTATION) VALUES (NEXT VALUE FOR SEQ_CHANGE_LOG, OLD.CUST_NO, 'CUSTOMER', CASE WHEN INSERTING THEN 'INSERT' WHEN UPDATING THEN 'UPDATE' WHEN DELETING THEN 'DELETE' END); END
-
With
DEFINER
set for triggertr_ins
, userUS
needs only theINSERT
privilege ontr
. If it were set forINVOKER
, either the user or the trigger would also need theINSERT
privilege on tablet
.create table tr (i integer); create table t (i integer); set term ^; create trigger tr_ins for tr after insert SQL SECURITY DEFINER as begin insert into t values (NEW.i); end^ set term ;^ grant insert on table tr to user us; commit; connect 'localhost:/tmp/29.fdb' user us password 'pas'; insert into tr values(2);
The result would be the same if
SQL SECURITY DEFINER
were specified for tableTR
:create table tr (i integer) SQL SECURITY DEFINER; create table t (i integer); set term ^; create trigger tr_ins for tr after insert as begin insert into t values (NEW.i); end^ set term ;^ grant insert on table tr to user us; commit; connect 'localhost:/tmp/29.fdb' user us password 'pas'; insert into tr values(2);
Database Triggers
Triggers can be defined to fire upon “database events”, which really refers to a mixture of events that act across the scope of a session (connection) and events that act across the scope of an individual transaction:
-
CONNECT
-
DISCONNECT
-
TRANSACTION START
-
TRANSACTION COMMIT
-
TRANSACTION ROLLBACK
DDL Triggers are a sub-type of database triggers, covered in a separate section.
Who Can Create a Database Trigger?
Database triggers can be created by:
-
Users with the
ALTER DATABASE
privilege
Execution of Database Triggers and Exception Handling
CONNECT
and DISCONNECT
triggers are executed in a transaction created specifically for this purpose.
This transaction uses the default isolation level, i.e. snapshot (concurrency), write and wait.
If all goes well, the transaction is committed.
Uncaught exceptions cause the transaction to roll back, and
-
for a
CONNECT
trigger, the connection is then broken and the exception is returned to the client -
for a
DISCONNECT
trigger, exceptions are not reported. The connection is broken as intended
TRANSACTION
triggers are executed within the transaction whose start, commit or rollback evokes them.
The action taken after an uncaught exception depends on the event:
-
In a
TRANSACTION START
trigger, the exception is reported to the client and the transaction is rolled back -
In a
TRANSACTION COMMIT
trigger, the exception is reported, the trigger’s actions so far are undone and the commit is cancelled -
In a
TRANSACTION ROLLBACK
trigger, the exception is not reported and the transaction is rolled back as intended.
Obviously there is no direct way of knowing if a DISCONNECT
or TRANSACTION ROLLBACK
trigger caused an exception.
It also follows that the connection to the database cannot happen if a CONNECT
trigger causes an exception and a transaction cannot start if a TRANSACTION START
trigger causes one, either.
Both phenomena effectively lock you out of your database until you get in there with database triggers suppressed and fix the bad code.
Some Firebird command-line tools have been supplied with switches that an administrator can use to suppress the automatic firing of database triggers. So far, they are:
gbak -nodbtriggers
isql -nodbtriggers
nbackup -T
In a two-phase commit scenario, TRANSACTION COMMIT
triggers fire in the prepare phase, not at the commit.
-
The use of the
IN AUTONOMOUS TRANSACTION DO
statement in the database event triggers related to transactions (TRANSACTION START
,TRANSACTION ROLLBACK
,TRANSACTION COMMIT
) may cause the autonomous transaction to enter an infinite loop -
The
DISCONNECT
andTRANSACTION ROLLBACK
event triggers will not be executed when clients are disconnected via monitoring tables (DELETE FROM MON$ATTACHMENTS
)
Only the database owner and administrators have the authority to create database triggers.
Examples of CREATE TRIGGER
for “Database Triggers”
-
Creating a trigger for the event of connecting to the database that logs users logging into the system. The trigger is created as inactive.
CREATE TRIGGER tr_log_connect INACTIVE ON CONNECT POSITION 0 AS BEGIN INSERT INTO LOG_CONNECT (ID, USERNAME, ATIME) VALUES (NEXT VALUE FOR SEQ_LOG_CONNECT, CURRENT_USER, CURRENT_TIMESTAMP); END
-
Creating a trigger for the event of connecting to the database that does not permit any users, except for SYSDBA, to log in during off hours.
CREATE EXCEPTION E_INCORRECT_WORKTIME 'The working day has not started yet.'; CREATE TRIGGER TR_LIMIT_WORKTIME ACTIVE ON CONNECT POSITION 1 AS BEGIN IF ((CURRENT_USER <> 'SYSDBA') AND NOT (CURRENT_TIME BETWEEN time '9:00' AND time '17:00')) THEN EXCEPTION E_INCORRECT_WORKTIME; END
DDL Triggers
DDL triggers allow restrictions to be placed on users who attempt to create, alter or drop a DDL object. Their other purposes is to keep a metadata change log.
DDL triggers fire on specified metadata changes events in a specified phase.
BEFORE
triggers run before changes to system tables.
AFTER
triggers run after changes in system tables.
The event type |
In some sense, DDL triggers are a sub-type of database triggers.
Who Can Create a DDL Trigger?
DDL triggers can be created by:
-
Users with the
ALTER DATABASE
privilege
Suppressing DDL Triggers
A DDL trigger is a type of database trigger. See Suppressing Database Triggers how to suppress database — and DDL — triggers.
Examples of DDL Triggers
-
Here is how you might use a DDL trigger to enforce a consistent naming scheme, in this case, stored procedure names should begin with the prefix “
SP_
”:set auto on; create exception e_invalid_sp_name 'Invalid SP name (should start with SP_)'; set term !; create trigger trig_ddl_sp before CREATE PROCEDURE as begin if (rdb$get_context('DDL_TRIGGER', 'OBJECT_NAME') not starting 'SP_') then exception e_invalid_sp_name; end!
Test
create procedure sp_test as begin end! create procedure test as begin end! -- The last command raises this exception and procedure TEST is not created -- Statement failed, SQLSTATE = 42000 -- exception 1 -- -E_INVALID_SP_NAME -- -Invalid SP name (should start with SP_) -- -At trigger 'TRIG_DDL_SP' line: 4, col: 5 set term ;!
-
Implement custom DDL security, in this case restricting the running of DDL commands to certain users:
create exception e_access_denied 'Access denied'; set term !; create trigger trig_ddl before any ddl statement as begin if (current_user <> 'SUPER_USER') then exception e_access_denied; end!
Test
create procedure sp_test as begin end! -- The last command raises this exception and procedure SP_TEST is not created -- Statement failed, SQLSTATE = 42000 -- exception 1 -- -E_ACCESS_DENIED -- -Access denied -- -At trigger 'TRIG_DDL' line: 4, col: 5 set term ;!
Firebird has privileges for executing DDL statements, so writing a DDL trigger for this should be a last resort, if the same effect cannot be achieved using privileges.
-
Use a trigger to log DDL actions and attempts:
create sequence ddl_seq; create table ddl_log ( id bigint not null primary key, moment timestamp not null, user_name varchar(63) not null, event_type varchar(25) not null, object_type varchar(25) not null, ddl_event varchar(25) not null, object_name varchar(63) not null, sql_text blob sub_type text not null, ok char(1) not null ); set term !; create trigger trig_ddl_log_before before any ddl statement as declare id type of column ddl_log.id; begin -- We do the changes in an AUTONOMOUS TRANSACTION, so if an exception happens -- and the command didn't run, the log will survive. in autonomous transaction do begin insert into ddl_log (id, moment, user_name, event_type, object_type, ddl_event, object_name, sql_text, ok) values (next value for ddl_seq, current_timestamp, current_user, rdb$get_context('DDL_TRIGGER', 'EVENT_TYPE'), rdb$get_context('DDL_TRIGGER', 'OBJECT_TYPE'), rdb$get_context('DDL_TRIGGER', 'DDL_EVENT'), rdb$get_context('DDL_TRIGGER', 'OBJECT_NAME'), rdb$get_context('DDL_TRIGGER', 'SQL_TEXT'), 'N') returning id into id; rdb$set_context('USER_SESSION', 'trig_ddl_log_id', id); end end!
The above trigger will fire for this DDL command. It’s a good idea to use
-nodbtriggers
when working with them!create trigger trig_ddl_log_after after any ddl statement as begin -- Here we need an AUTONOMOUS TRANSACTION because the original transaction -- will not see the record inserted on the BEFORE trigger autonomous -- transaction if user transaction is not READ COMMITTED. in autonomous transaction do update ddl_log set ok = 'Y' where id = rdb$get_context('USER_SESSION', 'trig_ddl_log_id'); end! commit! set term ;! -- Delete the record about trig_ddl_log_after creation. delete from ddl_log; commit;
Test
-- This will be logged one time -- (as T1 did not exist, RECREATE acts as CREATE) with OK = Y. recreate table t1 ( n1 integer, n2 integer ); -- This will fail as T1 already exists, so OK will be N. create table t1 ( n1 integer, n2 integer ); -- T2 does not exist. There will be no log. drop table t2; -- This will be logged twice -- (as T1 exists, RECREATE acts as DROP and CREATE) with OK = Y. recreate table t1 ( n integer ); commit;
select id, ddl_event, object_name, sql_text, ok from ddl_log order by id; ID DDL_EVENT OBJECT_NAME SQL_TEXT OK === ========================= ======================= ================= ====== 2 CREATE TABLE T1 80:3 Y ==================================================== SQL_TEXT: recreate table t1 ( n1 integer, n2 integer ) ==================================================== 3 CREATE TABLE T1 80:2 N ==================================================== SQL_TEXT: create table t1 ( n1 integer, n2 integer ) ==================================================== 4 DROP TABLE T1 80:6 Y ==================================================== SQL_TEXT: recreate table t1 ( n integer ) ==================================================== 5 CREATE TABLE T1 80:9 Y ==================================================== SQL_TEXT: recreate table t1 ( n integer ) ====================================================
ALTER TRIGGER
, CREATE OR ALTER TRIGGER
, RECREATE TRIGGER
, DROP TRIGGER
, DDL Triggers in Chapter Procedural SQL (PSQL) Statements
5.7.2. ALTER TRIGGER
Modifying and deactivating an existing trigger
DSQL, ESQL
ALTER TRIGGER trigname
[ACTIVE | INACTIVE]
[{BEFORE | AFTER} <mutation_list>]
[POSITION number]
[{<psql_trigger> | <external-module-body>}]
<psql_trigger> ::=
[<sql_security>]
[<psql-module-body>]
<sql_security> ::=
SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER}
| DROP SQL SECURITY
!! See syntax of CREATE TRIGGER
for further rules !!
The ALTER TRIGGER
statement only allows certain changes to the header and body of a trigger.
Permitted Changes to Triggers
-
Status (
ACTIVE | INACTIVE
) -
Phase (
BEFORE | AFTER
) (of DML triggers) -
Events (of DML triggers)
-
Position in the firing order
-
Modifications to code in the trigger body
If an element is not specified, it remains unchanged.
A DML trigger cannot be changed to a database (or DDL) trigger. It is not possible to change the event(s) or phase of a database (or DDL) trigger. |
Reminders
The More than one DML event — The keyword |
Who Can Alter a Trigger?
DML triggers can be altered by:
-
The owner of the table (or view)
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY TABLE
or — for a view —ALTER ANY VIEW
privilege
Database and DDL triggers can be altered by:
-
Users with the
ALTER DATABASE
privilege
Examples using ALTER TRIGGER
-
Deactivating the
set_cust_no
trigger (switching it to the inactive status).ALTER TRIGGER set_cust_no INACTIVE;
-
Changing the firing order position of the
set_cust_no
trigger.ALTER TRIGGER set_cust_no POSITION 14;
-
Switching the
TR_CUST_LOG
trigger to the inactive status and modifying the list of events.ALTER TRIGGER TR_CUST_LOG INACTIVE AFTER INSERT OR UPDATE;
-
Switching the
tr_log_connect trigger
to the active status, changing its position and body.ALTER TRIGGER tr_log_connect ACTIVE POSITION 1 AS BEGIN INSERT INTO LOG_CONNECT (ID, USERNAME, ROLENAME, ATIME) VALUES (NEXT VALUE FOR SEQ_LOG_CONNECT, CURRENT_USER, CURRENT_ROLE, CURRENT_TIMESTAMP); END
5.7.3. CREATE OR ALTER TRIGGER
Creating a new trigger or altering an existing trigger
DSQL
CREATE OR ALTER TRIGGER trigname
{ <relation_trigger_legacy>
| <relation_trigger_sql2003>
| <database_trigger>
| <ddl_trigger> }
{<psql_trigger> | <external-module-body>}
!! See syntax of CREATE TRIGGER
for further rules !!
The CREATE OR ALTER TRIGGER
statement creates a new trigger if it does not exist;
otherwise it alters and recompiles it with the privileges intact and dependencies unaffected.
5.7.4. DROP TRIGGER
Dropping (deleting) an existing trigger
DSQL, ESQL
DROP TRIGGER trigname
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
trigname |
Trigger name |
The DROP TRIGGER
statement drops (deletes) an existing trigger.
Who Can Drop a Trigger?
DML triggers can be dropped by:
-
The owner of the table (or view)
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY TABLE
or — for a view —ALTER ANY VIEW
privilege
Database and DDL triggers can be dropped by:
-
Users with the
ALTER DATABASE
privilege
5.7.5. RECREATE TRIGGER
Creating a new trigger or recreating an existing trigger
DSQL
RECREATE TRIGGER trigname
{ <relation_trigger_legacy>
| <relation_trigger_sql2003>
| <database_trigger>
| <ddl_trigger> }
{<psql_trigger> | <external-module-body>}
!! See syntax of CREATE TRIGGER
for further rules !!
The RECREATE TRIGGER
statement creates a new trigger if no trigger with the specified name exists;
otherwise the RECREATE TRIGGER
statement tries to drop the existing trigger and create a new one.
The operation will fail on COMMIT
if the trigger is in use.
Be aware that dependency errors are not detected until the |
5.8. PROCEDURE
A stored procedure is a software module that can be called from a client, another procedure, function, executable block or trigger. Stored procedures, stored functions, executable blocks and triggers are written in procedural SQL (PSQL). Most SQL statements are available in PSQL as well, sometimes with some limitations or extensions, notable limitations are DDL and transaction control statements.
Stored procedures can have many input and output parameters.
5.8.1. CREATE PROCEDURE
Creating a new stored procedure
DSQL, ESQL
CREATE PROCEDURE procname [ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ] [RETURNS (<out_params>)] {<psql_procedure> | <external-module-body>} <in_params> ::= <inparam> [, <inparam> ...] <inparam> ::= <param_decl> [{= | DEFAULT} <value>] <out_params> ::= <outparam> [, <outparam> ...] <outparam> ::= <param_decl> <value> ::= {<literal> | NULL | <context_var>} <param_decl> ::= paramname <domain_or_non_array_type> [NOT NULL] [COLLATE collation] <type> ::= <datatype> | [TYPE OF] domain | TYPE OF COLUMN rel.col <domain_or_non_array_type> ::= !! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !! <psql_procedure> ::= [SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER}] <psql-module-body> <psql-module-body> ::= !! See Syntax of Module Body !! <external-module-body> ::= !! See Syntax of Module Body !!
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
procname |
Stored procedure name. The maximum length is 63 characters. Must be unique among all table, view and procedure names in the database |
inparam |
Input parameter description |
outparam |
Output parameter description |
literal |
A literal value that is assignment-compatible with the data type of the parameter |
context_var |
Any context variable whose type is compatible with the data type of the parameter |
paramname |
The name of an input or output parameter of the procedure. The maximum length is 63 characters. The name of the parameter must be unique among input and output parameters of the procedure and its local variables |
collation |
Collation sequence |
The CREATE PROCEDURE
statement creates a new stored procedure.
The name of the procedure must be unique among the names of all stored procedures, tables and views in the database.
CREATE PROCEDURE
is a compound statement, consisting of a header and a body.
The header specifies the name of the procedure and declares input parameters and the output parameters, if any, that are to be returned by the procedure.
The procedure body consists of declarations for any local variables and named cursors that will be used by the procedure, followed by one or more statements, or blocks of statements, all enclosed in an outer block that begins with the keyword BEGIN
and ends with the keyword END
.
Declarations and embedded statements are terminated with semi-colons (‘;
’).
Statement Terminators
Some SQL statement editors — specifically the isql utility that comes with Firebird and possibly some third-party editors — employ an internal convention that requires all statements to be terminated with a semi-colon. This creates a conflict with PSQL syntax when coding in these environments. If you are unacquainted with this problem and its solution, please study the details in the PSQL chapter in the section entitled Switching the Terminator in isql.
Parameters
Each parameter has a data type.
The NOT NULL
constraint can also be specified for any parameter, to prevent NULL
being passed or assigned to it.
A collation sequence can be specified for string-type parameters, using the COLLATE
clause.
- Input Parameters
-
Input parameters are presented as a parenthesized list following the name of the function. They are passed by value into the procedure, so any changes inside the procedure has no effect on the parameters in the caller. Input parameters may have default values. Parameters with default values specified must be added at the end of the list of parameters.
- Output Parameters
-
The optional
RETURNS
clause is for specifying a parenthesised list of output parameters for the stored procedure.
SQL Security
The SQL SECURITY
clause specifies the security context for executing other routines or inserting into other tables.
When SQL Security is not specified, the default value of the database is applied at runtime.
The SQL SECURITY
clause can only be specified for PSQL procedures, and is not valid for procedures defined in a package.
See also SQL Security in chapter Security.
Variable, Cursor and Subroutine Declarations
The optional declarations section, located at the start of the body of the procedure definition, defines variables (including cursors) and subroutines local to the procedure.
Local variable declarations follow the same rules as parameters regarding specification of the data type.
See details in the PSQL chapter for DECLARE VARIABLE
, DECLARE CURSOR
, DECLARE FUNCTION
, and DECLARE PROCEDURE
.
External UDR Procedures
A stored procedure can also be located in an external module.
In this case, instead of a procedure body, the CREATE PROCEDURE
specifies the location of the procedure in the external module using the EXTERNAL
clause.
The optional NAME
clause specifies the name of the external module, the name of the procedure inside the module, and — optionally — user-defined information.
The required ENGINE
clause specifies the name of the UDR engine that handles communication between Firebird and the external module.
The optional AS
clause accepts a string literal “body”, which can be used by the engine or module for various purposes.
Who Can Create a Procedure
The CREATE PROCEDURE
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE PROCEDURE
privilege
The user executing the CREATE PROCEDURE
statement becomes the owner of the table.
Examples
-
Creating a stored procedure that inserts a record into the
BREED
table and returns the code of the inserted record:CREATE PROCEDURE ADD_BREED ( NAME D_BREEDNAME, /* Domain attributes are inherited */ NAME_EN TYPE OF D_BREEDNAME, /* Only the domain type is inherited */ SHORTNAME TYPE OF COLUMN BREED.SHORTNAME, /* The table column type is inherited */ REMARK VARCHAR(120) CHARACTER SET WIN1251 COLLATE PXW_CYRL, CODE_ANIMAL INT NOT NULL DEFAULT 1 ) RETURNS ( CODE_BREED INT ) AS BEGIN INSERT INTO BREED ( CODE_ANIMAL, NAME, NAME_EN, SHORTNAME, REMARK) VALUES ( :CODE_ANIMAL, :NAME, :NAME_EN, :SHORTNAME, :REMARK) RETURNING CODE_BREED INTO CODE_BREED; END
-
Creating a selectable stored procedure that generates data for mailing labels (from
employee.fdb
):CREATE PROCEDURE mail_label (cust_no INTEGER) RETURNS (line1 CHAR(40), line2 CHAR(40), line3 CHAR(40), line4 CHAR(40), line5 CHAR(40), line6 CHAR(40)) AS DECLARE VARIABLE customer VARCHAR(25); DECLARE VARIABLE first_name VARCHAR(15); DECLARE VARIABLE last_name VARCHAR(20); DECLARE VARIABLE addr1 VARCHAR(30); DECLARE VARIABLE addr2 VARCHAR(30); DECLARE VARIABLE city VARCHAR(25); DECLARE VARIABLE state VARCHAR(15); DECLARE VARIABLE country VARCHAR(15); DECLARE VARIABLE postcode VARCHAR(12); DECLARE VARIABLE cnt INTEGER; BEGIN line1 = ''; line2 = ''; line3 = ''; line4 = ''; line5 = ''; line6 = ''; SELECT customer, contact_first, contact_last, address_line1, address_line2, city, state_province, country, postal_code FROM CUSTOMER WHERE cust_no = :cust_no INTO :customer, :first_name, :last_name, :addr1, :addr2, :city, :state, :country, :postcode; IF (customer IS NOT NULL) THEN line1 = customer; IF (first_name IS NOT NULL) THEN line2 = first_name || ' ' || last_name; ELSE line2 = last_name; IF (addr1 IS NOT NULL) THEN line3 = addr1; IF (addr2 IS NOT NULL) THEN line4 = addr2; IF (country = 'USA') THEN BEGIN IF (city IS NOT NULL) THEN line5 = city || ', ' || state || ' ' || postcode; ELSE line5 = state || ' ' || postcode; END ELSE BEGIN IF (city IS NOT NULL) THEN line5 = city || ', ' || state; ELSE line5 = state; line6 = country || ' ' || postcode; END SUSPEND; -- the statement that sends an output row to the buffer -- and makes the procedure "selectable" END
-
With
DEFINER
set for procedurep
, userUS
needs only theEXECUTE
privilege onp
. If it were set forINVOKER
, either the user or the procedure would also need theINSERT
privilege on tablet
.set term ^; create procedure p (i integer) SQL SECURITY DEFINER as begin insert into t values (:i); end^ set term ;^ grant execute on procedure p to user us; commit; connect 'localhost:/tmp/17.fdb' user us password 'pas'; execute procedure p(1);
5.8.2. ALTER PROCEDURE
Modifying an existing stored procedure
DSQL, ESQL
ALTER PROCEDURE procname [ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ]
[RETURNS (<out_params>)]
{<psql_procedure> | <external-module-body>}
!! See syntax of CREATE PROCEDURE
for further rules !!
The ALTER PROCEDURE
statement allows the following changes to a stored procedure definition:
-
the set and characteristics of input and output parameters
-
local variables
-
code in the body of the stored procedure
After ALTER PROCEDURE
executes, existing privileges remain intact and dependencies are not affected.
Altering a procedure without specifying the SQL SECURITY
clause will remove the SQL Security property if currently set for this procedure.
This means the behaviour will revert to the database default.
Take care about changing the number and type of input and output parameters in stored procedures.
Existing application code and procedures and triggers that call it could become invalid because the new description of the parameters is incompatible with the old calling format.
For information on how to troubleshoot such a situation, see the article The |
Who Can Alter a Procedure
The ALTER PROCEDURE
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the stored procedure
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY PROCEDURE
privilege
5.8.3. CREATE OR ALTER PROCEDURE
Creating a new stored procedure or altering an existing one
DSQL
CREATE OR ALTER PROCEDURE procname [ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ]
[RETURNS (<out_params>)]
{<psql_procedure> | <external-module-body>}
!! See syntax of CREATE PROCEDURE
for further rules !!
The CREATE OR ALTER PROCEDURE
statement creates a new stored procedure or alters an existing one.
If the stored procedure does not exist, it will be created by invoking a CREATE PROCEDURE
statement transparently.
If the procedure already exists, it will be altered and compiled without affecting its existing privileges and dependencies.
5.8.4. DROP PROCEDURE
Deleting a stored procedure
DSQL, ESQL
DROP PROCEDURE procname
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
procname |
Name of an existing stored procedure |
The DROP PROCEDURE
statement deletes an existing stored procedure.
If the stored procedure has any dependencies, the attempt to delete it will fail and the appropriate error will be raised.
Who Can Drop a Procedure
The ALTER PROCEDURE
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the stored procedure
-
Users with the
DROP ANY PROCEDURE
privilege
5.8.5. RECREATE PROCEDURE
Creating a new stored procedure or recreating an existing one
DSQL
RECREATE PROCEDURE procname [ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ]
[RETURNS (<out_params>)]
{<psql_procedure> | <external-module-body>}
!! See syntax of CREATE PROCEDURE
for further rules !!
The RECREATE PROCEDURE
statement creates a new stored procedure or recreates an existing one.
If there is a procedure with this name already, the engine will try to delete it and create a new one.
Recreating an existing procedure will fail at the COMMIT
request if the procedure has dependencies.
Be aware that dependency errors are not detected until the |
After a procedure is successfully recreated, privileges to execute the stored procedure, and the privileges of the stored procedure itself are dropped.
RECREATE PROCEDURE
Example
GET_EMP_PROJ
stored procedure or recreating the existing GET_EMP_PROJ
stored procedure.RECREATE PROCEDURE GET_EMP_PROJ (
EMP_NO SMALLINT)
RETURNS (
PROJ_ID VARCHAR(20))
AS
BEGIN
FOR SELECT
PROJ_ID
FROM
EMPLOYEE_PROJECT
WHERE
EMP_NO = :emp_no
INTO :proj_id
DO
SUSPEND;
END
5.9. FUNCTION
A stored function is a user-defined function stored in the metadata of a database, and running on the server. Stored functions can be called by stored procedures, stored functions (including the function itself), triggers and client programs. When a stored function calls itself, such a stored function is called a recursive function.
Unlike stored procedures, stored functions always return a single scalar value.
To return a value from a stored functions, use the RETURN
statement, which immediately ends the function.
5.9.1. CREATE FUNCTION
Creating a new stored function
DSQL
CREATE FUNCTION funcname [ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ] RETURNS <domain_or_non_array_type> [COLLATE collation] [DETERMINISTIC] {<psql_function> | <external-module-body>} <in_params> ::= <inparam> [, <inparam> ... ] <inparam> ::= <param-decl> [ { = | DEFAULT } <value> ] <value> ::= { <literal> | NULL | <context-var> } <param-decl> ::= paramname <domain_or_non_array_type> [NOT NULL] [COLLATE collation] <domain_or_non_array_type> ::= !! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !! <psql_function> ::= [SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER}] <psql-module-body> <psql-module-body> ::= !! See Syntax of Module Body !! <external-module-body> ::= !! See Syntax of Module Body !!
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
funcname |
Stored function name. The maximum length is 63 characters. Must be unique among all function names in the database. |
inparam |
Input parameter description |
collation |
Collation sequence |
literal |
A literal value that is assignment-compatible with the data type of the parameter |
context-var |
Any context variable whose type is compatible with the data type of the parameter |
paramname |
The name of an input parameter of the function. The maximum length is 63 characters. The name of the parameter must be unique among input parameters of the function and its local variables. |
The CREATE FUNCTION
statement creates a new stored function.
The stored function name must be unique among the names of all stored and external (legacy) functions, excluding sub-functions or functions in packages.
For sub-functions or functions in packages, the name must be unique within its module (package, stored procedure, stored function, trigger).
It is advisable to not reuse function names between global stored functions and stored functions in packages, although this is legal. At the moment, it is not possible to call a function or procedure from the global namespace from inside a package, if that package defines a function or procedure with the same name. In that situation, the function or procedure of the package will be called. |
CREATE FUNCTION
is a compound statement with a header and a body.
The header defines the name of the stored function, and declares input parameters and return type.
The function body consists of optional declarations of local variables, named cursors, and subroutines (sub-functions and sub-procedures), and one or more statements or statement blocks, enclosed in an outer block that starts with the keyword BEGIN
and ends with the keyword END
.
Declarations and statements inside the function body must be terminated with a semicolon (‘;
’).
Statement Terminators
Some SQL statement editors — specifically the isql utility that comes with Firebird and possibly some third-party editors — employ an internal convention that requires all statements to be terminated with a semi-colon. This creates a conflict with PSQL syntax when coding in these environments. If you are unacquainted with this problem and its solution, please study the details in the PSQL chapter in the section entitled Switching the Terminator in isql.
Parameters
Each parameter has a data type.
A collation sequence can be specified for string-type parameters, using the COLLATE
clause.
- Input Parameters
-
Input parameters are presented as a parenthesized list following the name of the function. They are passed by value into the function, so any changes inside the function has no effect on the parameters in the caller. The
NOT NULL
constraint can also be specified for any input parameter, to preventNULL
being passed or assigned to it. Input parameters may have default values. Parameters with default values specified must be added at the end of the list of parameters. - Output Parameter
-
The
RETURNS
clause specifies the return type of the stored function. If a function returns a string value, then it is possible to specify the collation using theCOLLATE
clause. As a return type, you can specify a data type, a domain name, the type of a domain (usingTYPE OF
), or the type of a column of a table or view (usingTYPE OF COLUMN
).
Deterministic functions
The optional DETERMINISTIC
clause indicates that the function is deterministic.
Deterministic functions always return the same result for the same set of inputs.
Non-deterministic functions can return different results for each invocation, even for the same set of inputs.
If a function is specified as deterministic, then such a function might not be called again if it has already been called once with the given set of inputs, and instead takes the result from a metadata cache.
Current versions of Firebird do not actually cache results of deterministic functions. Specifying the This is easily demonstrated with an example:
|
SQL Security
The SQL SECURITY
clause specifies the security context for executing other routines or inserting into other tables.
When SQL Security is not specified, the default value of the database is applied at runtime.
The SQL SECURITY
clause can only be specified for PSQL functions, and is not valid for functions defined in a package.
See also SQL Security in chapter Security.
Variable, Cursor and Subroutine Declarations
The optional declarations section, located at the start of the body of the function definition, defines variables (including cursors) and subroutines local to the function.
Local variable declarations follow the same rules as parameters regarding specification of the data type.
See details in the PSQL chapter for DECLARE VARIABLE
, DECLARE CURSOR
, DECLARE FUNCTION
, and DECLARE PROCEDURE
.
Function Body
The header section is followed by the function body, consisting of one or more PSQL statements enclosed between the outer keywords BEGIN
and END
.
Multiple BEGIN … END
blocks of terminated statements may be embedded inside the procedure body.
External UDR Functions
A stored function can also be located in an external module.
In this case, instead of a function body, the CREATE FUNCTION
specifies the location of the function in the external module using the EXTERNAL
clause.
The optional NAME
clause specifies the name of the external module, the name of the function inside the module, and — optionally — user-defined information.
The required ENGINE
clause specifies the name of the UDR engine that handles communication between Firebird and the external module.
The optional AS
clause accepts a string literal “body”, which can be used by the engine or module for various purposes.
External UDR (User Defined Routine) functions created using UDFs are deprecated, and a legacy from previous Firebird functions. Their capabilities are significantly inferior to the capabilities to the new type of external UDR functions. |
Who Can Create a Function
The CREATE FUNCTION
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE FUNCTION
privilege
The user who created the stored function becomes its owner.
CREATE FUNCTION
Examples
-
Creating a stored function
CREATE FUNCTION ADD_INT (A INT, B INT DEFAULT 0) RETURNS INT AS BEGIN RETURN A + B; END
Calling in a select:
SELECT ADD_INT(2, 3) AS R FROM RDB$DATABASE
Call inside PSQL code, the second optional parameter is not specified:
MY_VAR = ADD_INT(A);
-
Creating a deterministic stored function
CREATE FUNCTION FN_E() RETURNS DOUBLE PRECISION DETERMINISTIC AS BEGIN RETURN EXP(1); END
-
Creating a stored function with table column type parameters
Returns the name of a type by field name and value
CREATE FUNCTION GET_MNEMONIC ( AFIELD_NAME TYPE OF COLUMN RDB$TYPES.RDB$FIELD_NAME, ATYPE TYPE OF COLUMN RDB$TYPES.RDB$TYPE) RETURNS TYPE OF COLUMN RDB$TYPES.RDB$TYPE_NAME AS BEGIN RETURN (SELECT RDB$TYPE_NAME FROM RDB$TYPES WHERE RDB$FIELD_NAME = :AFIELD_NAME AND RDB$TYPE = :ATYPE); END
-
Creating an external stored function
Create a function located in an external module (UDR). Function implementation is located in the external module
udrcpp_example
. The name of the function inside the module iswait_event
.CREATE FUNCTION wait_event ( event_name varchar (31) CHARACTER SET ascii ) RETURNS INTEGER EXTERNAL NAME 'udrcpp_example!Wait_event' ENGINE udr
-
Creating a stored function containing a sub-function
Creating a function to convert a number to hexadecimal format.
CREATE FUNCTION INT_TO_HEX ( ANumber BIGINT , AByte_Per_Number SMALLINT = 8) RETURNS CHAR (66) AS DECLARE VARIABLE xMod SMALLINT ; DECLARE VARIABLE xResult VARCHAR (64); DECLARE FUNCTION TO_HEX (ANum SMALLINT ) RETURNS CHAR AS BEGIN RETURN CASE ANum WHEN 0 THEN '0' WHEN 1 THEN '1' WHEN 2 THEN '2' WHEN 3 THEN '3' WHEN 4 THEN '4' WHEN 5 THEN '5' WHEN 6 THEN '6' WHEN 7 THEN '7' WHEN 8 THEN '8' WHEN 9 THEN '9' WHEN 10 THEN 'A' WHEN 11 THEN 'B' WHEN 12 THEN 'C' WHEN 13 THEN 'D' WHEN 14 THEN 'E' WHEN 15 THEN 'F' ELSE NULL END; END BEGIN xMod = MOD (ANumber, 16); ANumber = ANumber / 16; xResult = TO_HEX (xMod); WHILE (ANUMBER> 0) DO BEGIN xMod = MOD (ANumber, 16); ANumber = ANumber / 16; xResult = TO_HEX (xMod) || xResult; END RETURN '0x' || LPAD (xResult, AByte_Per_Number * 2, '0' ); END
-
With
DEFINER
set for functionf
, userUS
needs only theEXECUTE
privilege onf
. If it were set forINVOKER
, the user would also need theINSERT
privilege on tablet
.set term ^; create function f (i integer) returns int SQL SECURITY DEFINER as begin insert into t values (:i); return i + 1; end^ set term ;^ grant execute on function f to user us; commit; connect 'localhost:/tmp/59.fdb' user us password 'pas'; select f(3) from rdb$database;
5.9.2. ALTER FUNCTION
Modifying an existing stored function
DSQL
ALTER FUNCTION funcname
[ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ]
RETURNS <domain_or_non_array_type> [COLLATE collation]
[DETERMINISTIC]
{<psql_function> | <external-module-body>}
!! See syntax of CREATE FUNCTION
for further rules !!
The ALTER FUNCTION
statement allows the following changes to a stored function definition:
-
the set and characteristics of input and output type
-
local variables, named cursors, and subroutines
-
code in the body of the stored procedure
For external functions (UDR), you can change the entry point and engine name.
For legacy external functions declared using DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION
— also known as UDFs — it is not possible to convert to PSQL and vice versa.
After ALTER FUNCTION
executes, existing privileges remain intact and dependencies are not affected.
Altering a function without specifying the SQL SECURITY
clause will remove the SQL Security property if currently set for this function.
This means the behaviour will revert to the database default.
Take care about changing the number and type of input parameters and the output type of a stored function.
Existing application code and procedures, functions and triggers that call it could become invalid because the new description of the parameters is incompatible with the old calling format.
For information on how to troubleshoot such a situation, see the article The |
Who Can Alter a Function
The ALTER FUNCTION
statement can be executed by:
-
Owner of the stored function
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY FUNCTION
privilege
5.9.3. CREATE OR ALTER FUNCTION
Creating a new or modifying an existing stored function
DSQL
CREATE OR ALTER FUNCTION funcname
[ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ]
RETURNS <domain_or_non_array_type> [COLLATE collation]
[DETERMINISTIC]
{<psql_function> | <external-module-body>}
!! See syntax of CREATE FUNCTION
for further rules !!
The CREATE OR ALTER FUNCTION
statement creates a new stored function or alters an existing one.
If the stored function does not exist, it will be created by invoking a CREATE FUNCTION
statement transparently.
If the function already exists, it will be altered and compiled (through ALTER FUNCTION
) without affecting its existing privileges and dependencies.
5.9.4. DROP FUNCTION
Dropping a stored function
DSQL
DROP FUNCTION funcname
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
funcname |
Stored function name. The maximum length is 63 characters. Must be unique among all function names in the database. |
The DROP FUNCTION
statement deletes an existing stored function.
If the stored function has any dependencies, the attempt to delete it will fail, and the appropriate error will be raised.
Who Can Drop a Function
The DROP FUNCTION
statement can be executed by:
-
Owner of the stored function
-
Users with the
DROP ANY FUNCTION
privilege
5.9.5. RECREATE FUNCTION
Creating a new stored function or recreating an existing one
DSQL
RECREATE FUNCTION funcname
[ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ]
RETURNS <domain_or_non_array_type> [COLLATE collation]
[DETERMINISTIC]
{<psql_function> | <external-module-body>}
!! See syntax of CREATE FUNCTION
for further rules !!
The RECREATE FUNCTION
statement creates a new stored function or recreates an existing one.
If there is a function with this name already, the engine will try to drop it and then create a new one.
Recreating an existing function will fail at COMMIT
if the function has dependencies.
Be aware that dependency errors are not detected until the |
After a procedure is successfully recreated, existing privileges to execute the stored function and the privileges of the stored function itself are dropped.
5.10. EXTERNAL FUNCTION
External functions (UDFs) have been aggressively deprecated in Firebird 4.0:
|
External functions, also known as “User-Defined Functions” (UDFs) are programs written in an external programming language and stored in dynamically loaded libraries. Once declared in a database, they become available in dynamic and procedural statements as though they were implemented in the SQL language.
External functions extend the possibilities for processing data with SQL considerably.
To make a function available to a database, it is declared using the statement DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION
.
The library containing a function is loaded when any function included in it is called.
External functions declared as |
External functions may be contained in more than one library — or “module”, as it is referred to in the syntax. |
UDFs are fundamentally insecure.
We recommend avoiding their use whenever possible, and disabling UDFs in your database configuration ( |
5.10.1. DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION
Declaring a user-defined function (UDF) to the database
DSQL, ESQL
DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION funcname [{ <arg_desc_list> | ( <arg_desc_list> ) }] RETURNS { <return_value> | ( <return_value> ) } ENTRY_POINT 'entry_point' MODULE_NAME 'library_name' <arg_desc_list> ::= <arg_type_decl> [, <arg_type_decl> ...] <arg_type_decl> ::= <udf_data_type> [BY {DESCRIPTOR | SCALAR_ARRAY} | NULL] <udf_data_type> ::= <scalar_datatype> | BLOB | CSTRING(length) [ CHARACTER SET charset ] <scalar_datatype> ::= !! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !! <return_value> ::= { <udf_data_type> | PARAMETER param_num } [{ BY VALUE | BY DESCRIPTOR [FREE_IT] | FREE_IT }]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
funcname |
Function name in the database.
The maximum length is 63 characters.
It should be unique among all internal and external function names in the database and need not be the same name as the name exported from the UDF library via |
entry_point |
The exported name of the function |
library_name |
The name of the module ( |
length |
The maximum length of a null-terminated string, specified in bytes |
charset |
Character set of the CSTRING |
param_num |
The number of the input parameter, numbered from 1 in the list of input parameters in the declaration, describing the data type that will be returned by the function |
The DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION
statement makes a user-defined function available in the database.
UDF declarations must be made in each database that is going to use them.
There is no need to declare UDFs that will never be used.
The name of the external function must be unique among all function names.
It may be different from the exported name of the function, as specified in the ENTRY_POINT
argument.
DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION
Input Parameters
The input parameters of the function follow the name of the function and are separated with commas.
Each parameter has an SQL data type specified for it.
Arrays cannot be used as function parameters.
In addition to the SQL types, the CSTRING
type is available for specifying a null-terminated string with a maximum length of LENGTH
bytes.
There are several mechanisms for passing a parameter from the Firebird engine to an external function, each of these mechanisms will be discussed below.
By default, input parameters are passed by reference. There is no separate clause to explicitly indicate that parameters are passed by reference.
When passing a NULL
value by reference, it is converted to the equivalent of zero, for example, a number ‘0
’ or an empty string (“''
”).
If the keyword NULL
is specified after a parameter, then with passing a NULL
values, the null pointer will be passed to the external function.
Declaring a function with the |
If BY DESCRIPTOR
is specified, then the input parameter is passed by descriptor.
In this case, the UDF parameter will receive a pointer to an internal structure known as a descriptor.
The descriptor contains information about the data type, sub-type, precision, character set and collation, scale, a pointer to the data itself and some flags, including the NULL
indicator.
This declaration only works if the external function is written using a handle.
When passing a function parameter by descriptor, the passed value is not cast to the declared data type. |
The BY SCALAR_ARRAY
clause is used when passing arrays as input parameters.
Unlike other types, you cannot return an array from a UDF.
Clauses and Keywords
RETURNS
clause-
(Required) specifies the output parameter returned by the function. A function is scalar, it returns one value (output parameter). The output parameter can be of any SQL type (except an array or an array element) or a null-terminated string (
CSTRING
). The output parameter can be passed by reference (the default), by descriptor or by value. If theBY DESCRIPTOR
clause is specified, the output parameter is passed by descriptor. If theBY VALUE
clause is specified, the output parameter is passed by value. PARAMETER
keyword-
specifies that the function returns the value from the parameter under number param_num. It is necessary if you need to return a value of data type
BLOB
. FREE_IT
keyword-
means that the memory allocated for storing the return value will be freed after the function is executed. It is used only if the memory was allocated dynamically in the UDF. In such a UDF, the memory must be allocated with the help of the
ib_util_malloc
function from theib_util
module, a requirement for compatibility with the functions used in Firebird code and in the code of the shipped UDF modules, for allocating and freeing memory. ENTRY_POINT
clause-
specifies the name of the entry point (the name of the imported function), as exported from the module.
MODULE_NAME
clause-
defines the name of the module where the exported function is located. The link to the module should not be the full path and extension of the file, if that can be avoided. If the module is located in the default location (in the
../UDF
subdirectory of the Firebird server root) or in a location explicitly configured infirebird.conf
, it makes it easier to move the database between different platforms. TheUDFAccess
parameter in the firebird.conf file allows access restrictions to external functions modules to be configured.
Any user connected to the database can declare an external function (UDF).
Who Can Create an External Function
The DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE FUNCTION
privilege
The user who created the function becomes its owner.
Examples using DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION
-
Declaring the
addDay
external function located in thefbudf
module. The input and output parameters are passed by reference.DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION addDay TIMESTAMP, INT RETURNS TIMESTAMP ENTRY_POINT 'addDay' MODULE_NAME 'fbudf';
-
Declaring the
invl
external function located in thefbudf
module. The input and output parameters are passed by descriptor.DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION invl INT BY DESCRIPTOR, INT BY DESCRIPTOR RETURNS INT BY DESCRIPTOR ENTRY_POINT 'idNvl' MODULE_NAME 'fbudf';
-
Declaring the
isLeapYear
external function located in thefbudf
module. The input parameter is passed by reference, while the output parameter is passed by value.DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION isLeapYear TIMESTAMP RETURNS INT BY VALUE ENTRY_POINT 'isLeapYear' MODULE_NAME 'fbudf';
-
Declaring the
i64Truncate
external function located in thefbudf
module. The input and output parameters are passed by descriptor. The second parameter of the function is used as the return value.DECLARE EXTERNAL FUNCTION i64Truncate NUMERIC(18) BY DESCRIPTOR, NUMERIC(18) BY DESCRIPTOR RETURNS PARAMETER 2 ENTRY_POINT 'fbtruncate' MODULE_NAME 'fbudf';
5.10.2. ALTER EXTERNAL FUNCTION
Changing the entry point and/or the module name for a user-defined function (UDF)
DSQL
ALTER EXTERNAL FUNCTION funcname [ENTRY_POINT 'new_entry_point'] [MODULE_NAME 'new_library_name']
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
funcname |
Function name in the database |
new_entry_point |
The new exported name of the function |
new_library_name |
The new name of the module ( |
The ALTER EXTERNAL FUNCTION
statement changes the entry point and/or the module name for a user-defined function (UDF).
Existing dependencies remain intact after the statement containing the change(s) is executed.
- The
ENTRY_POINT
clause -
is for specifying the new entry point (the name of the function as exported from the module).
- The
MODULE_NAME
clause -
is for specifying the new name of the module where the exported function is located.
Any user connected to the database can change the entry point and the module name.
Who Can Alter an External Function
The ALTER EXTERNAL FUNCTION
statement can be executed by:
-
Owner of the external function
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY FUNCTION
privilege
5.10.3. DROP EXTERNAL FUNCTION
Removing a user-defined function (UDF) from a database
DSQL, ESQL
DROP EXTERNAL FUNCTION funcname
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
funcname |
Function name in the database |
The DROP EXTERNAL FUNCTION
statement deletes the declaration of a user-defined function from the database.
If there are any dependencies on the external function, the statement will fail and the appropriate error will be raised.
Any user connected to the database can delete the declaration of an internal function.
Who Can Drop an External Function
The DROP EXTERNAL FUNCTION
statement can be executed by:
-
Owner of the external function
-
Users with the
DROP ANY FUNCTION
privilege
5.11. PACKAGE
A package is a group of procedures and functions managed as one entity.
5.11.1. CREATE PACKAGE
Declaring the package header
DSQL
CREATE PACKAGE package_name [SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER}] AS BEGIN [ <package_item> ... ] END <package_item> ::= <function_decl>; | <procedure_decl>; <function_decl> ::= FUNCTION funcname [ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ] RETURNS <domain_or_non_array_type> [COLLATE collation] [DETERMINISTIC] <procedure_decl> ::= PROCEDURE procname [ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ] [RETURNS (<out_params>)] <in_params> ::= <inparam> [, <inparam> ... ] <inparam> ::= <param_decl> [ { = | DEFAULT } <value> ] <out_params> ::= <outparam> [, <outparam> ...] <outparam> ::= <param_decl> <value> ::= { literal | NULL | context_var } <param-decl> ::= paramname <domain_or_non_array_type> [NOT NULL] [COLLATE collation] <domain_or_non_array_type> ::= !! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !!
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
package_name |
Package name. The maximum length is 63 characters. The package name must be unique among all package names. |
function_decl |
Function declaration |
procedure_decl |
Procedure declaration |
func_name |
Function name. The maximum length is 63 characters. The function name must be unique within the package. |
proc_name |
Procedure name. The maximum length is 63 characters. The function name must be unique within the package. |
collation |
Collation sequence |
inparam |
Input parameter declaration |
outparam |
Output parameter declaration |
literal |
A literal value that is assignment-compatible with the data type of the parameter |
context_var |
Any context variable that is assignment-compatible with the data type of the parameter |
paramname |
The name of an input parameter of a procedure or function, or an output parameter of a procedure. The maximum length is 63 characters. The name of the parameter must be unique among input and output parameters of the procedure or function. |
The CREATE PACKAGE
statement creates a new package header.
Routines (procedures and functions) declared in the package header are available outside the package using the full identifier (package_name.proc_name or package_name.func_name).
Routines defined only in the package body — but not in the package header — are not visible outside the package.
Package procedure and function names may shadow global routines
If a package header or package body declares a procedure or function with the same name as a stored procedure or function in the global namespace, it is not possible to call that global procedure or function from the package body. In this case, the procedure or function of the package will always be called. For this reason, it is recommended that the names of stored procedures and functions in packages do not overlap with names of stored procedures and functions in the global namespace. |
Statement Terminators
Some SQL statement editors — specifically the isql utility that comes with Firebird and possibly some third-party editors — employ an internal convention that requires all statements to be terminated with a semicolon. This creates a conflict with PSQL syntax when coding in these environments. If you are unacquainted with this problem and its solution, please study the details in the PSQL chapter in the section entitled Switching the Terminator in isql.
SQL Security
The SQL SECURITY
clause specifies the security context for executing other routines or inserting into other tables from functions or procedures defined in this package.
When SQL Security is not specified, the default value of the database is applied at runtime.
The SQL SECURITY
clause can only be specified for the package, not for individual procedures and functions of the package.
See also SQL Security in chapter Security.
Procedure and Function Parameters
For details on stored procedure parameters, see Parameters in CREATE PROCEDURE
.
For details on function parameters, see Parameters in CREATE FUNCTION
.
Who Can Create a Package
The CREATE PACKAGE
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE PACKAGE
privilege
The user who created the package header becomes its owner.
Examples of CREATE PACKAGE
-
Create a package header
CREATE PACKAGE APP_VAR AS BEGIN FUNCTION GET_DATEBEGIN() RETURNS DATE DETERMINISTIC; FUNCTION GET_DATEEND() RETURNS DATE DETERMINISTIC; PROCEDURE SET_DATERANGE(ADATEBEGIN DATE, ADATEEND DATE DEFAULT CURRENT_DATE); END
-
With
DEFINER
set for packagepk
, userUS
needs only theEXECUTE
privilege onpk
. If it were set forINVOKER
, either the user or the package would also need theINSERT
privilege on tablet
.create table t (i integer); set term ^; create package pk SQL SECURITY DEFINER as begin function f(i integer) returns int; end^ create package body pk as begin function f(i integer) returns int as begin insert into t values (:i); return i + 1; end end^ set term ;^ grant execute on package pk to user us; commit; connect 'localhost:/tmp/69.fdb' user us password 'pas'; select pk.f(3) from rdb$database;
5.11.2. ALTER PACKAGE
Altering the package header
DSQL
ALTER PACKAGE package_name
[SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER}]
AS
BEGIN
[ <package_item> ... ]
END
!! See syntax of CREATE PACKAGE
for further rules!!
The ALTER PACKAGE
statement modifies the package header.
It can be used to change the number and definition of procedures and functions, including their input and output parameters.
However, the source and compiled form of the package body is retained, though the body might be incompatible after the change to the package header.
The validity of a package body for the defined header is stored in the column RDB$PACKAGES.RDB$VALID_BODY_FLAG
.
Altering a package without specifying the SQL SECURITY
clause will remove the SQL Security property if currently set for this package.
This means the behaviour will revert to the database default.
Who Can Alter a Package
The ALTER PACKAGE
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the package
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY PACKAGE
privilege
5.11.3. CREATE OR ALTER PACKAGE
Creating a new or altering an existing package header
DSQL
CREATE OR ALTER PACKAGE package_name
[SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER}]
AS
BEGIN
[ <package_item> ... ]
END
!! See syntax of CREATE PACKAGE
for further rules!!
The CREATE OR ALTER PACKAGE
statement creates a new package or modifies an existing package header.
If the package header does not exist, it will be created using CREATE PACKAGE
.
If it already exists, then it will be modified using ALTER PACKAGE
while retaining existing privileges and dependencies.
Examples of CREATE OR ALTER PACKAGE
CREATE OR ALTER PACKAGE APP_VAR
AS
BEGIN
FUNCTION GET_DATEBEGIN() RETURNS DATE DETERMINISTIC;
FUNCTION GET_DATEEND() RETURNS DATE DETERMINISTIC;
PROCEDURE SET_DATERANGE(ADATEBEGIN DATE,
ADATEEND DATE DEFAULT CURRENT_DATE);
END
5.11.4. DROP PACKAGE
Dropping a package header
DSQL
DROP PACKAGE package_name
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
package_name |
Package name |
The DROP PACKAGE
statement deletes an existing package header.
If a package body exists, it will be dropped together with the package header.
If there are still dependencies on the package, an error will be raised.
Who Can Drop a Package
The DROP PACKAGE
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the package
-
Users with the
DROP ANY PACKAGE
privilege
5.11.5. RECREATE PACKAGE
Creating a new or recreating an existing package header
DSQL
RECREATE PACKAGE package_name
[SQL SECURITY {INVOKER | DEFINER}]
AS
BEGIN
[ <package_item> ... ]
END
!! See syntax of CREATE PACKAGE
for further rules!!
The RECREATE PACKAGE
statement creates a new package or recreates an existing package header.
If a package header with the same name already exists, then this statement will first drop it and then create a new package header.
It is not possible to recreate the package header if there are still dependencies on the existing package, or if the body of the package exists.
Existing privileges of the package itself are not preserved, nor are privileges to execute the procedures or functions of the package.
Examples of RECREATE PACKAGE
RECREATE PACKAGE APP_VAR
AS
BEGIN
FUNCTION GET_DATEBEGIN() RETURNS DATE DETERMINISTIC;
FUNCTION GET_DATEEND() RETURNS DATE DETERMINISTIC;
PROCEDURE SET_DATERANGE(ADATEBEGIN DATE,
ADATEEND DATE DEFAULT CURRENT_DATE);
END
5.12. PACKAGE BODY
5.12.1. CREATE PACKAGE BODY
Creating the package body
DSQL
CREATE PACKAGE BODY name AS BEGIN [ <package_item> ... ] [ <package_body_item> ... ] END <package_item> ::= !! SeeCREATE PACKAGE
syntax !! <package_body_item> ::= <function_impl> | <procedure_impl> <function_impl> ::= FUNCTION funcname [ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ] RETURNS <domain_or_non_array_type> [COLLATE collation] [DETERMINISTIC] <module-body> <procedure_impl> ::= PROCEDURE procname [ ( [ <in_params> ] ) ] [RETURNS (<out_params>)] <module-body> <module-body> ::= !! See Syntax of Module Body !! <in_params> ::= !! SeeCREATE PACKAGE
syntax !! !! See also Rules below !! <out_params> ::= !! SeeCREATE PACKAGE
syntax !! <domain_or_non_array_type> ::= !! See Scalar Data Types Syntax !!
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
package_name |
Package name. The maximum length is 63 characters. The package name must be unique among all package names. |
function_impl |
Function implementation.
Essentially a |
procedure_impl |
Procedure implementation
Essentially a |
func_name |
Function name. The maximum length is 63 characters. The function name must be unique within the package. |
collation |
Collation sequence |
proc_name |
Procedure name. The maximum length is 63 characters. The function name must be unique within the package. |
The CREATE PACKAGE BODY
statement creates a new package body.
The package body can only be created after the package header has been created.
If there is no package header with name package_name, an appropriate error will be raised.
All procedures and functions declared in the package header must be implemented in the package body. Additional procedures and functions may be defined and implemented in the package body only. Procedure and functions defined in the package body, but not defined in the package header are not visible outside the package body.
The names of procedures and functions defined in the package body must be unique among the names of procedures and functions defined in the package header and implemented in the package body.
Package procedure and function names may shadow global routines
If a package header or package body declares a procedure or function with the same name as a stored procedure or function in the global namespace, it is not possible to call that global procedure or function from the package body. In this case, the procedure or function of the package will always be called. For this reason, it is recommended that the names of stored procedures and functions in packages do not overlap with names of stored procedures and functions in the global namespace. |
-
In the package body, all procedures and functions must be implemented with the same signature as declared in the header and at the beginning of the package body
-
The default values for procedure or function parameters cannot be overridden (as specified in the package header or in <package_item>). This means default values can only be defined in <package_body_item> for procedures or functions that have not been defined in the package header or earlier in the package body.
UDF declarations ( |
Who Can Create a Package Body
The CREATE PACKAGE BODY
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the package
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY PACKAGE
privilege
Examples of CREATE PACKAGE BODY
CREATE PACKAGE BODY APP_VAR
AS
BEGIN
-- Returns the start date of the period
FUNCTION GET_DATEBEGIN() RETURNS DATE DETERMINISTIC
AS
BEGIN
RETURN RDB$GET_CONTEXT('USER_SESSION', 'DATEBEGIN');
END
-- Returns the end date of the period
FUNCTION GET_DATEEND() RETURNS DATE DETERMINISTIC
AS
BEGIN
RETURN RDB$GET_CONTEXT('USER_SESSION', 'DATEEND');
END
-- Sets the date range of the working period
PROCEDURE SET_DATERANGE(ADATEBEGIN DATE, ADATEEND DATE)
AS
BEGIN
RDB$SET_CONTEXT('USER_SESSION', 'DATEBEGIN', ADATEBEGIN);
RDB$SET_CONTEXT('USER_SESSION', 'DATEEND', ADATEEND);
END
END
5.12.2. DROP PACKAGE BODY
Dropping a package body
DSQL
DROP PACKAGE package_name
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
package_name |
Package name |
The DROP PACKAGE BODY
statement deletes the package body.
Who Can Drop a Package Body
The DROP PACKAGE BODY
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the package
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY PACKAGE
privilege
5.12.3. RECREATE PACKAGE BODY
Creating a new or recreating an existing package body
DSQL
RECREATE PACKAGE BODY name
AS
BEGIN
[ <package_item> ... ]
[ <package_body_item> ... ]
END
!! See syntax of CREATE PACKAGE BODY
for further rules !!
The RECREATE PACKAGE BODY
statement creates a new or recreates an existing package body.
If a package body with the same name already exists, the statement will try to drop it and then create a new package body.
After recreating the package body, privileges of the package and its routines are preserved.
See CREATE PACKAGE BODY
for more details.
Examples of RECREATE PACKAGE BODY
RECREATE PACKAGE BODY APP_VAR
AS
BEGIN
-- Returns the start date of the period
FUNCTION GET_DATEBEGIN() RETURNS DATE DETERMINISTIC
AS
BEGIN
RETURN RDB$GET_CONTEXT('USER_SESSION', 'DATEBEGIN');
END
-- Returns the end date of the period
FUNCTION GET_DATEEND() RETURNS DATE DETERMINISTIC
AS
BEGIN
RETURN RDB$GET_CONTEXT('USER_SESSION', 'DATEEND');
END
-- Sets the date range of the working period
PROCEDURE SET_DATERANGE(ADATEBEGIN DATE, ADATEEND DATE)
AS
BEGIN
RDB$SET_CONTEXT('USER_SESSION', 'DATEBEGIN', ADATEBEGIN);
RDB$SET_CONTEXT('USER_SESSION', 'DATEEND', ADATEEND);
END
END
5.13. FILTER
A BLOB FILTER
is a database object that is a special type of external function, with the sole purpose of taking a BLOB
object in one format and converting it to a BLOB
object in another format.
The formats of the BLOB
objects are specified with user-defined BLOB
subtypes.
External functions for converting BLOB
types are stored in dynamic libraries and loaded when necessary.
For more details on BLOB
subtypes, see Binary Data Types.
5.13.1. DECLARE FILTER
Declaring a BLOB
filter to the database
DSQL, ESQL
DECLARE FILTER filtername INPUT_TYPE <sub_type> OUTPUT_TYPE <sub_type> ENTRY_POINT 'function_name' MODULE_NAME 'library_name' <sub_type> ::= number | <mnemonic> <mnemonic> ::= BINARY | TEXT | BLR | ACL | RANGES | SUMMARY | FORMAT | TRANSACTION_DESCRIPTION | EXTERNAL_FILE_DESCRIPTION | user_defined
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
filtername |
Filter name in the database.
The maximum length is 63 characters.
It need not be the same name as the name exported from the filter library via |
sub_type |
|
number |
|
mnemonic |
|
function_name |
The exported name (entry point) of the function |
library_name |
The name of the module where the filter is located |
user_defined |
User-defined |
The DECLARE FILTER
statement makes a BLOB
filter available to the database.
The name of the BLOB
filter must be unique among the names of BLOB
filters.
Specifying the Subtypes
The subtypes can be specified as the subtype number or as the subtype mnemonic name.
Custom subtypes must be represented by negative numbers (from -1 to -32,768).
An attempt to declare more than one BLOB
filter with the same combination of the input and output types will fail with an error.
INPUT_TYPE
-
clause defining the
BLOB
subtype of the object to be converted OUTPUT_TYPE
-
clause defining the
BLOB
subtype of the object to be created.
Mnemonic names can be defined for custom
After the transaction is committed, the mnemonic names can be used in declarations when you create new filters. The value of the column Warning
In general, the system tables are not writable by users.
However, inserting custom types into |
Parameters
ENTRY_POINT
-
clause defining the name of the entry point (the name of the imported function) in the module.
MODULE_NAME
-
The clause defining the name of the module where the exported function is located. By default, modules must be located in the UDF folder of the root directory on the server. The
UDFAccess
parameter infirebird.conf
allows editing of access restrictions to filter libraries.
Any user connected to the database can declare a BLOB filter.
Who Can Create a BLOB
Filter?
The DECLARE FILTER
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE FILTER
privilege
The user executing the DECLARE FILTER
statement becomes the owner of the filter.
Examples of DECLARE FILTER
-
Creating a
BLOB
filter using subtype numbers.DECLARE FILTER DESC_FILTER INPUT_TYPE 1 OUTPUT_TYPE -4 ENTRY_POINT 'desc_filter' MODULE_NAME 'FILTERLIB';
-
Creating a
BLOB
filter using subtype mnemonic names.DECLARE FILTER FUNNEL INPUT_TYPE blr OUTPUT_TYPE text ENTRY_POINT 'blr2asc' MODULE_NAME 'myfilterlib';
5.13.2. DROP FILTER
Removing a BLOB
filter declaration from the database
DSQL, ESQL
DROP FILTER filtername
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
filtername |
Filter name in the database |
The DROP FILTER
statement removes the declaration of a BLOB
filter from the database.
Removing a BLOB
filter from a database makes it unavailable for use from that database.
The dynamic library where the conversion function is located remains intact and the removal from one database does not affect other databases in which the same BLOB
filter is still declared.
5.14. SEQUENCE
(GENERATOR
)
A sequence — or generator — is a database object used to get unique number values to fill a series. “Sequence” is the SQL-compliant term for the same thing which — in Firebird — has traditionally been known as “generator”. Firebird has syntax for both terms.
Sequences are always stored as 64-bit integers, regardless of the SQL dialect of the database.
If a client is connected using Dialect 1, the server handles sequence values as 32-bit integers. Passing a sequence value to a 32-bit field or variable will not cause errors as long as the current value of the sequence does not exceed the limits of a 32-bit number. However, as soon as the sequence value exceeds this limit, a database in Dialect 3 will produce an error. A database in Dialect 1 will truncate (overflow) the value, which could compromise the uniqueness of the series. |
This section describes how to create, alter, set and drop sequences.
5.14.1. CREATE SEQUENCE
Creating a new SEQUENCE
(GENERATOR
)
DSQL, ESQL
CREATE {SEQUENCE | GENERATOR} seq_name [START WITH start_value] [INCREMENT [BY] increment]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
seq_name |
Sequence (generator) name. The maximum length is 63 characters |
start_value |
Initial value of the sequence. Default is 1. |
increment |
Increment of the sequence (when using |
The statements CREATE SEQUENCE
and CREATE GENERATOR
are synonymous — both create a new sequence.
Either can be used, but CREATE SEQUENCE
is recommended as that is the syntax defined in the SQL standard.
When a sequence is created, its current value is set so that the next value obtained from NEXT VALUE FOR seq_name
is equal to start_value.
In other words, the current value of the sequence is set to (start_value - increment
).
By default, the start_value is 1 (one).
The optional INCREMENT [BY]
clause allows you to specify an increment for the NEXT VALUE FOR seq_name
expression.
By default, the increment is 1 (one).
The increment cannot be set to 0 (zero).
The GEN_ID(seq_name, <step>)
function can be called instead, to “step” the series by a different integer number.
The increment specified through INCREMENT [BY]
is not used for GEN_ID
.
Non-standard behaviour for negative increments
The SQL standard specifies that sequences with a negative increment should start at the maximum value of the sequence (263 - 1) and count down.
Firebird does not do that, and instead starts at This may change in a future Firebird version. |
Who Can Create a Sequence?
The CREATE SEQUENCE
(CREATE GENERATOR
) statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE SEQUENCE
(CREATE GENERATOR
) privilege
The user executing the CREATE SEQUENCE
(CREATE GENERATOR
) statement becomes its owner.
Examples of CREATE SEQUENCE
-
Creating the
EMP_NO_GEN
sequence usingCREATE SEQUENCE
.CREATE SEQUENCE EMP_NO_GEN;
-
Creating the
EMP_NO_GEN
sequence usingCREATE GENERATOR
.CREATE GENERATOR EMP_NO_GEN;
-
Creating the
EMP_NO_GEN
sequence with an initial value of 5 and an increment of 1.CREATE SEQUENCE EMP_NO_GEN START WITH 5;
-
Creating the
EMP_NO_GEN
sequence with an initial value of 1 and an increment of 10.CREATE SEQUENCE EMP_NO_GEN INCREMENT BY 10;
-
Creating the
EMP_NO_GEN
sequence with an initial value of 5 and an increment of 10.CREATE SEQUENCE EMP_NO_GEN START WITH 5 INCREMENT BY 10;
5.14.2. ALTER SEQUENCE
Setting the next value of a sequence or changing its increment
DSQL
ALTER {SEQUENCE | GENERATOR} seq_name [RESTART [WITH newvalue]] [INCREMENT [BY] increment]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
seq_name |
Sequence (generator) name |
newvalue |
New sequence (generator) value. A 64-bit integer from -2-63 to 263-1. |
increment |
Increment of the sequence (when using |
The ALTER SEQUENCE
statement sets the current value of a sequence to the specified value
and/or changes the increment of the sequence.
The RESTART WITH newvalue
clause allows you to set the next value generated by NEXT VALUE FOR seq_name
.
To achieve this, the current value of the sequence is set to (newvalue - increment
) with increment either as specified in the statement, or stored in the metadata of the sequence.
The RESTART
clause (without WITH
) restarts the sequence with the initial value stored in the metadata of the sequence.
Contrary to Firebird 3.0, in Firebird 4.0 It is currently not possible to change the initial value stored in the metadata. |
Incorrect use of the |
INCREMENT [BY]
allows you to change the sequence increment for the NEXT VALUE FOR
expression.
Changing the increment value takes effect for all queries that run after the transaction commits.
Procedures that are called for the first time after changing the commit, will use the new value if they use |
Who Can Alter a Sequence?
The ALTER SEQUENCE
(ALTER GENERATOR
) statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the sequence
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY SEQUENCE
(ALTER ANY GENERATOR
) privilege
Examples of ALTER SEQUENCE
-
Setting the value of the
EMP_NO_GEN
sequence so the next value is 145.ALTER SEQUENCE EMP_NO_GEN RESTART WITH 145;
-
Resetting the base value of the sequence
EMP_NO_GEN
to the initial value stored in the metadataALTER SEQUENCE EMP_NO_GEN RESTART;
-
Changing the increment of sequence
EMP_NO_GEN
to 10ALTER SEQUENCE EMP_NO_GEN INCREMENT BY 10;
5.14.3. CREATE OR ALTER SEQUENCE
Creating a new or modifying an existing sequence
DSQL, ESQL
CREATE OR ALTER {SEQUENCE | GENERATOR} seq_name {RESTART | START WITH start_value} [INCREMENT [BY] increment]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
seq_name |
Sequence (generator) name. The maximum length is 63 characters |
start_value |
Initial value of the sequence. Default is 1. |
increment |
Increment of the sequence (when using |
If the sequence does not exist, it will be created. An existing sequence will be changed:
-
If
RESTART
is specified, the sequence will restarted with the initial value stored in the metadata -
If the
START WITH
clause is specified, the sequence is restarted with start_value, but the start_value is not stored. In other words, it behaves asRESTART WITH
inALTER SEQUENCE
. -
If the
INCREMENT [BY]
clause is specified, increment is stored as the increment in the metadata, and used for subsequent calls toNEXT VALUE FOR
5.14.4. DROP SEQUENCE
Dropping (deleting) a SEQUENCE
(GENERATOR
)
DSQL, ESQL
DROP {SEQUENCE | GENERATOR} seq_name
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
seq_name |
Sequence (generator) name. The maximum length is 63 characters |
The statements DROP SEQUENCE
and DROP GENERATOR
statements are equivalent: both drop (delete) an existing sequence (generator).
Either is valid but DROP SEQUENCE
, being defined in the SQL standard, is recommended.
The statements will fail if the sequence (generator) has dependencies.
Who Can Drop a Sequence?
The DROP SEQUENCE
(DROP GENERATOR
) statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the sequence
-
Users with the
DROP ANY SEQUENCE
(DROP ANY GENERATOR
) privilege
5.14.5. RECREATE SEQUENCE
Creating or recreating a sequence (generator)
DSQL, ESQL
RECREATE {SEQUENCE | GENERATOR} seq_name [START WITH start_value] [INCREMENT [BY] increment]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
seq_name |
Sequence (generator) name. The maximum length is 63 characters |
start_value |
Initial value of the sequence |
increment |
Increment of the sequence (when using |
See CREATE SEQUENCE
for the full syntax of CREATE SEQUENCE
and descriptions of defining a sequences and its options.
RECREATE SEQUENCE
creates or recreates a sequence.
If a sequence with this name already exists, the RECREATE SEQUENCE
statement will try to drop it and create a new one.
Existing dependencies will prevent the statement from executing.
5.14.6. SET GENERATOR
Setting the current value of a sequence or generator to a specified value
DSQL, ESQL
SET GENERATOR seq_name TO new_val
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
seq_name |
Generator (sequence) name |
new_val |
New sequence (generator) value. A 64-bit integer from -2-63 to 263-1. |
The SET GENERATOR
statement sets the current value of a sequence or generator to the specified value.
Although |
Who Can Use a SET GENERATOR
?
The SET GENERATOR
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the sequence (generator)
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY SEQUENCE
(ALTER ANY GENERATOR
) privilege
Example of SET GENERATOR
EMP_NO_GEN
sequence to 145:SET GENERATOR EMP_NO_GEN TO 145;
Similar effects can be achieved with ALTER SEQUENCE EMP_NO_GEN RESTART WITH 145 + increment; Here, the value of increment is the current increment of the sequence.
We need add it as |
5.15. EXCEPTION
This section describes how to create, modify and delete custom exceptions for use in error handlers in PSQL modules.
5.15.1. CREATE EXCEPTION
Creating a new exception for use in PSQL modules
DSQL, ESQL
CREATE EXCEPTION exception_name '<message>' <message> ::= <message-part> [<message-part> ...] <message-part> ::= <text> | @<slot> <slot> ::= one of 1..9
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
exception_name |
Exception name. The maximum length is 63 characters |
message |
Default error message. The maximum length is 1,021 characters |
text |
Text of any character |
slot |
Slot number of a parameter. Numbering starts at 1. Maximum slot number is 9. |
The statement CREATE EXCEPTION
creates a new exception for use in PSQL modules.
If an exception with the same name exists, the statement will fail with an appropriate error message.
The exception name is a standard identifier. In a Dialect 3 database, it can be enclosed in double quotes to make it case-sensitive and, if required, to use characters that are not valid in regular identifiers. See Identifiers for more information.
The default message is stored in character set NONE
, i.e. in characters of any single-byte character set.
The text can be overridden in the PSQL code when the exception is thrown.
The error message may contain “parameter slots” that can be filled when raising the exception.
If the message contains a parameter slot number that is greater than 9, the second and subsequent digits will be treated as literal text.
For example |
Custom exceptions are stored in the system table |
Who Can Create an Exception
The CREATE EXCEPTION
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE EXCEPTION
privilege
The user executing the CREATE EXCEPTION
statement becomes the owner of the exception.
CREATE EXCEPTION
Examples
E_LARGE_VALUE
CREATE EXCEPTION E_LARGE_VALUE
'The value is out of range';
E_INVALID_VALUE
CREATE EXCEPTION E_INVALID_VALUE
'Invalid value @1 for field @2';
Tips
Grouping |
5.15.2. ALTER EXCEPTION
Modifying the message returned from a custom exception
DSQL, ESQL
ALTER EXCEPTION exception_name '<message>'
!! See syntax of CREATE EXCEPTION
for further rules !!
The statement ALTER EXCEPTION
can be used at any time, to modify the default text of the message.
Who Can Alter an Exception
The ALTER EXCEPTION
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the exception
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY EXCEPTION
privilege
5.15.3. CREATE OR ALTER EXCEPTION
Modifying the message returned from a custom exception, if the exception exists; otherwise, creating a new exception
DSQL
CREATE OR ALTER EXCEPTION exception_name '<message>'
!! See syntax of CREATE EXCEPTION
for further rules !!
The statement CREATE OR ALTER EXCEPTION
is used to create the specified exception if it does not exist, or to modify the text of the error message returned from it if it exists already.
If an existing exception is altered by this statement, any existing dependencies will remain intact.
5.15.4. DROP EXCEPTION
Deleting a custom exception
DSQL, ESQL
DROP EXCEPTION exception_name
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
exception_name |
Exception name |
The statement DROP EXCEPTION
is used to delete an exception.
Any dependencies on the exception will cause the statement to fail, and the exception will not be deleted.
Who Can Drop an Exception
The DROP EXCEPTION
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the exception
-
Users with the
DROP ANY EXCEPTION
privilege
5.15.5. RECREATE EXCEPTION
Creating a new custom exception or recreating an existing one
DSQL
RECREATE EXCEPTION exception_name '<message>'
!! See syntax of CREATE EXCEPTION
for further rules !!
The statement RECREATE EXCEPTION
creates a new exception for use in PSQL modules.
If an exception with the same name exists already, the RECREATE EXCEPTION
statement will try to drop it and create a new one.
If there are any dependencies on the existing exception, the attempted deletion fails and RECREATE EXCEPTION
is not executed.
5.16. COLLATION
In SQL, text strings are sortable objects.
This means that they obey ordering rules, such as alphabetical order.
Comparison operations can be applied to such text strings (for example, “less than” or “greater than”), where the comparison must apply a certain sort order or collation.
For example, the expression “'a' < 'b'
” means that ‘'a'
’ precedes ‘'b'
’ in the collation.
The expression “'c' > 'b'
” means that ‘'c'
’ follows ‘'b'
’ in the collation.
Text strings of more than one character are sorted using sequential character comparisons: first the first characters of the two strings are compared, then the second characters, and so on, until a difference is found between the two strings.
This difference defines the sort order.
A COLLATION
is the schema object that defines a collation (or sort order).
5.16.1. CREATE COLLATION
Creating a new collation for a supported character set available to the database
DSQL
CREATE COLLATION collname FOR charset [FROM {basecoll | EXTERNAL ('extname')}] [NO PAD | PAD SPACE] [CASE [IN]SENSITIVE] [ACCENT [IN]SENSITIVE] ['<specific-attributes>'] <specific-attributes> ::= <attribute> [; <attribute> ...] <attribute> ::= attrname=attrvalue
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
collname |
The name to use for the new collation. The maximum length is 63 characters |
charset |
A character set present in the database |
basecoll |
A collation already present in the database |
extname |
The collation name used in the |
The CREATE COLLATION
statement does not “create” anything, its purpose is to make a collation known to a database.
The collation must already be present on the system, typically in a library file, and must be properly registered in a .conf
file in the intl
subdirectory of the Firebird installation.
The collation may alternatively be based on one that is already present in the database.
How the Engine Detects the Collation
The optional FROM
clause specifies the base collation that is used to derive a new collation.
This collation must already be present in the database.
If the keyword EXTERNAL
is specified, then Firebird will scan the .conf
files in $fbroot/intl/
, where extname must exactly match the name in the configuration file (case-sensitive).
If no FROM
clause is present, Firebird will scan the .conf
file(s) in the intl
subdirectory for a collation with the collation name specified in CREATE COLLATION
.
In other words, omitting the FROM basecoll
clause is equivalent to specifying FROM EXTERNAL ('collname')
.
The — single-quoted — extname is case-sensitive and must correspond exactly with the collation name in the .conf
file.
The collname, charset and basecoll parameters are case-insensitive unless enclosed in double-quotes.
When creating a collation, you can specify whether trailing spaces are included in the comparison.
If the NO PAD
clause is specified, trailing spaces are taken into account in the comparison.
If the PAD SPACE
clause is specified, trailing spaces are ignored in the comparison.
The optional CASE
clause allows you to specify whether the comparison is case-sensitive or case-insensitive.
The optional ACCENT
clause allows you to specify whether the comparison is accent-sensitive or accent-insensitive (e.g. if ‘'e'
’ and ‘'é'
’ are considered equal or unequal).
Specific Attributes
The CREATE COLLATION
statement can also include specific attributes to configure the collation.
The available specific attributes are listed in the table below.
Not all specific attributes apply to every collation.
If the attribute is not applicable to the collation, but is specified when creating it, it will not cause an error.
Specific attribute names are case-sensitive. |
In the table, “1 bpc” indicates that an attribute is valid for collations of character sets using 1 byte per character (so-called narrow character sets), and “UNI” for “Unicode collations”.
Atrribute | Values | Valid for | Comment |
---|---|---|---|
|
|
1 bpc, UNI (4.0.1+) |
Disables compressions (a.k.a. contractions). Compressions cause certain character sequences to be sorted as atomic units, e.g. Spanish c+h as a single character ch |
|
|
1 bpc |
Disables expansions. Expansions cause certain characters (e.g. ligatures or umlauted vowels) to be treated as character sequences and sorted accordingly |
|
default or M.m |
UNI |
Specifies the ICU library version to use.
Valid values are the ones defined in the applicable |
|
xx_YY |
UNI |
Specifies the collation locale. Requires complete version of ICU libraries. Format: a locale string like “du_NL” (unquoted) Since Firebird 4.0.1 this option also supports ICU locale keywords and attributes. |
|
|
1 bpc |
Uses more than one ordering level |
|
|
UNI |
Treats contiguous groups of decimal digits in the string as atomic units and sorts them numerically. (This is also known as natural sorting) |
|
|
1 bpc |
Orders special characters (spaces, symbols etc.) before alphanumeric characters |
If you want to add a new character set with its default collation into your database, declare and run the stored procedure In order for this to work, the character set must be present on the system and registered in a |
Who Can Create a Collation
The CREATE COLLATION
statement can be executed by:
-
Users with the
CREATE COLLATION
privilege
The user executing the CREATE COLLATION
statement becomes the owner of the collation.
Examples using CREATE COLLATION
-
Creating a collation using the name found in the
fbintl.conf
file (case-sensitive)CREATE COLLATION ISO8859_1_UNICODE FOR ISO8859_1;
-
Creating a collation using a special (user-defined) name (the “external” name must completely match the name in the
fbintl.conf
file)CREATE COLLATION LAT_UNI FOR ISO8859_1 FROM EXTERNAL ('ISO8859_1_UNICODE');
-
Creating a case-insensitive collation based on one already existing in the database
CREATE COLLATION ES_ES_NOPAD_CI FOR ISO8859_1 FROM ES_ES NO PAD CASE INSENSITIVE;
-
Creating a case-insensitive collation based on one already existing in the database with specific attributes
CREATE COLLATION ES_ES_CI_COMPR FOR ISO8859_1 FROM ES_ES CASE INSENSITIVE 'DISABLE-COMPRESSIONS=0';
-
Creating a case-insensitive collation by the value of numbers (the so-called natural collation)
CREATE COLLATION nums_coll FOR UTF8 FROM UNICODE CASE INSENSITIVE 'NUMERIC-SORT=1'; CREATE DOMAIN dm_nums AS varchar(20) CHARACTER SET UTF8 COLLATE nums_coll; -- original (manufacturer) numbers CREATE TABLE wares(id int primary key, articul dm_nums ...);
5.16.2. DROP COLLATION
Removing a collation from the database
DSQL
DROP COLLATION collname
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
collname |
The name of the collation |
The DROP COLLATION
statement removes the specified collation from the database, if it exists.
An error will be raised if the specified collation is not present.
If you want to remove an entire character set with all its collations from the database, declare and execute the stored procedure |
Who Can Drop a Collation
The Drop COLLATION
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the collation
-
Users with the
DROP ANY COLLATION
privilege
5.17. CHARACTER SET
5.17.1. ALTER CHARACTER SET
Setting the default collation for a character set
DSQL
ALTER CHARACTER SET charset SET DEFAULT COLLATION collation
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
charset |
Character set identifier |
collation |
The name of the collation |
The ALTER CHARACTER SET
statement changes the default collation for the specified character set.
It will affect the future usage of the character set, except for cases where the COLLATE
clause is explicitly overridden.
In that case, the collation sequence of existing domains, columns and PSQL variables will remain intact after the change to the default collation of the underlying character set.
If you change the default collation for the database character set (the one defined when the database was created), it will change the default collation for the database. If you change the default collation for the character set that was specified during the connection, string constants will be interpreted according to the new collation value, except in those cases where the character set and/or the collation have been overridden. |
5.18. Comments
Database objects and a database itself may be annotated with comments.
It is a convenient mechanism for documenting the development and maintenance of a database.
Comments created with COMMENT ON
will survive a gbak backup and restore.
5.18.1. COMMENT ON
Documenting metadata
DSQL
COMMENT ON <object> IS {'sometext' | NULL} <object> ::= {DATABASE | SCHEMA} | <basic-type> objectname | USER username [USING PLUGIN pluginname] | COLUMN relationname.fieldname | [{PROCEDURE | FUNCTION}] PARAMETER [packagename.]routinename.paramname | {PROCEDURE | [EXTERNAL] FUNCTION} [package_name.]routinename <basic-type> ::= CHARACTER SET | COLLATION | DOMAIN | EXCEPTION | FILTER | GENERATOR | INDEX | PACKAGE | ROLE | SEQUENCE | TABLE | TRIGGER | VIEW
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
sometext |
Comment text |
basic-type |
Metadata object type |
objectname |
Metadata object name |
username |
Username |
pluginname |
User manager plugin name |
relationname |
Name of table or view |
fieldname |
Name of the column |
package_name |
Name of the package |
routinename |
Name of stored procedure or function |
paramname |
Name of a stored procedure or function parameter |
The COMMENT ON
statement adds comments for database objects (metadata).
Comments are saved to the RDB$DESCRIPTION
column of the corresponding system tables.
Client applications can view comments from these fields.
|
Comments on users are visible to that user through the |
Who Can Add a Comment
The COMMENT ON
statement can be executed by:
-
The owner of the object that is commented on
-
Users with the
ALTER ANY object_type
privilege, where object_type is the type of object commented on (e.g.PROCEDURE
)
Examples using COMMENT ON
-
Adding a comment for the current database
COMMENT ON DATABASE IS 'It is a test (''my.fdb'') database';
-
Adding a comment for the
METALS
tableCOMMENT ON TABLE METALS IS 'Metal directory';
-
Adding a comment for the
ISALLOY
field in theMETALS
tableCOMMENT ON COLUMN METALS.ISALLOY IS '0 = fine metal, 1 = alloy';
-
Adding a comment for a parameter
COMMENT ON PARAMETER ADD_EMP_PROJ.EMP_NO IS 'Employee ID';
-
Adding a comment for a package, its procedures and functions, and their parameters
COMMENT ON PACKAGE APP_VAR IS 'Application Variables'; COMMENT ON FUNCTION APP_VAR.GET_DATEBEGIN IS 'Returns the start date of the period'; COMMENT ON PROCEDURE APP_VAR.SET_DATERANGE IS 'Set date range'; COMMENT ON PROCEDURE PARAMETER APP_VAR.SET_DATERANGE.ADATEBEGIN IS 'Start Date';
6. Data Manipulation (DML) Statements
DML — data manipulation language — is the subset of SQL that is used by applications and procedural modules to extract and change data.
Extraction, for the purpose of reading data, both raw and manipulated, is achieved with the SELECT
statement.
INSERT
is for adding new data and DELETE
is for erasing data that are no longer required.
UPDATE
, MERGE
and UPDATE OR INSERT
all modify data in various ways.
6.1. SELECT
Retrieving data
DSQL, ESQL, PSQL
[WITH [RECURSIVE] <cte> [, <cte> ...]] SELECT [FIRST m] [SKIP n] [{DISTINCT | ALL}] <columns> FROM <source> [[AS] alias] [<joins>] [WHERE <condition>] [GROUP BY <grouping-list> [HAVING <aggregate-condition>]] [WINDOW <window_definition> [, <window_definition> ...] [PLAN <plan-expr>] [UNION [{DISTINCT | ALL}] <other-select>] [ORDER BY <ordering-list>] [{ ROWS <m> [TO <n>] | [OFFSET n {ROW | ROWS}] [FETCH {FIRST | NEXT} [m] {ROW | ROWS} ONLY] }] [FOR UPDATE [OF <columns>]] [WITH LOCK] [INTO <variables>] <variables> ::= [:]varname [, [:]varname ...]
The SELECT
statement retrieves data from the database and hands them to the application or the enclosing SQL statement.
Data are returned in zero or more rows, each containing one or more columns or fields.
The total of rows returned is the result set of the statement.
The only mandatory parts of the SELECT
statement are:
-
The
SELECT
keyword, followed by a columns list. This part specifies what you want to retrieve. -
The
FROM
keyword, followed by a selectable object. This tells the engine where you want to get it from.
In its most basic form, SELECT
retrieves a number of columns from a single table or view, like this:
select id, name, address
from contacts
Or, to retrieve all the columns:
select * from sales
In practice, a SELECT
statement is usually executed with a WHERE
clause, which limits the rows returned.
The result set may be sorted by an ORDER BY
clause, and FIRST … SKIP
, OFFSET … FETCH
or ROWS
may further limit the number of returned rows, and can - for example - be used for pagination.
The column list may contain all kinds of expressions instead of just column names, and the source need not be a table or view: it may also be a derived table, a common table expression (CTE) or a selectable stored procedure (SP).
Multiple sources may be combined in a JOIN
, and multiple result sets may be combined in a UNION
.
The following sections discuss the available SELECT
subclauses and their usage in detail.
6.1.1. FIRST
, SKIP
Retrieving a slice of rows from an ordered set
DSQL, PSQL
SELECT [FIRST <m>] [SKIP <n>] FROM ... ... <m>, <n> ::= <integer-literal> | <query-parameter> | (<integer-expression>)
Argument | Description |
---|---|
integer-literal |
Integer literal |
query-parameter |
Query parameter place-holder.
|
integer-expression |
Expression returning an integer value |
FIRST and SKIP are non-standard syntax
|
FIRST
limits the output of a query to the first m rows.
SKIP
will suppress the given n rows before starting to return output.
FIRST
and SKIP
are both optional.
When used together as in “FIRST m SKIP n
”, the n topmost rows of the output set are discarded, and the first m rows of the rest of the set are returned.
Characteristics of FIRST
and SKIP
-
Any argument to
FIRST
andSKIP
that is not an integer literal or an SQL parameter must be enclosed in parentheses. This implies that a subquery expression must be enclosed in two pairs of parentheses. -
SKIP 0
is allowed but totally pointless. -
FIRST 0
is also allowed and returns an empty set. -
Negative
SKIP
and/orFIRST
values result in an error. -
If a
SKIP
lands past the end of the dataset, an empty set is returned. -
If the number of rows in the dataset (or the remainder left after a
SKIP
) is less than the value of the m argument supplied forFIRST
, that smaller number of rows is returned. These are valid results, not error conditions.
Examples of FIRST/SKIP
-
The following query will return the first 10 names from the
People
table:select first 10 id, name from People order by name asc
-
The following query will return everything but the first 10 names:
select skip 10 id, name from People order by name asc
-
And this one returns the last 10 rows. Notice the double parentheses:
select skip ((select count(*) - 10 from People)) id, name from People order by name asc
-
This query returns rows 81 to 100 of the People table:
select first 20 skip 80 id, name from People order by name asc
6.1.2. The SELECT
Columns List
The columns list contains one or more comma-separated value expressions.
Each expression provides a value for one output column.
Alternatively, *
(“select star” or “select all”) can be used to stand for all the columns in a relation (i.e. a table, view or selectable stored procedure).
SELECT [...] [{DISTINCT | ALL}] <select_list> [...] FROM ... <select_list> ::= * | <output_column> [, <output_column> ...] <output_column> ::= <qualifier>.* | <value_expression> [COLLATE collation] [[AS] alias] <value_expression> ::= [<qualifier>.]col_name | [<qualifier>.]selectable_SP_outparm | <literal> | <context-variable> | <function-call> | <single-value-subselect> | <CASE-construct> | any other expression returning a single value of a Firebird data type or NULL <qualifier> ::= a relation name or alias <function-call> ::= <normal_function> | <aggregate_function> | <window_function> <normal_function> ::= !! See Built-in Scalar Functions !! <aggregate_function> ::= !! See Aggregate Functions !! <window_function> ::= !! See Window Functions !!
Argument | Description |
---|---|
qualifier |
Name of relation (view, stored procedure, derived table); or an alias for it |
collation |
Only for character-type columns: a collation name that exists and is valid for the character set of the data |
alias |
Column or field alias |
col_name |
Name of a table or view column |
selectable_SP_outparm |
Declared name of an output parameter of a selectable stored procedure |
literal |
A literal |
context-variable |
Context variable |
function-call |
Scalar, aggregate, or window function expression |
single-value-subselect |
A subquery returning one scalar value (singleton) |
CASE-construct |
CASE construct setting conditions for a return value |
It is always valid to qualify a column name (or “*
”) with the name or alias of the table, view or selectable SP to which it belongs, followed by a dot (‘.
’).
For example, relationname.columnname
, relationname.*
, alias.columnname
, alias.*
.
Qualifying is required if the column name occurs in more than one relation taking part in a join.
Qualifying “*
” is always mandatory if it is not the only item in the column list.
Aliases hide the original relation name: once a table, view or procedure has been aliased, only the alias can be used as its qualifier throughout the query. The relation name itself becomes unavailable. |
The column list may optionally be preceded by one of the keywords DISTINCT
or ALL
:
-
DISTINCT
filters out any duplicate rows. That is, if two or more rows have the same values in every corresponding column, only one of them is included in the result set -
ALL
is the default: it returns all of the rows, including duplicates.ALL
is rarely used; it is supported for compliance with the SQL standard.
A COLLATE
clause will not change the appearance of the column as such.
However, if the specified collation changes the case or accent sensitivity of the column, it may influence:
-
The ordering, if an
ORDER BY
clause is also present and it involves that column -
Grouping, if the column is part of a
GROUP BY
clause -
The rows retrieved (and hence the total number of rows in the result set), if
DISTINCT
is used
Examples of SELECT
queries with different types of column lists
A simple SELECT
using only column names:
select cust_id, cust_name, phone
from customers
where city = 'London'
A query featuring a concatenation expression and a function call in the columns list:
select 'Mr./Mrs. ' || lastname, street, zip, upper(city)
from contacts
where date_last_purchase(id) = current_date
A query with two subselects:
select p.fullname,
(select name from classes c where c.id = p.class) as class,
(select name from mentors m where m.id = p.mentor) as mentor
from pupils p
The following query accomplishes the same as the previous one using joins instead of subselects:
select p.fullname,
c.name as class,
m.name as mentor
join classes c on c.id = p.class
from pupils p
join mentors m on m.id = p.mentor
This query uses a CASE
construct to determine the correct title, e.g.
when sending mail to a person:
select case upper(sex)
when 'F' then 'Mrs.'
when 'M' then 'Mr.'
else ''
end as title,
lastname,
address
from employees
Query using a window function. Ranks employees by salary.
SELECT
id,
salary,
name ,
DENSE_RANK() OVER (ORDER BY salary) AS EMP_RANK
FROM employees
ORDER BY salary;
Querying a selectable stored procedure:
select * from interesting_transactions(2010, 3, 'S')
order by amount
Selecting from columns of a derived table.
A derived table is a parenthesized SELECT
statement whose result set is used in an enclosing query as if it were a regular table or view.
The derived table is shown in bold here:
select fieldcount,
count(relation) as num_tables
from (select r.rdb$relation_name as relation,
count(*) as fieldcount
from rdb$relations r
join rdb$relation_fields rf
on rf.rdb$relation_name = r.rdb$relation_name
group by relation)
group by fieldcount
Asking the time through a context variable (CURRENT_TIME
):
select current_time from rdb$database
For those not familiar with RDB$DATABASE
: this is a system table that is present in all Firebird databases and is guaranteed to contain exactly one row.
Although it wasn’t created for this purpose, it has become standard practice among Firebird programmers to select from this table if you want to select “from nothing”, i.e. if you need data that are not bound to a table or view, but can be derived from the expressions in the output columns alone.
Another example is:
select power(12, 2) as twelve_squared, power(12, 3) as twelve_cubed
from rdb$database
Finally, an example where you select some meaningful information from RDB$DATABASE
itself:
select rdb$character_set_name from rdb$database
As you may have guessed, this will give you the default character set of the database.
Functions, Aggregate Functions, Window Functions, Context Variables, CASE
, Subqueries
6.1.3. The FROM
clause
The FROM
clause specifies the source(s) from which the data are to be retrieved.
In its simplest form, this is just a single table or view.
However, the source can also be a selectable stored procedure, a derived table, or a common table expression.
Multiple sources can be combined using various types of joins.
This section focuses on single-source selects. Joins are discussed in a following section.
SELECT ... FROM <source> [<joins>] [...] <source> ::= table [[AS] alias] | selectable-stored-procedure [(<args>)] [[AS] alias] | <derived-table> | LATERAL <derived-table> <derived-table> ::= (<select-statement>) [[AS] alias] [(<column-aliases>)] <column-aliases> ::= column-alias [, column-alias ...]
Argument | Description |
---|---|
table |
Name of a table, view or CTE |
selectable-stored-procedure |
Name of a selectable stored procedure |
args |
Selectable stored procedure arguments |
derived-table |
Derived table query expression |
select-statement |
Any SELECT statement |
column-aliases |
Alias for a column in a relation, CTE or derived table |
alias |
The alias of a data source (table, view, procedure, CTE, derived table) |
Selecting FROM
a table or view
When selecting from a single table or view, the FROM
clause requires nothing more than the name.
An alias may be useful or even necessary if there are subqueries that refer to the main select statement (as they often do — subqueries like this are called correlated subqueries).
Examples
select id, name, sex, age from actors
where state = 'Ohio'
select * from birds
where type = 'flightless'
order by family, genus, species
select firstname,
middlename,
lastname,
date_of_birth,
(select name from schools s where p.school = s.id) schoolname
from pupils p
where year_started = '2012'
order by schoolname, date_of_birth
Never mix column names with column aliases!
If you specify an alias for a table or a view, you must always use this alias in place of the table name whenever you query the columns of the relation (and wherever else you make a reference to columns, such as Correct use:
Incorrect use:
|
Selecting FROM
a stored procedure
A selectable stored procedure is a procedure that:
-
contains at least one output parameter, and
-
utilizes the
SUSPEND
keyword so the caller can fetch the output rows one by one, just as when selecting from a table or view.
The output parameters of a selectable stored procedure correspond to the columns of a regular table.
Selecting from a stored procedure without input parameters is just like selecting from a table or view:
select * from suspicious_transactions
where assignee = 'John'
Any required input parameters must be specified after the procedure name, enclosed in parentheses:
select name, az, alt from visible_stars('Brugge', current_date, '22:30')
where alt >= 20
order by az, alt
Values for optional parameters (that is, parameters for which default values have been defined) may be omitted or provided. However, if you provide them only partly, the parameters you omit must all be at the tail end.
Supposing that the procedure visible_stars
from the previous example has two optional parameters: min_magn
(numeric(3,1)
) and spectral_class
(varchar(12)
), the following queries are all valid:
select name, az, alt
from visible_stars('Brugge', current_date, '22:30');
select name, az, alt
from visible_stars('Brugge', current_date, '22:30', 4.0);
select name, az, alt
from visible_stars('Brugge', current_date, '22:30', 4.0, 'G');
But this one isn’t, because there’s a “hole” in the parameter list:
select name, az, alt
from visible_stars('Brugge', current_date, '22:30', 'G');
An alias for a selectable stored procedure is specified after the parameter list:
select
number,
(select name from contestants c where c.number = gw.number)
from get_winners('#34517', 'AMS') gw
If you refer to an output parameter (“column”) by qualifying it with the full procedure name, the procedure alias should be omitted:
select
number,
(select name from contestants c where c.number = get_winners.number)
from get_winners('#34517', 'AMS')
Selecting FROM
a derived table
A derived table is a valid SELECT
statement enclosed in parentheses, optionally followed by a table alias and/or column aliases.
The result set of the statement acts as a virtual table which the enclosing statement can query.
(<select-query>) [[AS] derived-table-alias] [(<derived-column-aliases>)] <derived-column-aliases> := column-alias [, column-alias ...]
The set returned data set by this “SELECT FROM (SELECT FROM..)
” style of statement is a virtual table that can be queried within the enclosing statement, as if it were a regular table or view.
LATERAL
Derived Tables
The keyword LATERAL
marks a table as a lateral derived table.
Lateral derived tables can reference tables (including derived tables) that occur earlier in the FROM
clause.
See Joins with LATERAL
Derived Tables for more information.
Example using a derived table
The derived table in the query below returns the list of table names in the database, and the number of columns in each table. A “drill-down” query on the derived table returns the counts of fields and the counts of tables having each field count:
SELECT
FIELDCOUNT,
COUNT(RELATION) AS NUM_TABLES
FROM (SELECT
R.RDB$RELATION_NAME RELATION,
COUNT(*) AS FIELDCOUNT
FROM RDB$RELATIONS R
JOIN RDB$RELATION_FIELDS RF
ON RF.RDB$RELATION_NAME = R.RDB$RELATION_NAME
GROUP BY RELATION)
GROUP BY FIELDCOUNT
A trivial example demonstrating how the alias of a derived table and the list of column aliases (both optional) can be used:
SELECT
DBINFO.DESCR, DBINFO.DEF_CHARSET
FROM (SELECT *
FROM RDB$DATABASE) DBINFO
(DESCR, REL_ID, SEC_CLASS, DEF_CHARSET)
More about Derived Tables
Derived tables can
Furthermore,
|
A more useful example
Suppose we have a table COEFFS
which contains the coefficients of a number of quadratic equations we have to solve.
It has been defined like this:
create table coeffs (
a double precision not null,
b double precision not null,
c double precision not null,
constraint chk_a_not_zero check (a <> 0)
)
Depending on the values of a
, b
and c
, each equation may have zero, one or two solutions.
It is possible to find these solutions with a single-level query on table COEFFS
, but the code will look rather messy and several values (like the discriminant) will have to be calculated multiple times per row.
A derived table can help keep things clean here:
select
iif (D >= 0, (-b - sqrt(D)) / denom, null) sol_1,
iif (D > 0, (-b + sqrt(D)) / denom, null) sol_2
from
(select b, b*b - 4*a*c, 2*a from coeffs) (b, D, denom)
If we want to show the coefficients next to the solutions (which may not be a bad idea), we can alter the query like this:
select
a, b, c,
iif (D >= 0, (-b - sqrt(D)) / denom, null) sol_1,
iif (D > 0, (-b + sqrt(D)) / denom, null) sol_2
from
(select a, b, c, b*b - 4*a*c as D, 2*a as denom
from coeffs)
Notice that whereas the first query used a column aliases list for the derived table, the second adds aliases internally where needed. Both methods work, as long as every column is guaranteed to have a name.
All columns in the derived table will be evaluated as many times as they are specified in the main query. This is important, as it can lead to unexpected results when using non-deterministic functions. The following shows an example of this.
The result if this query produces three different values: C1 80AAECED-65CD-4C2F-90AB-5D548C3C7279 C2 C1214CD3-423C-406D-B5BD-95BF432ED3E3 C3 EB176C10-F754-4689-8B84-64B666381154 To ensure a single result of the
This query produces a single result for all three columns: C1 80AAECED-65CD-4C2F-90AB-5D548C3C7279 C2 80AAECED-65CD-4C2F-90AB-5D548C3C7279 C3 80AAECED-65CD-4C2F-90AB-5D548C3C7279 An alternative solution is to wrap the
This is an artifact of the current implementation. This behaviour may change in a future Firebird version. |
Selecting FROM
a Common Table Expression (CTE)
A common table expression — or CTE — is a more complex variant of the derived table, but it is also more powerful.
A preamble, starting with the keyword WITH
, defines one or more named CTE's, each with an optional column aliases list.
The main query, which follows the preamble, can then access these CTE's as if they were regular tables or views.
The CTE's go out of scope once the main query has run to completion.
For a full discussion of CTE's, please refer to the section Common Table Expressions (“WITH … AS … SELECT
”).
The following is a rewrite of our derived table example as a CTE:
with vars (b, D, denom) as (
select b, b*b - 4*a*c, 2*a from coeffs
)
select
iif (D >= 0, (-b - sqrt(D)) / denom, null) sol_1,
iif (D > 0, (-b + sqrt(D)) / denom, null) sol_2
from vars
Except for the fact that the calculations that have to be made first are now at the beginning, this isn’t a great improvement over the derived table version.
However, we can now also eliminate the double calculation of sqrt(D)
for every row:
with vars (b, D, denom) as (
select b, b*b - 4*a*c, 2*a from coeffs
),
vars2 (b, D, denom, sqrtD) as (
select b, D, denom, iif (D >= 0, sqrt(D), null) from vars
)
select
iif (D >= 0, (-b - sqrtD) / denom, null) sol_1,
iif (D > 0, (-b + sqrtD) / denom, null) sol_2
from vars2
The code is a little more complicated now, but it might execute more efficiently (depending on what takes more time: executing the SQRT
function or passing the values of b
, D
and denom
through an extra CTE).
Incidentally, we could have done the same with derived tables, but that would involve nesting.
All columns in the CTE will be evaluated as many times as they are specified in the main query. This is important, as it can lead to unexpected results when using non-deterministic functions. The following shows an example of this.
The result if this query produces three different values: C1 80AAECED-65CD-4C2F-90AB-5D548C3C7279 C2 C1214CD3-423C-406D-B5BD-95BF432ED3E3 C3 EB176C10-F754-4689-8B84-64B666381154 To ensure a single result of the
This query produces a single result for all three columns: C1 80AAECED-65CD-4C2F-90AB-5D548C3C7279 C2 80AAECED-65CD-4C2F-90AB-5D548C3C7279 C3 80AAECED-65CD-4C2F-90AB-5D548C3C7279 An alternative solution is to wrap the
This is an artifact of the current implementation. This behaviour may change in a future Firebird version. |
6.1.4. Joins
Joins combine data from two sources into a single set.
This is done on a row-by-row basis and usually involves checking a join condition in order to determine which rows should be merged and appear in the resulting dataset.
There are several types (INNER
, OUTER
) and classes (qualified, natural, etc.) of joins, each with its own syntax and rules.
Since joins can be chained, the datasets involved in a join may themselves be joined sets.
SELECT ... FROM <source> [<joins>] [...] <source> ::= table [[AS] alias] | selectable-stored-procedure [(<args>)] [[AS] alias] | <derived-table> | LATERAL <derived-table> <joins> ::= <join> [<join> ...] <join> ::= [<join-type>] JOIN <source> <join-condition> | NATURAL [<join-type>] JOIN <source> | {CROSS JOIN | ,} <source> <join-type> ::= INNER | {LEFT | RIGHT | FULL} [OUTER] <join-condition> ::= ON <condition> | USING (<column-list>)
Argument | Description |
---|---|
table |
Name of a table, view or CTE |
selectable-stored-procedure |
Name of a selectable stored procedure |
args |
Selectable stored procedure input parameter(s) |
derived-table |
Derived table query expression |
alias |
An alias for a data source (table, view, procedure, CTE, derived table) |
condition |
Join condition (criterion) |
column-list |
The list of columns used for an equi-join |
Inner vs. Outer Joins
A join always combines data rows from two sets (usually referred to as the left set and the right set). By default, only rows that meet the join condition (i.e. that match at least one row in the other set when the join condition is applied) make it into the result set. This default type of join is called an inner join. Suppose we have the following two tables:
ID | S |
---|---|
87 |
Just some text |
235 |
Silence |
CODE | X |
---|---|
-23 |
56.7735 |
87 |
416.0 |
If we join these tables like this:
select *
from A
join B on A.id = B.code;
then the result set will be:
ID | S | CODE | X |
---|---|---|---|
87 |
Just some text |
87 |
416.0 |
The first row of A
has been joined with the second row of B
because together they met the condition “A.id = B.code
”.
The other rows from the source tables have no match in the opposite set and are therefore not included in the join.
Remember, this is an INNER
join.
We can make that fact explicit by writing:
select *
from A
inner join B on A.id = B.code;
However, since INNER
is the default, it is usually ommitted.
It is perfectly possible that a row in the left set matches several rows from the right set or vice versa. In that case, all those combinations are included, and we can get results like:
ID | S | CODE | X |
---|---|---|---|
87 |
Just some text |
87 |
416.0 |
87 |
Just some text |
87 |
-1.0 |
-23 |
Don’t know |
-23 |
56.7735 |
-23 |
Still don’t know |
-23 |
56.7735 |
-23 |
I give up |
-23 |
56.7735 |
Sometimes we want (or need) all the rows of one or both of the sources to appear in the joined set, regardless of whether they match a record in the other source.
This is where outer joins come in.
A LEFT
outer join includes all the records from the left set, but only matching records from the right set.
In a RIGHT
outer join it’s the other way around.
FULL
outer joins include all the records from both sets.
In all outer joins, the “holes” (the places where an included source record doesn’t have a match in the other set) are filled up with NULL
s.
In order to make an outer join, you must specify LEFT
, RIGHT
or FULL
, optionally followed by the keyword OUTER
.
Below are the results of the various outer joins when applied to our original tables A
and B
:
select *
from A
left [outer] join B on A.id = B.code;
ID | S | CODE | X |
---|---|---|---|
87 |
Just some text |
87 |
416.0 |
235 |
Silence |
<null> |
<null> |
select *
from A
right [outer] join B on A.id = B.code
ID | S | CODE | X |
---|---|---|---|
<null> |
<null> |
-23 |
56.7735 |
87 |
Just some text |
87 |
416.0 |
select *
from A
full [outer] join B on A.id = B.code
ID | S | CODE | X |
---|---|---|---|
<null> |
<null> |
-23 |
56.7735 |
87 |
Just some text |
87 |
416.0 |
235 |
Silence |
<null> |
<null> |
Qualified joins
Qualified joins specify conditions for the combining of rows.
This happens either explicitly in an ON
clause or implicitly in a USING
clause.
<qualified-join> ::= [<join-type>] JOIN <source> <join-condition> <join-type> ::= INNER | {LEFT | RIGHT | FULL} [OUTER] <join-condition> ::= ON <condition> | USING (<column-list>)
Explicit-condition joins
Most qualified joins have an ON
clause, with an explicit condition that can be any valid Boolean expression, but usually involves some comparison between the two sources involved.
Quite often, the condition is an equality test (or a number of AND
ed equality tests) using the “=
” operator.
Joins like these are called equi-joins.
(The examples in the section on inner and outer joins were al equi-joins.)
Examples of joins with an explicit condition:
/* Select all Detroit customers who made a purchase
in 2013, along with the purchase details: */
select * from customers c
join sales s on s.cust_id = c.id
where c.city = 'Detroit' and s.year = 2013;
/* Same as above, but include non-buying customers: */
select * from customers c
left join sales s on s.cust_id = c.id
where c.city = 'Detroit' and s.year = 2013;
/* For each man, select the women who are taller than he.
Men for whom no such woman exists are not included. */
select m.fullname as man, f.fullname as woman
from males m
join females f on f.height > m.height;
/* Select all pupils with their class and mentor.
Pupils without a mentor are also included.
Pupils without a class are not included. */
select p.firstname, p.middlename, p.lastname,
c.name, m.name
from pupils p
join classes c on c.id = p.class
left join mentors m on m.id = p.mentor;
Named columns joins
Equi-joins often compare columns that have the same name in both tables. If this is the case, we can also use the second type of qualified join: the named columns join.
Named columns joins are not supported in Dialect 1 databases. |
Named columns joins have a USING
clause which states just the column names.
So instead of this:
select * from flotsam f
join jetsam j
on f.sea = j.sea
and f.ship = j.ship;
we can also write:
select * from flotsam
join jetsam using (sea, ship)
which is considerably shorter.
The result set is a little different though — at least when using “SELECT *
”:
-
The explicit-condition join — with the
ON
clause — will contain each of the columnsSEA
andSHIP
twice: once from tableFLOTSAM
, and once from tableJETSAM
. Obviously, they will have the same values. -
The named columns join — with the
USING
clause — will contain these columns only once.
If you want all the columns in the result set of the named columns join, set up your query like this:
select f.*, j.*
from flotsam f
join jetsam j using (sea, ship);
This will give you the exact same result set as the explicit-condition join.
For an OUTER
named columns join, there’s an additional twist when using “SELECT *
” or an unqualified column name from the USING
list:
If a row from one source set doesn’t have a match in the other but must still be included because of the LEFT
, RIGHT
or FULL
directive, the merged column in the joined set gets the non-NULL
value.
That is fair enough, but now you can’t tell whether this value came from the left set, the right set, or both.
This can be especially deceiving when the value came from the right hand set, because “*
” always shows combined columns in the left hand part — even in the case of a RIGHT
join.
Whether this is a problem or not depends on the situation.
If it is, use the “a.*, b.*
” approach shown above, with a
and b
the names or aliases of the two sources.
Or better yet, avoid “*
” altogether in your serious queries and qualify all column names in joined sets.
This has the additional benefit that it forces you to think about which data you want to retrieve and where from.
It is your responsibility to make sure the column names in the USING
list are of compatible types between the two sources.
If the types are compatible but not equal, the engine converts them to the type with the broadest range of values before comparing the values.
This will also be the data type of the merged column that shows up in the result set if “SELECT *
” or the unqualified column name is used.
Qualified columns on the other hand will always retain their original data type.
If, when joining by named columns, you are using a join column in the
However:
The fact is, the unspecified column in this case is implicitly replaced by `COALESCE(a.x, b.x). This clever trick is used to disambiguate column names, but it also interferes with the use of the index. |
Natural joins
Taking the idea of the named columns join a step further, a natural join performs an automatic equi-join on all the columns that have the same name in the left and right table. The data types of these columns must be compatible.
Natural joins are not supported in Dialect 1 databases. |
<natural-join> ::= NATURAL [<join-type>] JOIN <source> <join-type> ::= INNER | {LEFT | RIGHT | FULL} [OUTER]
Given these two tables:
create table TA (
a bigint,
s varchar(12),
ins_date date
);
create table TB (
a bigint,
descr varchar(12),
x float,
ins_date date
);
A natural join on TA
and TB
would involve the columns a
and ins_date
, and the following two statements would have the same effect:
select * from TA
natural join TB;
select * from TA
join TB using (a, ins_date);
Like all joins, natural joins are inner joins by default, but you can turn them into outer joins by specifying LEFT
, RIGHT
or FULL
before the JOIN
keyword.
If there are no columns with the same name in the two source relations, a |
Cross joins
A cross join produces the full set product of the two data sources. This means that it successfully matches every row in the left source to every row in the right source.
<cross-join> ::= {CROSS JOIN | ,} <source>
Use of the comma syntax is discouraged, and we recommend using the explicit join syntax.
Cross-joining two sets is equivalent to joining them on a tautology (a condition that is always true). The following two statements have the same effect:
select * from TA
cross join TB;
select * from TA
join TB on 1 = 1;
Cross joins are inner joins, because they only include matching records – it just so happens that every record matches! An outer cross join, if it existed, wouldn’t add anything to the result, because what outer joins add are non-matching records, and these don’t exist in cross joins.
Cross joins are seldom useful, except if you want to list all the possible combinations of two or more variables. Suppose you are selling a product that comes in different sizes, different colors and different materials. If these variables are each listed in a table of their own, this query would return all the combinations:
select m.name, s.size, c.name
from materials m
cross join sizes s
cross join colors c;
Implicit Joins
In the SQL:89 standard, the tables involved in a join were specified as a comma-delimited list in the FROM
clause (in other words, a cross join).
The join conditions were then specified in the WHERE
clause among other search terms.
This type of join is called an implicit join.
An example of an implicit join:
/*
* A sample of all Detroit customers who
* made a purchase.
*/
SELECT *
FROM customers c, sales s
WHERE s.cust_id = c.id AND c.city = 'Detroit'
Mixing Explicit and Implicit Joins
Mixing explicit and implicit joins is not recommend, but is allowed. However, some types of mixing are not supported by Firebird.
For example, the following query will raise the error “Column does not belong to referenced table”
SELECT *
FROM TA, TB
JOIN TC ON TA.COL1 = TC.COL1
WHERE TA.COL2 = TB.COL2
That is because the explicit join cannot see the TA
table.
However, the next query will complete without error, since the restriction is not violated.
SELECT *
FROM TA, TB
JOIN TC ON TB.COL1 = TC.COL1
WHERE TA.COL2 = TB.COL2
A Note on Equality
This note about equality and inequality operators applies everywhere in Firebird’s SQL language, not just in |
The “=
” operator, which is explicitly used in many conditional joins and implicitly in named column joins and natural joins, only matches values to values.
According to the SQL standard, NULL
is not a value and hence two NULL
s are neither equal nor unequal to one another.
If you need NULL
s to match each other in a join, use the IS NOT DISTINCT FROM
operator.
This operator returns true if the operands have the same value or if they are both NULL
.
select *
from A join B
on A.id is not distinct from B.code;
Likewise, in the — extremely rare — cases where you want to join on inequality, use IS DISTINCT FROM
, not “<>
”, if you want NULL
to be considered different from any value and two NULL
s considered equal:
select *
from A join B
on A.id is distinct from B.code;
Ambiguous field names in joins
Firebird rejects unqualified field names in a query if these field names exist in more than one dataset involved in a join.
This is even true for inner equi-joins where the field name figures in the ON
clause like this:
select a, b, c
from TA
join TB on TA.a = TB.a;
There is one exception to this rule: with named columns joins and natural joins, the unqualified field name of a column taking part in the matching process may be used legally and refers to the merged column of the same name.
For named columns joins, these are the columns listed in the USING
clause.
For natural joins, they are the columns that have the same name in both relations.
But please notice again that, especially in outer joins, plain colname
isn’t always the same as left.colname
or right.colname
.
Types may differ, and one of the qualified columns may be NULL
while the other isn’t.
In that case, the value in the merged, unqualified column may mask the fact that one of the source values is absent.
Joins with LATERAL
Derived Tables
A derived table defined with the LATERAL
keyword is called a lateral derived table.
If a derived table is defined as lateral, then it is allowed to refer to other tables in the same FROM
clause, but only those declared before it in the FROM
clause.
/* select customers with their last order date and number */
select c.name, ox.order_date as last_order, ox.number
from customer c
left join LATERAL (
select first 1 o.order_date, o.number
from orders o
where o.id_customer = c.id
order by o.ORDER_DATE desc
) as ox on true
--
select dt.population, dt.city_name, c.country_name
from (select distinct country_name from cities) AS c
cross join LATERAL (
select first 1 city_name, population
from cities
where cities.country_name = c.country_name
order by population desc
) AS dt;
--
select salespeople.name,
max_sale.amount,
customer_of_max_sale.customer_name
from salespeople,
LATERAL ( select max(amount) as amount
from all_sales
where all_sales.salesperson_id = salespeople.id
) as max_sale,
LATERAL ( select customer_name
from all_sales
where all_sales.salesperson_id = salespeople.id
and all_sales.amount = max_sale.amount
) as customer_of_max_sale;
6.1.5. The WHERE
clause
The WHERE
clause serves to limit the rows returned to the ones that the caller is interested in.
The condition following the keyword WHERE
can be as simple as a check like “AMOUNT = 3
” or it can be a multilayered, convoluted expression containing subselects, predicates, function calls, mathematical and logical operators, context variables and more.
The condition in the WHERE
clause is often called the search condition, the search expression or simply the search.
In DSQL and ESQL, the search expression may contain parameters.
This is useful if a query has to be repeated a number of times with different input values.
In the SQL string as it is passed to the server, question marks are used as placeholders for the parameters.
They are called positional parameters because they can only be told apart by their position in the string.
Connectivity libraries often support named parameters of the form :id
, :amount
, :a
etc.
These are more user-friendly;
the library takes care of translating the named parameters to positional parameters before passing the statement to the server.
The search condition may also contain local (PSQL) or host (ESQL) variable names, preceded by a colon.
SELECT ... FROM ... [...] WHERE <search-condition> [...]
Parameter | Description |
---|---|
search-condition |
A Boolean expression returning TRUE, FALSE or possibly UNKNOWN (NULL) |
Only those rows for which the search condition evaluates to TRUE
are included in the result set.
Be careful with possible NULL
outcomes: if you negate a NULL
expression with NOT
, the result will still be NULL
and the row will not pass.
This is demonstrated in one of the examples below.
Examples
select genus, species from mammals
where family = 'Felidae'
order by genus;
select * from persons
where birthyear in (1880, 1881)
or birthyear between 1891 and 1898;
select name, street, borough, phone
from schools s
where exists (select * from pupils p where p.school = s.id)
order by borough, street;
select * from employees
where salary >= 10000 and position <> 'Manager';
select name from wrestlers
where region = 'Europe'
and weight > all (select weight from shot_putters
where region = 'Africa');
select id, name from players
where team_id = (select id from teams where name = 'Buffaloes');
select sum (population) from towns
where name like '%dam'
and province containing 'land';
select password from usertable
where username = current_user;
The following example shows what can happen if the search condition evaluates to NULL
.
Suppose you have a table listing some children’s names and the number of marbles they possess. At a certain moment, the table contains these data:
CHILD | MARBLES |
---|---|
Anita |
23 |
Bob E. |
12 |
Chris |
<null> |
Deirdre |
1 |
Eve |
17 |
Fritz |
0 |
Gerry |
21 |
Hadassah |
<null> |
Isaac |
6 |
First, please notice the difference between NULL
and 0: Fritz is known to have no marbles at all, Chris’s and Hadassah’s marble counts are unknown.
Now, if you issue this SQL statement:
select list(child) from marbletable where marbles > 10;
you will get the names Anita, Bob E., Eve and Gerry. These children all have more than 10 marbles.
If you negate the expression:
select list(child) from marbletable where not marbles > 10
it’s the turn of Deirdre, Fritz and Isaac to fill the list. Chris and Hadassah are not included, because they aren’t known to have ten marbles or less. Should you change that last query to:
select list(child) from marbletable where marbles <= 10;
the result will still be the same, because the expression NULL <= 10
yields UNKNOWN
.
This is not the same as TRUE
, so Chris and Hadassah are not listed.
If you want them listed with the “poor” children, change the query to:
select list(child) from marbletable
where marbles <= 10 or marbles is null;
Now the search condition becomes true for Chris and Hadassah, because “marbles is null
” obviously returns TRUE
in their case.
In fact, the search condition cannot be NULL
for anybody now.
Lastly, two examples of SELECT
queries with parameters in the search.
It depends on the application how you should define query parameters and even if it is possible at all.
Notice that queries like these cannot be executed immediately: they have to be prepared first.
Once a parameterized query has been prepared, the user (or calling code) can supply values for the parameters and have it executed many times, entering new values before every call.
How the values are entered and the execution started is up to the application.
In a GUI environment, the user typically types the parameter values in one or more text boxes and then clicks an “Execute”, “Run” or “Refresh” button.
select name, address, phone frome stores
where city = ? and class = ?;
select * from pants
where model = :model and size = :size and color = :col;
The last query cannot be passed directly to the engine; the application must convert it to the other format first, mapping named parameters to positional parameters.
6.1.6. The GROUP BY
clause
GROUP BY
merges output rows that have the same combination of values in its item list into a single row.
Aggregate functions in the select list are applied to each group individually instead of to the dataset as a whole.
If the select list only contains aggregate columns or, more generally, columns whose values don’t depend on individual rows in the underlying set, GROUP BY
is optional.
When omitted, the final result set of will consist of a single row (provided that at least one aggregated column is present).
If the select list contains both aggregate columns and columns whose values may vary per row, the GROUP BY
clause becomes mandatory.
SELECT ... FROM ... GROUP BY <grouping-item> [, <grouping-item> ...] [HAVING <grouped-row-condition>] ... <grouping-item> ::= <non-aggr-select-item> | <non-aggr-expression> <non-aggr-select-item> ::= column-copy | column-alias | column-position
Argument | Description |
---|---|
non-aggr-expression |
Any non-aggregating expression that is not included in the |
column-copy |
A literal copy, from the |
column-alias |
The alias, from the |
column-position |
The position number, in the |
A general rule of thumb is that every non-aggregate item in the SELECT
list must also be in the GROUP BY
list.
You can do this in three ways:
-
By copying the item verbatim from the select list, e.g. “
class
” or “'D:' || upper(doccode)
”. -
By specifying the column alias, if it exists.
-
By specifying the column position as an integer literal between 1 and the number of columns. Integer values resulting from expressions or parameter substitutions are simply invariables and will be used as such in the grouping. They will have no effect though, as their value is the same for each row.
If you group by a column position, the expression at that position is copied internally from the select list. If it concerns a subquery, that subquery will be executed again in the grouping phase. That is to say, grouping by the column position, rather than duplicating the subquery expression in the grouping clause, saves keystrokes and bytes, but it is not a way of saving processing cycles! |
In addition to the required items, the grouping list may also contain:
-
Columns from the source table that are not in the select list, or non-aggregate expressions based on such columns. Adding such columns may further subdivide the groups. However, since these columns are not in the select list, you can’t tell which aggregated row corresponds to which value in the column. So, in general, if you are interested in this information, you also include the column or expression in the select list — which brings you back to the rule: “every non-aggregate column in the select list must also be in the grouping list”.
-
Expressions that aren’t dependent on the data in the underlying set, e.g. constants, context variables, single-value non-correlated subselects etc. This is only mentioned for completeness, as adding such items is utterly pointless: they don’t affect the grouping at all. “Harmless but useless” items like these may also figure in the select list without being copied to the grouping list.
Examples
When the select list contains only aggregate columns, GROUP BY
is not mandatory:
select count(*), avg(age) from students
where sex = 'M';
This will return a single row listing the number of male students and their average age.
Adding expressions that don’t depend on values in individual rows of table STUDENTS
doesn’t change that:
select count(*), avg(age), current_date from students
where sex = 'M';
The row will now have an extra column showing the current date, but other than that, nothing fundamental has changed.
A GROUP BY
clause is still not required.
However, in both the above examples it is allowed. This is perfectly valid:
select count(*), avg(age) from students
where sex = 'M'
group by class;
This will return a row for each class that has boys in it, listing the number of boys and their average age in that particular class.
(If you also leave the current_date
field in, this value will be repeated on every row, which is not very exciting.)
The above query has a major drawback though: it gives you information about the different classes, but it doesn’t tell you which row applies to which class.
In order to get that extra bit of information, the non-aggregate column CLASS
must be added to the select list:
select class, count(*), avg(age) from students
where sex = 'M'
group by class;
Now we have a useful query.
Notice that the addition of column CLASS
also makes the GROUP BY
clause mandatory.
We can’t drop that clause anymore, unless we also remove CLASS
from the column list.
The output of our last query may look something like this:
CLASS | COUNT | AVG |
---|---|---|
2A |
12 |
13.5 |
2B |
9 |
13.9 |
3A |
11 |
14.6 |
3B |
12 |
14.4 |
… |
… |
… |
The headings “COUNT” and “AVG” are not very informative. In a simple case like this, you might get away with that, but in general you should give aggregate columns a meaningful name by aliasing them:
select class,
count(*) as num_boys,
avg(age) as boys_avg_age
from students
where sex = 'M'
group by class;
As you may recall from the formal syntax of the columns list, the AS
keyword is optional.
Adding more non-aggregate (or rather: row-dependent) columns requires adding them to the GROUP BY
clause too.
For instance, you might want to see the above information for girls as well;
and you may also want to differentiate between boarding and day students:
select class,
sex,
boarding_type,
count(*) as number,
avg(age) as avg_age
from students
group by class, sex, boarding_type;
This may give you the following result:
CLASS | SEX | BOARDING_TYPE | NUMBER | AVG_AGE |
---|---|---|---|---|
2A |
F |
BOARDING |
9 |
13.3 |
2A |
F |
DAY |
6 |
13.5 |
2A |
M |
BOARDING |
7 |
13.6 |
2A |
M |
DAY |
5 |
13.4 |
2B |
F |
BOARDING |
11 |
13.7 |
2B |
F |
DAY |
5 |
13.7 |
2B |
M |
BOARDING |
6 |
13.8 |
… |
… |
… |
… |
… |
Each row in the result set corresponds to one particular combination of the columns CLASS
, SEX
and BOARDING_TYPE
.
The aggregate results — number and average age — are given for each of these rather specific groups individually.
In a query like this, you don’t see a total for boys as a whole, or day students as a whole.
That’s the tradeoff: the more non-aggregate columns you add, the more you can pinpoint very specific groups, but the more you also lose sight of the general picture.
Of course, you can still obtain the “coarser” aggregates through separate queries.
HAVING
Just as a WHERE
clause limits the rows in a dataset to those that meet the search condition, so the HAVING
sub-clause imposes restrictions on the aggregated rows in a grouped set.
HAVING
is optional, and can only be used in conjunction with GROUP BY
.
The condition(s) in the HAVING
clause can refer to:
-
Any aggregated column in the select list. This is the most widely used case.
-
Any aggregated expression that is not in the select list, but allowed in the context of the query. This is sometimes useful too.
-
Any column in the
GROUP BY
list. While legal, it is more efficient to filter on these non-aggregated data at an earlier stage: in theWHERE
clause. -
Any expression whose value doesn’t depend on the contents of the dataset (like a constant or a context variable). This is valid but utterly pointless, because it will either suppress the entire set or leave it untouched, based on conditions that have nothing to do with the set itself.
A HAVING
clause can not contain:
-
Non-aggregated column expressions that are not in the
GROUP BY
list. -
Column positions. An integer in the
HAVING
clause is just an integer. -
Column aliases –- not even if they appear in the
GROUP BY
clause!
Examples
Building on our earlier examples, this could be used to skip small groups of students:
select class,
count(*) as num_boys,
avg(age) as boys_avg_age
from students
where sex = 'M'
group by class
having count(*) >= 5;
To select only groups that have a minimum age spread:
select class,
count(*) as num_boys,
avg(age) as boys_avg_age
from students
where sex = 'M'
group by class
having max(age) - min(age) > 1.2;
Notice that if you’re really interested in this information, you’d normally include min(age)
and max(age)
-– or the expression “max(age) - min(age)
” –- in the select list as well!
To include only 3rd classes:
select class,
count(*) as num_boys,
avg(age) as boys_avg_age
from students
where sex = 'M'
group by class
having class starting with '3';
Better would be to move this condition to the WHERE
clause:
select class,
count(*) as num_boys,
avg(age) as boys_avg_age
from students
where sex = 'M' and class starting with '3'
group by class;
6.1.7. The WINDOW
Clause
The WINDOW
clause defines one or more named Windows that can be referenced by window functions in the current query specification.
<query_spec> ::= SELECT [<limit_clause>] [<distinct_clause>] <select_list> <from_clause> [<where_clause>] [<group_clause>] [<having_clause>] [<named_windows_clause>] [<plan_clause>] <named_windows_clause> ::= WINDOW <window_definition> [, <window_definition> ...] <window definition> ::= new_window_name AS <window_specification> <window_specification> ::= !! See Window (Analytical) Functions !!
In a query with multiple SELECT
and WINDOW
clauses (for example, with subqueries), the scope of the `new_window_name_ is confined to its query context.
That means a window name from an inner context cannot be used in an outer context, nor vice versa.
However, the same window name can be used independently in different contexts, though to avoid confusion it might be better to avoid this.
For more information, see Window (Analytical) Functions.
Example Using Named Windows
select
id,
department,
salary,
count(*) over w1,
first_value(salary) over w2,
last_value(salary) over w2
from employee
window w1 as (partition by department),
w2 as (w1 order by salary)
order by department, salary;
6.1.8. The PLAN
Clause
The PLAN
clause enables the user to submit a data retrieval plan, thus overriding the plan that the optimizer would have generated automatically.
PLAN <plan-expr> <plan-expr> ::= (<plan-item> [, <plan-item> ...]) | <sorted-item> | <joined-item> | <merged-item> | <hash-item> <sorted-item> ::= SORT (<plan-item>) <joined-item> ::= JOIN (<plan-item>, <plan-item> [, <plan-item> ...]) <merged-item> ::= [SORT] MERGE (<sorted-item>, <sorted-item> [, <sorted-item> ...]) <hash-item> ::= HASH (<plan-item>, <plan-item> [, <plan-item> ...]) <plan-item> ::= <basic-item> | <plan-expr> <basic-item> ::= <relation> { NATURAL | INDEX (<indexlist>) | ORDER index [INDEX (<indexlist>)] } <relation> ::= table | view [table] <indexlist> ::= index [, index ...]
Argument | Description |
---|---|
table |
Table name or its alias |
view |
View name |
index |
Index name |
Every time a user submits a query to the Firebird engine, the optimizer computes a data retrieval strategy.
Most Firebird clients can make this retrieval plan visible to the user.
In Firebird’s own isql
utility, this is done with the command SET PLAN ON
.
If you are studying query plans rather than running queries, SET PLANONLY ON
will show the plan without executing the query.
Use SET PLANONLY OFF
to execute the query and show the plan.
A more detailed plan can be obtained when you enable an advanced plan.
In isql this can be done with |
In most situations, you can trust that Firebird will select the optimal query plan for you. However, if you have complicated queries that seem to be underperforming, it may very well be worth your while to examine the plan and see if you can improve on it.
Simple plans
The simplest plans consist of just a relation name followed by a retrieval method.
For example, for an unsorted single-table select without a WHERE
clause:
select * from students
plan (students natural);
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Table "STUDENTS" Full Scan
If there’s a WHERE
or a HAVING
clause, you can specify the index to be used for finding matches:
select * from students
where class = '3C'
plan (students index (ix_stud_class));
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Filter -> Table "STUDENTS" Access By ID -> Bitmap -> Index "IX_STUD_CLASS" Range Scan (full match)
The INDEX
directive is also used for join conditions (to be discussed a little later).
It can contain a list of indexes, separated by commas.
ORDER
specifies the index for sorting the set if an ORDER BY
or GROUP BY
clause is present:
select * from students
plan (students order pk_students)
order by id;
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Table "STUDENTS" Access By ID -> Index "PK_STUDENTS" Full Scan
ORDER
and INDEX
can be combined:
select * from students
where class >= '3'
plan (students order pk_students index (ix_stud_class))
order by id;
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Filter -> Table "STUDENTS" Access By ID -> Index "PK_STUDENTS" Full Scan -> Bitmap -> Index "IX_STUD_CLASS" Range Scan (lower bound: 1/1)
It is perfectly OK if ORDER
and INDEX
specify the same index:
select * from students
where class >= '3'
plan (students order ix_stud_class index (ix_stud_class))
order by class;
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Filter -> Table "STUDENTS" Access By ID -> Index "IX_STUD_CLASS" Range Scan (lower bound: 1/1) -> Bitmap -> Index "IX_STUD_CLASS" Range Scan (lower bound: 1/1)
For sorting sets when there’s no usable index available (or if you want to suppress its use), leave out ORDER
and prepend the plan expression with SORT
:
select * from students
plan sort (students natural)
order by name;
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Sort (record length: 128, key length: 56) -> Table "STUDENTS" Full Scan
Or when an index is used for the search:
select * from students
where class >= '3'
plan sort (students index (ix_stud_class))
order by name;
Advanced plan:
elect Expression -> Sort (record length: 136, key length: 56) -> Filter -> Table "STUDENTS" Access By ID -> Bitmap -> Index "IX_STUD_CLASS" Range Scan (lower bound: 1/1)
Notice that SORT
, unlike ORDER
, is outside the parentheses.
This reflects the fact that the data rows are retrieved unordered and sorted afterwards by the engine.
When selecting from a view, specify the view and the table involved.
For instance, if you have a view FRESHMEN
that selects just the first-year students:
select * from freshmen
plan (freshmen students natural);
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Table "STUDENTS" as "FRESHMEN" Full Scan
Or, for instance:
select * from freshmen
where id > 10
plan sort (freshmen students index (pk_students))
order by name desc;
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Sort (record length: 144, key length: 24) -> Filter -> Table "STUDENTS" as "FRESHMEN" Access By ID -> Bitmap -> Index "PK_STUDENTS" Range Scan (lower bound: 1/1)
If a table or view has been aliased, it is the alias, not the original name, that must be used in the |
Composite plans
When a join is made, you can specify the index which is to be used for matching.
You must also use the JOIN
directive on the two streams in the plan:
select s.id, s.name, s.class, c.mentor
from students s
join classes c on c.name = s.class
plan join (s natural, c index (pk_classes));
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Nested Loop Join (inner) -> Table "STUDENTS" as "S" Full Scan -> Filter -> Table "CLASSES" as "C" Access By ID -> Bitmap -> Index "PK_CLASSES" Unique Scan
The same join, sorted on an indexed column:
select s.id, s.name, s.class, c.mentor
from students s
join classes c on c.name = s.class
plan join (s order pk_students, c index (pk_classes))
order by s.id;
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Nested Loop Join (inner) -> Table "STUDENTS" as "S" Access By ID -> Index "PK_STUDENTS" Full Scan -> Filter -> Table "CLASSES" as "C" Access By ID -> Bitmap -> Index "PK_CLASSES" Unique Scan
And on a non-indexed column:
select s.id, s.name, s.class, c.mentor
from students s
join classes c on c.name = s.class
plan sort (join (s natural, c index (pk_classes)))
order by s.name;
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Sort (record length: 152, key length: 12) -> Nested Loop Join (inner) -> Table "STUDENTS" as "S" Full Scan -> Filter -> Table "CLASSES" as "C" Access By ID -> Bitmap -> Index "PK_CLASSES" Unique Scan
With a search condition added:
select s.id, s.name, s.class, c.mentor
from students s
join classes c on c.name = s.class
where s.class <= '2'
plan sort (join (s index (fk_student_class), c index (pk_classes)))
order by s.name;
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Sort (record length: 152, key length: 12) -> Nested Loop Join (inner) -> Filter -> Table "STUDENTS" as "S" Access By ID -> Bitmap -> Index "FK_STUDENT_CLASS" Range Scan (lower bound: 1/1) -> Filter -> Table "CLASSES" as "C" Access By ID -> Bitmap -> Index "PK_CLASSES" Unique Scan
As a left outer join:
select s.id, s.name, s.class, c.mentor
from classes c
left join students s on c.name = s.class
where s.class <= '2'
plan sort (join (c natural, s index (fk_student_class)))
order by s.name;
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Sort (record length: 192, key length: 56) -> Filter -> Nested Loop Join (outer) -> Table "CLASSES" as "C" Full Scan -> Filter -> Table "STUDENTS" as "S" Access By ID -> Bitmap -> Index "FK_STUDENT_CLASS" Range Scan (full match)
If there are no indices available to match the join condition (or if you don’t want to use it), then it is possible connect the streams using HASH
or MERGE
method.
To connect using the HASH
method in the plan, the HASH
directive is used instead of the JOIN
directive.
In this case, the smaller (secondary) stream is materialized completely into an internal buffer.
While reading this secondary stream, a hash function is applied and a pair {hash, pointer to buffer} is written to a hash table.
Then the primary stream is read and its hash key is tested against the hash table.
select *
from students s
join classes c on c.cookie = s.cookie
plan hash (c natural, s natural)
Advanced plan:
Select Expression -> Filter -> Hash Join (inner) -> Table "STUDENTS" as "S" Full Scan -> Record Buffer (record length: 145) -> Table "CLASSES" as "C" Full Scan
For a MERGE
join, the plan must first sort both streams on their join column(s) and then merge.
This is achieved with the SORT
directive (which we’ve already seen) and MERGE
instead of JOIN
:
select * from students s
join classes c on c.cookie = s.cookie
plan merge (sort (c natural), sort (s natural));
Adding an ORDER BY
clause means the result of the merge must also be sorted:
select * from students s
join classes c on c.cookie = s.cookie
plan sort (merge (sort (c natural), sort (s natural)))
order by c.name, s.id;
Finally, we add a search condition on two indexable colums of table STUDENTS
:
select * from students s
join classes c on c.cookie = s.cookie
where s.id < 10 and s.class <= '2'
plan sort (merge (sort (c natural),
sort (s index (pk_students, fk_student_class))))
order by c.name, s.id;
As follows from the formal syntax definition, JOIN
s and MERGE
s in the plan may combine more than two streams.
Also, every plan expression may be used as a plan item in an encompassing plan.
This means that plans of certain complicated queries may have various nesting levels.
Finally, instead of MERGE
you may also write SORT MERGE
.
As this makes absolutely no difference and may create confusion with “real” SORT
directives (the ones that do make a difference), it’s probably best to stick to plain MERGE
.
In addition to the plan for the main query, you can specify a plan for each subquery. For example, the following query with multiple plans will work:
select *
from color
where exists (
select *
from hors
where horse.code_color = color.code_color
plan (horse index (fk_horse_color)))
plan (color natural)
Occasionally, the optimizer will accept a plan and then not follow it, even though it does not reject it as invalid. One such example was
It is advisable to treat such as plan as “deprecated”. |
6.1.9. UNION
The UNION
clause concatenates two or more datasets, thus increasing the number of rows but not the number of columns.
Datasets taking part in a UNION
must have the same number of columns, and columns at corresponding positions must be of the same type.
Other than that, they may be totally unrelated.
By default, a union suppresses duplicate rows.
UNION ALL
shows all rows, including any duplicates.
The optional DISTINCT
keyword makes the default behaviour explicit.
<union> ::= <individual-select> UNION [{DISTINCT | ALL}] <individual-select> [ [UNION [{DISTINCT | ALL}] <individual-select> ... ] [<union-wide-clauses>] <individual-select> ::= SELECT [TRANSACTION name] [FIRST m] [SKIP n] [{DISTINCT | ALL}] <columns> [INTO <host-varlist>] FROM <source> [[AS] alias] [<joins>] [WHERE <condition>] [GROUP BY <grouping-list> [HAVING <aggregate-condition>]] [PLAN <plan-expr>] <union-wide-clauses> ::= [ORDER BY <ordering-list>] [{ ROWS <m> [TO <n>] | [OFFSET n {ROW | ROWS}] [FETCH {FIRST | NEXT} [m] {ROW | ROWS} ONLY] }] [FOR UPDATE [OF <columns>]] [WITH LOCK] [INTO <PSQL-varlist>]
Unions take their column names from the first select query.
If you want to alias union columns, do so in the column list of the topmost SELECT
.
Aliases in other participating selects are allowed and may even be useful, but will not propagate to the union level.
If a union has an ORDER BY
clause, the only allowed sort items are integer literals indicating 1-based column positions, optionally followed by an ASC
/DESC
and/or a NULLS {FIRST | LAST}
directive.
This also implies that you cannot order a union by anything that isn’t a column in the union.
(You can, however, wrap it in a derived table, which gives you back all the usual sort options.)
Unions are allowed in subqueries of any kind and can themselves contain subqueries. They can also contain joins, and can take part in a join when wrapped in a derived table.
Examples
This query presents information from different music collections in one dataset using unions:
select id, title, artist, length, 'CD' as medium
from cds
union
select id, title, artist, length, 'LP'
from records
union
select id, title, artist, length, 'MC'
from cassettes
order by 3, 2 -- artist, title;
If id
, title
, artist
and length
are the only fields in the tables involved, the query can also be written as:
select c.*, 'CD' as medium
from cds c
union
select r.*, 'LP'
from records r
union
select c.*, 'MC'
from cassettes c
order by 3, 2 -- artist, title;
Qualifying the “stars” is necessary here because they are not the only item in the column list. Notice how the “c” aliases in the first and third select do not conflict with each other: their scopes are not union-wide but apply only to their respective select queries.
The next query retrieves names and phone numbers from translators and proofreaders.
Translators who also work as proofreaders will show up only once in the result set, provided their phone number is the same in both tables.
The same result can be obtained without DISTINCT
.
With ALL
, these people would appear twice.
select name, phone from translators
union distinct
select name, telephone from proofreaders;
A UNION
within a subquery:
select name, phone, hourly_rate from clowns
where hourly_rate < all
(select hourly_rate from jugglers
union
select hourly_rate from acrobats)
order by hourly_rate;
6.1.10. ORDER BY
When a SELECT
statement is executed, the result set is not sorted in any way.
It often happens that rows appear to be sorted chronologically, simply because they are returned in the same order they were added to the table by INSERT
statements.
This is not something you should rely on: the order may change depending on the plan or updates to rows, etc.
To specify an explicit sorting order for the set specification, an ORDER BY
clause is used.
SELECT ... FROM ... ... ORDER BY <ordering-item> [, <ordering-item> …] <ordering-item> ::= {col-name | col-alias | col-position | <expression>} [COLLATE collation-name] [ASC[ENDING] | DESC[ENDING]] [NULLS {FIRST|LAST}]
Argument | Description |
---|---|
col-name |
Full column name |
col-alias |
Column alias |
col-position |
Column position in the |
expression |
Any expression |
collation-name |
Collation name (sorting order for string types) |
The ORDER BY
consists of a comma-separated list of the columns on which the result data set should be sorted.
The sort order can be specified by the name of the column — but only if the column was not previously aliased in the SELECT
columns list.
The alias must be used if it was used in the select list.
The ordinal position number of the column in the SELECT
column list, the alias given to the column in the SELECT
list with the help of the AS
keyword, or the number of the column in the SELECT
list can be used without restriction.
The three forms of expressing the columns for the sort order can be mixed in the same ORDER BY
clause.
For instance, one column in the list can be specified by its name and another column can be specified by its number.
If you sort by column position or alias, then the expression corresponding to this position (alias) will be copied from the |
If you use the column position to specify the sort order for a query of the |
Sorting Direction
The keyword ASCENDING
— usually abbreviated to ASC
— specifies a sort direction from lowest to highest.
ASCENDING
is the default sort direction.
The keyword DESCENDING
— usually abbreviated to DESC
— specifies a sort direction from highest to lowest.
Specifying ascending order for one column and descending order for another is allowed.
Collation Order
The keyword COLLATE
specifies the collation order for a string column if you need a collation that is different from the normal one for this column.
The normal collation order will be either the default one for the database character set, or the one set explicitly in the column’s definition.
NULLs Position
The keyword NULLS
defines where NULL in the associated column will fall in the sort order: NULLS FIRST
places the rows with the NULL
column above rows ordered by that column’s value;
NULLS LAST
places those rows after the ordered rows.
NULLS FIRST
is the default.
Ordering UNION
-ed Sets
The discrete queries contributing to a UNION
cannot take an ORDER BY
clause.
The only option is to order the entire output, using one ORDER BY
clause at the end of the overall query.
The simplest — and, in some cases, the only — method for specifying the sort order is by the ordinal column position. However, it is also valid to use the column names or aliases, from the first contributing query only.
The ASC
/DESC
and/or NULLS
directives are available for this global set.
If discrete ordering within the contributing set is required, use of derived tables or common table expressions for those sets may be a solution.
Examples of ORDER BY
Sorting the result set in ascending order, ordering by the RDB$CHARACTER_SET_ID
and RDB$COLLATION_ID
columns of the RDB$COLLATIONS
table:
SELECT
RDB$CHARACTER_SET_ID AS CHARSET_ID,
RDB$COLLATION_ID AS COLL_ID,
RDB$COLLATION_NAME AS NAME
FROM RDB$COLLATIONS
ORDER BY RDB$CHARACTER_SET_ID, RDB$COLLATION_ID;
The same, but sorting by the column aliases:
SELECT
RDB$CHARACTER_SET_ID AS CHARSET_ID,
RDB$COLLATION_ID AS COLL_ID,
RDB$COLLATION_NAME AS NAME
FROM RDB$COLLATIONS
ORDER BY CHARSET_ID, COLL_ID;
Sorting the output data by the column position numbers:
SELECT
RDB$CHARACTER_SET_ID AS CHARSET_ID,
RDB$COLLATION_ID AS COLL_ID,
RDB$COLLATION_NAME AS NAME
FROM RDB$COLLATIONS
ORDER BY 1, 2;
Sorting a SELECT *
query by position numbers — possible, but nasty and not recommended:
SELECT *
FROM RDB$COLLATIONS
ORDER BY 3, 2;
Sorting by the second column in the BOOKS
table, or — if BOOKS
has only one column — the FILMS.DIRECTOR
column:
SELECT
BOOKS.*,
FILMS.DIRECTOR
FROM BOOKS, FILMS
ORDER BY 2;
Sorting in descending order by the values of column PROCESS_TIME
, with NULL
s placed at the beginning of the set:
SELECT *
FROM MSG
ORDER BY PROCESS_TIME DESC NULLS FIRST;
Sorting the set obtained by a UNION
of two queries.
Results are sorted in descending order for the values in the second column, with NULL
s at the end of the set;
and in ascending order for the values of the first column with NULL
s at the beginning.
SELECT
DOC_NUMBER, DOC_DATE
FROM PAYORDER
UNION ALL
SELECT
DOC_NUMBER, DOC_DATE
FROM BUDGORDER
ORDER BY 2 DESC NULLS LAST, 1 ASC NULLS FIRST;
6.1.11. ROWS
Retrieving a slice of rows from an ordered set
DSQL, PSQL
SELECT <columns> FROM ... [WHERE ...] [ORDER BY ...] ROWS m [TO n]
Argument | Description |
---|---|
m, n |
Any integer expressions |
ROWS is non-standard syntax
|
Limits the amount of rows returned by the SELECT
statement to a specified number or range.
The ROWS
clause also does the same job as the FIRST
and SKIP
clauses, but neither are SQL-compliant.
Unlike FIRST
and SKIP
, and OFFSET
and FETCH
, the ROWS
and TO
clauses accept any type of integer expression as their arguments, without parentheses.
Of course, parentheses may still be needed for nested evaluations inside the expression, and a subquery must always be enclosed in parentheses.
|
Calling ROWS m
retrieves the first m records from the set specified.
Characteristics of using ROWS m
without a TO
clause:
-
If m is greater than the total number of records in the intermediate data set, the entire set is returned
-
If m = 0, an empty set is returned
-
If m < 0, the
SELECT
statement call fails with an error
Calling ROWS m TO n
retrieves the rows from the set, starting at row m and ending after row n — the set is inclusive.
Characteristics of using ROWS m
with a TO
clause:
-
If m is greater than the total number of rows in the intermediate set and n >= m, an empty set is returned
-
If m is not greater than n and n is greater than the total number of rows in the intermediate set, the result set will be limited to rows starting from m, up to the end of the set
-
If m < 1 and n < 1, the
SELECT
statement call fails with an error -
If n = m - 1, an empty set is returned
-
If n < m - 1, the
SELECT
statement call fails with an error
Using a TO
clause without a ROWS
clause:
While ROWS
replaces the FIRST
and SKIP
syntax, there is one situation where the ROWS
syntax does not provide the same behaviour: specifying SKIP n
on its own returns the entire intermediate set, without the first n rows.
The ROWS … TO
syntax needs a little help to achieve this.
With the ROWS
syntax, you need a ROWS
clause in association with the TO
clause and deliberately make the second (n) argument greater than the size of the intermediate data set.
This is achieved by creating an expression for n that uses a subquery to retrieve the count of rows in the intermediate set and adds 1 to it.
Replacing of FIRST
/SKIP
and OFFSET
/FETCH
The ROWS
clause can be used instead of the SQL-standard OFFSET
/FETCH
or non-standard FIRST
/SKIP
clauses, except the case where only OFFSET
or SKIP
is used, that is when the whole result set is returned except for skipping the specified number of rows from the beginning.
In order to implement this behaviour using ROWS
, you must specify the TO
clause with a value larger than the size of the returned result set.
Mixing ROWS
and FIRST
/SKIP
or OFFSET
/FETCH
ROWS
syntax cannot be mixed with FIRST
/SKIP
or OFFSET
/FETCH
in the same SELECT
expression.
Using the different syntaxes in different subqueries in the same statement is allowed.
ROWS
Syntax in UNION
Queries
When ROWS
is used in a UNION
query, the ROWS
directive is applied to the unioned set and must be placed after the last SELECT
statement.
If a need arises to limit the subsets returned by one or more SELECT
statements inside UNION
, there are a couple of options:
-
Use
FIRST
/SKIP
syntax in theseSELECT
statements — bearing in mind that an ordering clause (ORDER BY
) cannot be applied locally to the discrete queries, but only to the combined output. -
Convert the queries to derived tables with their own
ROWS
clauses.
Examples of ROWS
The following examples rewrite the examples used in the section about FIRST
and SKIP
, earlier in this chapter.
Retrieve the first ten names from the output of a sorted query on the PEOPLE
table:
SELECT id, name
FROM People
ORDER BY name ASC
ROWS 1 TO 10;
or its equivalent
SELECT id, name
FROM People
ORDER BY name ASC
ROWS 10;
Return all records from the PEOPLE
table except for the first 10 names:
SELECT id, name
FROM People
ORDER BY name ASC
ROWS 11 TO (SELECT COUNT(*) FROM People);
And this query will return the last 10 records (pay attention to the parentheses):
SELECT id, name
FROM People
ORDER BY name ASC
ROWS (SELECT COUNT(*) - 9 FROM People)
TO (SELECT COUNT(*) FROM People);
This one will return rows 81-100 from the PEOPLE
table:
SELECT id, name
FROM People
ORDER BY name ASC
ROWS 81 TO 100;
6.1.12. OFFSET
, FETCH
Retrieving a slice of rows from an ordered set
DSQL, PSQL
SELECT <columns> FROM ... [WHERE ...] [ORDER BY ...] [OFFSET <m> {ROW | ROWS}] [FETCH {FIRST | NEXT} [ <n> ] { ROW | ROWS } ONLY] <m>, <n> ::= <integer-literal> | <query-parameter>
Argument | Description |
---|---|
integer-literal |
Integer literal |
query-parameter |
Query parameter place-holder.
|
The OFFSET
and FETCH
clauses are an SQL:2008 compliant equivalent for FIRST
/SKIP
, and an alternative for ROWS
.
The OFFSET
clause specifies the number of rows to skip.
The FETCH
clause specifies the number of rows to fetch.
When <n> is left out of the FETCH
clause (eg FETCH FIRST ROW ONLY
), one row will be fetched.
The choice between ROW
or ROWS
, or FIRST
or NEXT
in the clauses is just for aesthetic purposes (eg making the query more readable or grammatically correct).
Technically there is no difference between OFFSET 10 ROW
or OFFSET 10 ROWS
, or FETCH NEXT 10 ROWS ONLY
or FETCH FIRST 10 ROWS ONLY
.
As with SKIP
and FIRST
, OFFSET
and FETCH
clauses can be applied independently, in both top-level and nested query expressions.
|
Examples of OFFSET
and FETCH
SELECT *
FROM T1
ORDER BY COL1
OFFSET 10 ROWS
SELECT *
FROM T1
ORDER BY COL1
FETCH FIRST 10 ROWS ONLY
OFFSET
and FETCH
clauses in a derived table and in the outer querySELECT *
FROM (
SELECT *
FROM T1
ORDER BY COL1 DESC
OFFSET 1 ROW
FETCH NEXT 10 ROWS ONLY
) a
ORDER BY a.COL1
FETCH FIRST ROW ONLY
The following examples rewrite the FIRST
/SKIP
examples and ROWS
examples earlier in this chapter.
Retrieve the first ten names from the output of a sorted query on the PEOPLE
table:
SELECT id, name
FROM People
ORDER BY name ASC
FETCH NEXT 10 ROWS ONLY;
Return all records from the PEOPLE
table except for the first 10 names:
SELECT id, name
FROM People
ORDER BY name ASC
OFFSET 10 ROWS;
And this query will return the last 10 records.
Contrary to FIRST
/SKIP
and ROWS
we cannot use expressions (including sub-queries).
To retrieve the last 10 rows, reverse the sort to the first (last) 10 rows, and then sort in the right order.
SELECT id, name
FROM (
SELECT id, name
FROM People
ORDER BY name DESC
FETCH FIRST 10 ROWS ONLY
) a
ORDER BY name ASC;
This one will return rows 81-100 from the PEOPLE
table:
SELECT id, name
FROM People
ORDER BY name ASC
OFFSET 80 ROWS
FETCH NEXT 20 ROWS;
6.1.13. FOR UPDATE [OF]
SELECT ... FROM single_table [WHERE ...] [FOR UPDATE [OF <column_list>]]
FOR UPDATE
does not do what its name suggests.
It’s only effect currently is to disable the pre-fetch buffer.
It is likely to change in future: the plan is to validate cursors marked with |
The OF
sub-clause does not do anything at all.
6.1.14. WITH LOCK
Limited pessimistic locking
DSQL, PSQL
SELECT ... FROM single_table [WHERE ...] [FOR UPDATE [OF <column_list>]] WITH LOCK
WITH LOCK
provides a limited explicit pessimistic locking capability for cautious use in conditions where the affected row set is:
-
extremely small (ideally singleton), and
-
precisely controlled by the application code.
This is for experts only!
The need for a pessimistic lock in Firebird is very rare indeed and should be well understood before use of this extension is considered. It is essential to understand the effects of transaction isolation and other transaction attributes before attempting to implement explicit locking in your application. |
If the WITH LOCK
clause succeeds, it will secure a lock on the selected rows and prevent any other transaction from obtaining write access to any of those rows, or their dependants, until your transaction ends.
WITH LOCK
can only be used with a top-level, single-table SELECT
statement.
It is not available:
-
in a subquery specification
-
for joined sets
-
with the
DISTINCT
operator, aGROUP BY
clause or any other aggregating operation -
with a view
-
with the output of a selectable stored procedure
-
with an external table
-
with a
UNION
query
As the engine considers, in turn, each record falling under an explicit lock statement, it returns either the record version that is the most currently committed, regardless of database state when the statement was submitted, or an exception.
Wait behaviour and conflict reporting depend on the transaction parameters specified in the TPB block:
TPB mode | Behaviour |
---|---|
isc_tpb_consistency |
Explicit locks are overridden by implicit or explicit table-level locks and are ignored. |
isc_tpb_concurrency + isc_tpb_nowait |
If a record is modified by any transaction that was committed since the transaction attempting to get explicit lock started, or an active transaction has performed a modification of this record, an update conflict exception is raised immediately. |
isc_tpb_concurrency + isc_tpb_wait |
If the record is modified by any transaction that has committed since the transaction attempting to get explicit lock started, an update conflict exception is raised immediately. If an active transaction is holding ownership on this record (via explicit locking or by a normal optimistic write-lock) the transaction attempting the explicit lock waits for the outcome of the blocking transaction and, when it finishes, attempts to get the lock on the record again. This means that, if the blocking transaction committed a modified version of this record, an update conflict exception will be raised. |
isc_tpb_read_committed + isc_tpb_nowait |
If there is an active transaction holding ownership on this record (via explicit locking or normal update), an update conflict exception is raised immediately. |
isc_tpb_read_committed + isc_tpb_wait |